Variador Seryman

Preface
Thanks for choosing E280 Vectorial General Purpose Inverter produced by Shenzhen Simphoenix
Electric Technologies Co., Ltd.
This Manual is the operating manual for E280 Vectorial General Purpose Inverter. It provides all
relevant instructions and precautions for installation, wiring, functional parameters, daily care and
maintenance, fault diagnosis and troubleshooting of E280 series inverters.
In order to use this series of inverters correctly, guarantee product's best performance and ensure
safety of users and equipment, be sure to read this manual carefully before using E280 series
inverters. Improper use may cause abnormity and malfunction of the inverter, reduce its service life
and even damage equipments and lead to personal injury and death, etc.
This user manual is delivered with the device. Please keep it properly for future overhaul and
maintenance.
Owing to constant improvement of products, all data may be changed without further notice.
SHENZHEN SIMPHOENIX ELECTRIC TECHNOLOGIES CO., Ltd.
E280 Vectorial General Purpose Inverter User Manual
Version: V1.2
Revision December: April 2017

Contents
1 Product Confirmation And Operation Precautions...........................................................1
1.1 Product confirmation.................................................................................................1
1.1.1 Precautions of unpacking inspection............................................................1
1.2 Safety precautions ....................................................................................................2
1.2.1 Installation precautions ................................................................................2
1.2.2 Safety precautions for wiring........................................................................2
1.2.3 Safety precautions for running operation .....................................................3
1.2.4 Safety caution for maintenance check .........................................................3
1.3 Knowledge on operation ...........................................................................................4
1.3.1 Application knowledge of driving general motor...........................................4
1.3.2 Application knowledge of driving special motor ...........................................4
1.3.3 Ambient environment ...................................................................................4
1.3.4 Connection knowledge of peripheral equipment ..........................................4
1.3.5 Transportation and storage ..........................................................................5
1.4 Abandon caution.......................................................................................................5
1.5 Other cautions ..........................................................................................................5
2 Product Introduction ...........................................................................................................6
2.1 Model description......................................................................................................6
2.2 Product appearance .................................................................................................6
2.3 Model table ...............................................................................................................8
2.4 Product technical index and specifications ...............................................................9
3 Installation Of Frequency Inverter....................................................................................13
3.1 Installation of frequency inverter .............................................................................13
3.2 Size and assembly of operation panel ....................................................................15
3.3 Installation size of the panel....................................................................................16
3.4 Removal of terminal cover ......................................................................................17
3.5 Installation size of inverters.....................................................................................18
4 Wiring Of Frequency Inverter ...........................................................................................21

4.1 Wiring precautions ..................................................................................................21
4.2 Connection of optional fittings and frequency inverter ............................................22

4.3 Wiring of control terminals ......................................................................................27
4.3.1 Wiring of standard terminals of control panel .............................................27
4.3.2 Function description of control terminal .....................................................27
4.3.3 Description of dial switch on the control panel ...........................................28
4.4 Wiring Of Major Loop Terminal................................................................................29
4.4.1 Terminal Functions.....................................................................................29
4.4.2 Main loop terminal diagram........................................................................30
4.5 Wiring for basic operation of inverters.....................................................................33
5 Operation And Simple Running Of Frequency Inverter..................................................34
5.1 Basic function of the panel......................................................................................34
5.1.1 Panel description .......................................................................................34
5.2 Basic functions and operating methods of panel ....................................................37
5.2.1 Basic functions of panel .............................................................................37
5.2.2 Operating methods of panel.......................................................................39
5.3 Simple running of frequency inverter ......................................................................41
5.3.1 Initial settings .............................................................................................41
5.3.2 Simple operation........................................................................................42
6 Functional Parameter Table ..............................................................................................44
6.1 System management parameter.............................................................................45
6.2 Running command selection...................................................................................49
6.3 Frequency setting ...................................................................................................50
6.4 Control command source........................................................................................51
6.5 Start and stop..........................................................................................................52
6.6 Acceleration and deceleration characteristics parameters......................................53
6.7 Carrier frequency ....................................................................................................54
6.8 V/F parameters and overload protection.................................................................55
6.9 Steady running........................................................................................................55
6.10 Motor parameters..................................................................................................57
6.11 Parameter measurement and pre-excitation .........................................................57
6.12 Multifunctional input terminal ................................................................................58
6.13 Multifunctional output terminal multifunctional output terminal..............................59
6.14 Pulse input ............................................................................................................60

6.15 Pulse output..........................................................................................................60
6.16 Analog input..........................................................................................................61
6.17 Analog input curve correction ...............................................................................61
6.18 Analog output........................................................................................................62
6.19 Analog input wire breakage detection ...................................................................63
6.20 Virtual analog input ...............................................................................................64
6.21 Hopping frequency................................................................................................65
6.22 Built-in auxiliary timer............................................................................................65
6.23 Built-in auxiliary counter........................................................................................67
6.24 Auxiliary functions.................................................................................................68
6.25 Multi-stage frequency setting ................................................................................70
6.26 Simple programmable multi-stage operation ........................................................71
6.27 Swing frequency operation ...................................................................................73
6.28 Process PID (4ms control cycle)...........................................................................74
6.29 Process PID multi-stage setting ............................................................................77
6.30 Process PID sleep function...................................................................................77
6.31 Revolution setting and feedback...........................................................................78
6.32 Revolution closed-loop parameters.......................................................................80
6.33 Protection parameter ............................................................................................81
6.34 Torque control .......................................................................................................81
6.35 MODBUS fieldbus.................................................................................................83
6.36 Mapping access parameter...................................................................................83
6.37 Communication linkage synchronous control........................................................84
6.38 Expansion multifunctional input terminal...............................................................85
6.39 Expansion multifunctional output terminal.............................................................85
6.40 Zero-speed torque and position control ................................................................85
6.41 Virtual input and output .........................................................................................86
6.42 Protection function configuration parameters........................................................87
6.43 Correction parameter ............................................................................................89
6.44 Special functional parameters...............................................................................89
6.45 Other configuration parameters ............................................................................90
6.46 Historical fault recording .......................................................................................91

6.47 Operation status at the last fault ...........................................................................91
6.48 Basic status parameter .........................................................................................92
6.49 Auxiliary status parameter ....................................................................................94
6.50 MODBUS fieldbus status parameter .....................................................................95
6.51 Terminal status and variable .................................................................................95
6.52 Counter timer value...............................................................................................96
6.53 Positioning status parameter.................................................................................96
6.54 Equipment information ....................................................................... 96

Exhibit 1 Comparison table of multifunctional terminal (DI/EDI/SDI) functions ................97
Exhibit 2 Comparison table of multifunctional output terminal (DO/EDO/SDO) ...............99
Exhibit 3 Monitor variable comparison table ...............................................................100
7 Function Details ...............................................................................................................102
7.1 System management (Group F0.0).......................................................................102
7.2 Running command selection (Group F0.1) ........................................................... 111
7.3 Frequency setup (Group F0.2).............................................................................. 113
7.4 Control command source (Group F0.3) ................................................................ 116
7.5 Start and stop (Group F0.4) .................................................................................. 118
7.6 Acceleration and deceleration characteristics (Group F1.0) .................................124
7.7 Carrier frequency (Group F1.1).............................................................................126
7.8 V/F parameters and overload protection (Group F1.2) .........................................127
7.9 Steady running (Group F1.4) ................................................................................129
7.10 Motor parameters (Group F2.0) ..........................................................................132
7.11 Parameter measurement and pre-excitation (Group F2.2)..................................133
7.12 Multifunctional input terminal (Group F3.0) .........................................................134
7.13 Multifunctional output terminal (Group F3.1).......................................................143
7.14 Pulse input (Group F3.2).....................................................................................146
7.15 Pulse output (Group F3.3) ..................................................................................147
7.16 Analog input (Group F4.0) ..................................................................................148
7.17 Analog input curve correction (Group F4.1) ........................................................149
7.18 Analog output (Group F4.2) ................................................................................150
7.19 Analog input wire-break detection (Group F4.3) .................................................151
7.20 Hopping frequency (Group F5.0) ........................................................................152
7.21 Built-in auxiliary timer (Group F5.1) ....................................................................153

7.22 Built-in auxiliary counter (Group F5.2) ................................................................155
7.23 Auxiliary functions (Group F5.3) .........................................................................156
7.24 Multi-stage frequency setting (Group F6.0).........................................................160
7.25 Simple programmable multi-stage operation (Group F6.1) .................................161
7.26 Swing frequency operation (Group F6.2) ............................................................165
7.27 Process PID (4ms control cycle) (Group F7.0) ...................................................168
7.28 Process PID multi-stage setting (Group F7.1) ....................................................172
7.29 Process PID sleeping function (Group F7.2).......................................................172
7.30 Revolution setting and feedback (Group F8.0) ...................................................173
7.31 Revolution closed-loop parameter (Group F8.1).................................................176
7.32 Protective parameters (Group F8.2) ...................................................................178
7.33 Torque control (Group F8.3)................................................................................179
7.34 MODBUS fieldbus (Group FA.0) .........................................................................180
7.35 Mapping parameter access (Group FA.1) ...........................................................180
7.36 Communication linkage synchronous control (Group FA.2) ................................182
7.37 Zero-speed torque and position control (Fb.2 group)..........................................183
7.38 Virtual input and output (group FF.0)...................................................................184
7.39 Protecting function configuration parameters (FF.1 group) .................................185
7.40 Correction parameters (FF.2 group)....................................................................185
7.41 Special functional parameters (FF.3 Group)........................................................187
7.42 Other configuration parameters (Group FF.4) .....................................................187
8 Warning, Alarm Diagnosis And Countermeasures .......................................................189
8.1 Alarm display and troubleshooting........................................................................189
8.2 Warning display and troubleshooting....................................................................196
9 Care And Maintenance ....................................................................................................200
9.1 Routine care and maintenance .............................................................................200
9.2 Inspection and displacement of the vulnerable components.................................201
9.2.1 Filter capacitor .........................................................................................201
9.2.2 Cooling fan...............................................................................................201
9.3 Storage .................................................................................................................202
9.4 Warranty ...............................................................................................................203

10 Description Of Communication Protocol.....................................................................204
10.1 Protocol overview ...............................................................................................204
10.2 Interface and transmission method.....................................................................204
10.3 Data structure .....................................................................................................204
10.4 Parameter configuration for frequency inverters .................................................205
10.5 Brief introduction of functions..............................................................................205
10.6 Access address summary...................................................................................206
10.7 Detailed modbus address-finding distribution .....................................................207
11 EMC..................................................................................................................................................213
11.1 CE .......................................................................................................................213
11.2 Definition .............................................................................................................213
11.3 Obey Standard Order ..........................................................................................213
11.3.1 Obey EMC Order ...................................................................................213
11.3.2 Obey LVD Order.....................................................................................213
11.4 Guidance of EMC External Accessories Installation and Selection .....................214
11.4.1 EMC input filter.......................................................................................214
11.4.2 AC Input Reactor....................................................................................214
11.4.3 AC Output Reactor.................................................................................214
11.4.4 DC Input Reactor ...................................................................................214
11.4.5 Filter’s Model Selection Reference.........................................................214
11.5 Shielded Cable....................................................................................................215
11.6 Cable Wiring Requirements ................................................................................215
11.7 Leakage current response requirements.............................................................216
11.8 Common EMC Interference Problem and Solution .............................................217
12 Optional Components ...................................................................................................222
12.1 Control Panel ......................................................................................................222

12.1.1 The Appearance and Dimension Figure of Control Panel Base……….222
12.1.2 The Installation of Control Panel Base……………………………………222
12.2 I/O expansion card introduction ..........................................................................223
12.3 PG expansion card introduction..........................................................................227

12.3.1 Standard Type PG Expansion Card………………………………….……227
12.4 Tension control expansion card ..........................................................................228

12.4.1 Basic product information ......................................................................228
12.4.2 Product introduction ...............................................................................228
12.4.3 Product function.....................................................................................228
12.4.4 Technical data ........................................................................................228
12.5 Expansion card of all-in-one veneer peeling lathe ..............................................229
12.5.1 Basic product information ......................................................................229
12.5.2 Product introduction ...............................................................................229
12.5.3 Product function.....................................................................................229
12.5.4 Technical data ........................................................................................229
12.6 Braking Component ............................................................................................230
12.6.1 Braking Unit Model Instruction ...............................................................230
12.6.2 The Selection of Brake Resistor ............................................................230

12.6.3 The Appearance of Braking Unit ……………………………………………233
12.6.4 The Installation Dimensions of Braking Unit……………………………….233
12.6.5 Single Braking Unit and Inverter’s Connection Reference Diagram…….234
12.6.6 Connection Notes…………………………………………………………….234

Product Confirmation And Operation Precautions 1
Chapter 1 Product Confirmation And Operation Precautions
1.1 Product confirmation

Check the outer packing carefully to see if there is any damage after the arrival of the goods; if there
is a label on the outer packing, please confirm the model and specification of it to see if they are in
accordance with your order. If any damage or discrepancy is found, please contact the supplier
promptly for solution.
1.1.1 Precautions of unpacking inspection
Confirm the frequency inverter body and accessories carefully when unpacking, to see if there is any
damage during the transit, and if the parts and components are damaged or dropped, and if there is
the frequency inverter entity and the following accessories:
1) Operation instruction;
2) Certification;
3) Product list;
4) Other ordered accessories.
If there is any omission or damage, please contract the supplier promptly for solution.
● Nameplate of Frequency Inverter
On the frequency inverter, there is a nameplate marked with model, rated parameters, product
serial-number and bar code of frequency inverter. The content of nameplate is shown as below:
Model of frequency inverter TYPE E280-4T0011G/4T0015P

Rated input voltage number of phase,
voltage and frequency
SOURCE 3PH 380V 50/60Hz
Rated output capability and current OUTPUT 2.0KVA 3.0A/2.4KVA 3.7A
Product serial-number SERIAL No. XXXXXXXXXX
Bar code, certification logos
Shenzhen Simphoenix Electric Technology Co.,Ltd

2 Product Confirmation And Operation Precautions
1.2 Safety precautions

Read this instruction carefully prior to installation, wiring, operation and maintenance, to ensure
proper operation of this product. "Tip", "Attention", "Danger" and "Warning" in this operation
manual are defined as follows:
¾ Tip: Tips for some useful information.
¾ Attention: Matter requires attention during operation.
¾ Warning: Without operation according to the requirements, moderate

injuries or minor injuries of personnel and material loss may be
caused.
¾ Danger: Without operation according to the requirements, serious

damage to the equipment or personnel injuries may be caused.
1.2.1 Installation precautions
1. The frequency inverter shall not be installed on combustibles, in case of the risk of fire.
2. The frequency inverter shall not be installed at places with direct sunlight, in case of danger.
3. The frequency inverter of this series shall not be installed in the environment of explosive gases,
in case of the danger of explosion.
4. Frequency inverter with damage or lack of components shall not be applied; otherwise it may
cause personal injury or fire and other accidents.
5. It is not allowed to dismount or modified the frequency inverter without authorization.
6. No foreign matter is allowed to be dropped into the frequency inverter, in case of breakdown of
the frequency inverter.
7. During installation, the frequency inverter shall be installed at the place able to bear its weight;
otherwise, it may fall down.
1.2.2 Safety precautions for wiring
1. Please authorize the professional staff to conduct wiring. If the wiring operation is not proper, it
may damage to the equipment and the individuals.
2. Please start to wire after the panel digital tube of frequency inverter is out for ten minutes,
otherwise, there can be electric shock risk.
3. The grounding terminal of frequency inverter must be reliably grounded; otherwise, there can be

electric shock risk.
4. No alternating current power supply is allowed to be connected onto the U, V, W of frequency
inverter, otherwise, the frequency inverter can be damaged.
5. Confirm that the input voltage and frequency converter are in consistent with rated voltage value;
otherwise, the frequency inverter may be damaged.
6. Confirm that the motor and frequency converter are adaptive with each other, otherwise, the
motor can be damaged or frequency converter protection can be caused.
7. Brake resistor can not be connected onto the (+), (-) of DC bus directly; otherwise, there can be
fire risk.
1.2.3 Safety precautions for running operation
1. Please do not operate the switch with wet hand; otherwise, there can be electric shock.
2. Please install the front cover prior to plugging in, and shall not demount the cover while power is
on, otherwise, here can be electric shock.
3. During the frequency converter is with power on, even the motor is stopped, do not touch the
terminals of frequency converter, otherwise, here can be electric shock.
4. If you apply the function of restart, do not approach the load equipment, for it may restart
suddenly after alarm removed, otherwise, personal injuries may caused.
5. Please set the system as ensuring personal and property safety even when restarting.
6. Please set additional emergency stop switch, otherwise, personal injuries may be caused.
7. The temperature of cooling fin and direct current reactor can be very high, therefore, do not touch
them, in case of the danger of burns.
1.2.4 Safety caution for maintenance check
1. Maintenance operations of overhaul and device replacement only can be done by trained
professional maintenance staff. During operation, insulation protection tools shall be applied. It is
strictly prohibited to leave thrum and metal in the machine. Otherwise, there can be dangers of
electric shock, fire, and personal and property damage.
2. After replacement of control board, corresponding parameters must be set before operation,
otherwise, there can be danger of property damage.

4 Product Confirmation And Operation Precautions
1.3 Knowledge on operation

1.3.1 Application knowledge of driving general motor
1. The temperature when driving general motor applied with frequency converter can be a little
higher than that of industrial frequency power. With long-term operation at low speed, the
operation life of motor can be affected due to the poorer heat dissipation effect. In this case,
special frequency converter shall be selected or lighten the motor load.
2. If when the equipment is installed with frequency converter drive, sometimes, there can be
resonance due to the natural vibration frequency of mechanical system, please consider about
applying flexible coupling and insulation rubber, or applying the function of hopping frequency of
the frequency converter, to avoid the resonance point for operation.
3. There can be larger noise when driving general motor applied with frequency converter than that
of industrial frequency power. In order to reduce the noise, the carrier frequency can be increased
properly.
1.3.2 Application knowledge of driving special motor
1. For high-speed motor, if the set frequency of frequency converter is above 120Hz, please
conduct combination test with motor, to make sure it can be operated safely.
2. For synchronous motor, there must be correspondences according to the types of motor. Please
contract the manufacturer for consultation.
3. Operation of single-phase motor is not applied with frequency converter. Even when input with
single phase, there is three-phase output, please apply with three-phase motor.
1.3.3 Ambient environment
Application shall be applied in the indoor range with environment temperature of -10 to +45℃,
humidity around 5~95% (without condensation of moisture), no dust, no direct sunlight, no corrosive
gas, no combustible gas, no oil mist, no steam, no water or floating fiber or mental particles; if there
is special requirements of clients, please contract the manufacturer for consultation.
1.3.4 Connection knowledge of peripheral equipment
1. For the protection of wirings, please configure breaker for wirings on the input side of frequency
converter. Please do not apply device with larger capacity than recommendation.
2. If it needs to switch to industrial frequency power and others, when installing electromagnetic
contactor on the output side of frequency converter, please switch after frequency converter
and motor stop running.
3. When applying with motor thermal relay, if the wiring of motor is too long, sometimes it is affected

with the high-frequency current flowing through capacitance distributed with wiring, current
below the set value of thermal relay may also cause trip. In this case, please lower the carrier
frequency, or apply with output filter.
4. For noise interference, connection filter, magnet ring and shielded wire can be applied as
corresponding measures.
1.3.5 Transportation and storage
1. During product handling, please capture the both sides of the bottom of the entity, rather than
the cover or parts only.
2. Please do not make the parts of plastic excessive forced, otherwise, there can be falling down
or damage.
3. When it is for temporary storage and long-term storage, pay attention to the followings:
z Try to be packaged in the packing case of our company as the original package for
storage.
z Long-term of storage will lead to the characteristics of electrolytic capacitor worsen,
therefore, it shall be powered on every half year at least, and with conduction time more
than half an hour, and the input voltage must be risen to the rated value gradually with
voltage regulator.
1.4 Abandon caution

1. Explosion of the electrolytic capacitor: electrolytic capacitor in the frequency converter may
cause explosion while burning.
2. Waste gas of plastic burning: harmful and toxic gas may be produces while burning the plastic
and rubber product of the frequency converter.
3. Disposal methods: please deal with the frequency converter as industrial waste.
1.5 Other cautions

1. This product shall not be applied for life support device and other application concerning
directly with human body safety, otherwise, there can be accident.
2. If serious accident or serious losses caused due to the failure of this product, please install
safety device for this product, otherwise, there can be accident.

6 Product Introduction
Chapter 2 Product Introduction
2.1 Model description

E280 – 4 T 0150 G
Product series Power grade

Heavy-load closed-loop P Phlegmatic
A510
vector inverter
G General
Low-power closed-loop
V220
vector inverter
Power grade （KW ）
High-performance
V260 closed-loop vector 0011 1.1
inverter
0015 1.5
E260 Universal inverter 0022 2.2
0037 3.7
Low-power universal 0055 5.5
E500
inverter 0075 7.5
E280 Vectorial General 0110 11
E280
. .
Purpose Inverter
. .
3150 315
Voltage grade
4 380V Power supply phase
T Three phase
2.2 Product appearance

Appearance of Category I Applicable for: E280-4T0040G/4T0055P and below models
Operating panel Port of operating panel

Upper housing
Port of remote operating panel
Radiator
Lower cover Function expansion card
Wiring entrace of extension loopr
Plugboard Expansion loop terminal
Wiring entrace of main loop
Major loop terminal
Fan
Appearance of Category II Applicable for: E280-4T0055G/4T0075P～ E280-4T0300G/4T0370P and

above models
Operating panel
Upper cover Port of operating panel
Upper housing Crystal connector position
(remote operation)
Lower housing
Lower cover
Wiring entrace of extension loopr Control loop terminal
Wiring entrace of control loop Major loop terminal
Wiring entrace of main loop
Plugboard

Product Introduction 7
Appearance of Category Ⅲ Applicable for: E280-4T0370G/4T0450P~E280-4T0550G/4T0750P
Upper cover
Operating panel
Control loop terminal
Lower cover
Major loop terminal
Appearance of Category Ⅳ Applicable for: E280-4T0750G/4T0900P~ E280-4T2200G/4T2500P
Upper cover
Operating panel
Lower cover Major loop terminal
Appearance of Category Ⅴ Applicable for: E280-4T2500G/4T2800P~E280-4T3150G/4T3500P
major loop
Operating
panel
right door
panel
left door
panel
Major loop terminal

2.3 Model table

General load mode Steady light load mode
Model Rated Rated Suitable Rated Rated Suitable

capacity current motor capacity current motor
(KVA) (A) (KW) (KVA) (A) (KW)
E280-4T0011G/4T0015P 2.0 3.0 1.1 2.4 3.7 1.5
E280-4T0015G/4T0022P 2.4 3.7 1.5 3.6 5.5 2.2
E280-4T0022G/4T0030P 3.6 5.5 2.2 4.9 7.5 3.0
E280-4T0030G/4T0040P 4.9 7.5 3.0 6.3 9.5 4.0
E280-4T0040G/4T0055P 6.3 9.5 4.0 8.6 13.0 5.5
E280-4T0055G/4T0075P 8.6 13.0 5.5 11.2 17.0 7.5
E280-4T0075G/4T0090P 11.2 17.0 7.5 13.8 21 9.0
E280-4T0090G/4T0110P 13.8 21 9.0 16.5 25 11
E280-4T0110G/4T0150P 16.5 25 11 21.7 32 15
E280-4T0150G/4T0185P 21.7 32 15 25.7 37 18.5
E280-4T0185G/4T0220P 25.7 37 18.5 29.6 45 22
E280-4T0220G/4T0300P 29.6 45 22 39.5 60 30
E280-4T0300G/4T0370P 39.5 60 30 49.4 75 37
E280-4T0370G/4T0450P 49.4 75 37 62.5 95 45
E280-4T0450G/4T0550P 62.5 95 45 75.7 115 55
E280-4T0550G/4T0750P 75.7 115 55 98.7 150 75
E280-4T0750G/4T0900P 98.7 150 75 116 176 90
E280-4T0900G/4T1100P 116 176 90 138 210 110
E280-4T1100G/4T1320P 138 210 110 171 260 132
E280-4T1320G/4T1600P 171 260 132 204 310 160
E280-4T1600G/4T1850P 204 310 160 237 360 185
E280-4T1850G/4T2000P 237 360 185 253 385 200
E280-4T2000G/4T2200P 253 385 200 276 420 220
E280-4T2200G/4T2500P 276 420 220 313 475 250
E280-4T2500G/4T2800P 313 475 250 352 535 280
E280-4T2800G/4T3150P 352 535 280 395 600 315
E280-4T3150G/4T3500P 395 600 315 424 645 350

2.4 Product technical index and specifications

Rated voltage,
Three phase (4T# series) 380V 50/60Hz
frequency
Output voltage 0~380 V
Output
Frequency running mode: 0.00~300.00Hz；
frequency
y Models E280-4T0040G/4T0055P and below: standard configuration of 5-circuit

digital input (DI)
Digital input y Models E280-4T0055G/4T0075P and above: 6-circuit digital input (DI),
extensible to 9-circuit (optional extension components)
y Models E280-4T0040G/4T0055P and below: standard configuration of 1-circuit

digital output (DO)
Digital output y Models E280-4T0055G/4T0075P and above: standard configuration of 2-circuit
digital output (DO)
Input
Pulse input 0 ~ 100.0KHz pulse input, to connect NPN type OC output (optional)
Output
0 ~ 100.0KHz pulse NPN type OC output (optional); I PWM output mode can be
Pulse output
selected to extend analog output terminal.
y E280-4T0040G/4T0055P and below（not extendable, optional）：

Standard configuration: 0-10V voltage input (AI1); 0 - 20mA current input (AI2).
Analog input y E280-4T0055G/4T0075P and above（extendable）：
Standard configuration: 0-10V voltage input (AI1); 0 - 20mA current input (AI2),
able to extend one loop A1 (-10V~10V bipolar voltage input)
y Models E280-4T0040G/4T0055P and below:

Standard configuration: 1-circuit 0-10V analog output signal(can be set to 0-20VmA
current output mode)
Analog output y Models V350-4T0040 and above:
Standard configuration: 2-circuit 0-10V analog output signal(can be set to 0-20VmA
current output mode)
Standard equipment with one group of AC 250V/2A normally open/closed contact,

Contact output
extendable to two groups of contacts.

Closed-loop vector Open-loop

Control Mode V/F control
control vector control
Starting torque 0 speed 200% 0 speed180% 1HZ 100%
Speed adjusting range 1：1000 1：200 1：100
Steady speed precision ±0.2% ±0.2% ±0.5%
Torque control precision ±1% ±5% --
Torque response time ≦5ms ≦25ms --
Frequency resolution Frequency running mode: 0.01Hz
Frequency running mode: digital setting—0.01Hz, analog

Frequency precision setting—maximum frequency ×0.1%
Control
G-type machine：110%-- long term ；150%--90s；180%--2s
Characteristics Load capacity
P-type machine：150%-- long term
y Three-phase voltage vector composition mode:

2.0~12.0KHz；
Carrier frequency y Two-phase voltage vector composition mode:
2.0~15.0KHz.（High frequency mode can reach 15KHz）
Deceleration and
0.01~600.00Sec. / 0.01~600.0Min.
acceleration time
Achieve rapid retarding brake of the motor by increasing

Magnetic flux brake
the motor's magnetic flux (30-120% allowed)
DC brake/band-type brake initial frequency: 0.0 - upper

DC brake/band-type
limiting frequency, brake/band-type brake injection current
rake
0.0 - 100.0%
Strike frequency 0.0~50.0Hz
16-segment frequency/speed running, independent setting

of the running direction, time and acceleration &
Multi-segment running deceleration of each segment; 7-segment process PID
setting
Built-in PID controller, can be used independently by

Built-in PID external equipment
Wakening and sleeping Built-in PID, with simple sleeping and wakening functions.
Typical
Function MODBUS Standard MODBUS communication protocol (optional)
communication allowing for flexible parameter reading and mapping.
Dynamic braking Actuating voltage: 670~760V, braking ratio: 50 - 100%
Power-off restart, fault self-recovery, motor parameter

dynamic/static self-identification. Start enabling, operation
enabling, start delay, overcurrent suppression,
General Functions overvoltage/undervoltage suppression, V/F custom curve,
analog input curve correction, line brake detection, textile
machinery disturbance (frequency swing) operation.
Special
Function Virtual IO terminal 8-circuit one-to-one virtual output and input terminals,
allowing for complicated engineering onsite application in

an easy way without external wiring.
Communication Easily allows for synchronized drive of multiple motors,

linkage and free selection of linkage balance of multiple motors
synchronization based on current, torque and power.
Load dynamic Also allows for dynamic balance of multi-motor load (not
limited to communication linkage) and able to achieve
balance torque motor characteristics.
For load featuring high inertia and high static friction,

Strong starting torque super strong starting torque for certain period can be set.
Users can freely select the priority of various

Setting priority frequency/revolution setting channels; suitable for
combined application for various occasions.
Up to hundreds of setting combinations of frequency,

Setting combinations revolution and torque
3 built-in timers: 5 kinds of clock, 5 kinds of trigger

Timer modes, multiple door access signals and working modes,
and 7 kinds of output signals.
2 Built-in Counter: the selection of 3 kinds of counting

Counter pulses, 6 modes of triggering, 7 kinds of output signals.
Application macro:
Allowing for conveniently setting and partially curing
multiple common group parameters and simplifying
parameter setting for common applications.
Macro parameter
System macro:
Allowing for conveniently switching equipment’s working
mode (e.g. switching between high and low frequency
running modes), and automatically redefining local
parameters.
Any un-stored parameter adjusted on site can be stored

Parameter adjusting or abandoned and restored to original value with one key.
Allowing for automatically shielding parameters of unused

Parameter display functional modules or selectively displaying modified,
stored or changed parameters.

Undervoltage protection and three-phase power supply

Power supply unbalancing protection.
Overcurrent protection, overvoltage protection,

undervoltage protection, inverter overtemperature
Running protection protection, inverter overload protection, motor overload
protection, output phase lack protection, and IGBT
drive protection.
Current detected abnormity, EEPROM memory

Equipment abnormity abnormity, abnormal control unit, motor overtempera-
ture and temperature acquisition loop fault.
Motor not connected, motor’s three-phased

Motor connection parameters unbalanced and parameter
misidentification.
Detect and protect the extension card for compatibility

Extension card or conflict.
Indoor vertical installation, not subjecting to direct

Installation environment sunshine, free of dust, corrosive and flammable gas, oil
mist, vapor and free of drips or salt.
0-1000 m. The output current capability drops by 10%

Altitude for every rise of 1000 m.
Environment Working ambient temperature: -10℃+45℃

(Environment temperature is between +45 °C ~
Ambient temperature +50 °C, able to derate) ; storage ambient temperature:
-20℃ - +60℃.
Humidity 95% below, no condensed water
Ventilation < 6m/s2

Installation Of Frequency Inverter 13
Chapter 3 Installation Of Frequency Inverter
3.1 Installation of frequency inverter

This series of frequency inverters are wall-mounted frequency inverters, which should be installed
vertically. In order to be in favor of circulation and heat dissipation, please install the frequency inverter at
indoor place with good ventilation. Please refer to 1.3.3 for installation environment. If there is special
installation requirement from customer, please contact the manufacturer in advance.
y Mounting surface
The temperature of cooling fin may rise to around 90℃, so please install the mounting surface at the place
which can stand for this temperature rise.
y Installation space
Requirements for installation spacing distance of single frequency inverter are as shown in figure 3-1.
Reserve enough space around the frequency inverter.
y Multiple installations
If install more than 2 sets of frequency inverters in device or control cabinet, please conduct parallel
installation in principle as shown in figure 3-3. If there is no choice but vertical installation, please consider
setting partition plate as shown in figure 3-2, to ensure no influence on upper frequency inverter from lower
frequency inverter.
Fan exhaust
风扇
D
排气
Inverter
A A diversion
partifion
Inverter
Figure 3-1 Spacing distance for installation Figure 3-2 Upper and lower Installation dimensions of
multiple inverters (above 4.0KW)

14 Installation Of Frequency Inverter
¾ As shown in Figure 3-1 and 3-2: A≥50mm, D≥120mm
¾ When horizontally and closely installed under 4.0KW, the ambient temperature is -10℃ -
45℃.
¾ Horizontally close installation is only for 4.0KW below, and -10℃ - 45℃ environmental
temperature.
¾ For parallel installation of frequency inverters with different sizes, please carry out
installation after aligning the upper parts of all the frequency inverters, thus to be in favor
of changing cooling fan.
¾ Please don’t install frequency inverter in the environment with tattered cotton yarn and
damp dust which may cause blockage of cooling fin. If necessary to operate in such
environment, please install in the control cabinet which can keep tattered cotton yarn out.
¾ If necessary to install at the place with more than 1000m height above sea level, please
derate operation. See 2.4 product technical indexes and specifications for details.

3.2 Size and assembly of operation panel

The operating panel name, mode, code and applicable device models of E280 series inverters are shown
in Table 3-1.
Name Two-line LED small panel Two-line LED standard operating panel
Model DPNL350EM DPNL360EA
Code 050M007033701 050M007360003
Applicable
E280-4T0040G/4T0055P and below models E280-4T0055G/4T0075P and above models
models
LED main display
LED主显示
LED main display
LED主显示
LED display area
LED 数码 LED display
LEDarea
数码
LED auxiliary
显示区 LED auxiliary
LED辅显示显示区 LED辅显示
Unit combination display display
单位组合 Unit combination
单位组合
indicator
显示灯显示灯
indicator
Appearance Functional
Functional
Function
功能功能组合 Function
功能功能组合
combination
operating
操作区area combination
显示灯 operating操作区
area 显示灯
indicator
indicator
Put fingers on the slot at front part of Put fingers on the slot at front part of the
the panel and then simply raise the panel panel and then simply raise the panel.
Disassembling
After aligning the panel with the panel slot, After aligning fixed hook month at the
press down the panel evenly. bottom of the panel with the clasp under the
panel base, simply press down the top of
卡扣
Clasp the panel.
卡槽
Slot
卡扣
Clasp Slot
卡槽
Installation
Clasp
卡扣
Slot
卡槽
Clasp
卡扣
Remove the operating panel and make Remove the operating panel and detach
connection with the extension cable as the crystal connector and place it at
shown in following figure. specified position to avoid loss, and then
use extension cable to make connection
as shown in following figure.
外接卡扣
Clasp for external connection
Clasp for
external Crystal connector
connection
外接卡扣水晶转接头
Prolonged connecting
连接线 connecting
连接线 wire
wire
external
外接卡扣
Clasp for
connection
external
connection Clasp for
external外接卡扣
connection

¾ It is a must to use extension cable or commercial LAN cable (straight cables) in the market.
¾ Extension cable shall not exceed 15 meters; shielding layer is connected with grounding
terminal of frequency inverter. Please select remote operation panel if the extension cable is
more than 15 meters long.
¾ Do not carry out wiring horizontally close to the power line.
¾ Panel shall be fastened on stable fixed surface or work bench so as to avoid damage.
3.3 Installation size of the panel (the operating panel can be flexibly selected
according to actual installation requirement)
Name Two-line LED small panel Two-line LED standard operating panel
Standard configuration for Standard configuration for

Applicable Models
E280-4T0040G/4T0055P and below models E280-4T0055G/4T0075P and above models
55 25 70 27
23
22
50
101
126
130
105
Installation size
66
51
46.5
30
102*52 127*67
67
52
Installation
External Installation
安装板
board
安装板
connection without board
tray, installation
127
board hole
102
diagram
Installation board
安装板
97
12
螺钉
Fixed
固定
5 with
screws
External 5
9 5
connection with 2
1
This connection mode is not applicable
tray, installation
4
1
0
board hole -
Th
diagram ro
ug
hh
o le

3.4 Removal of terminal cover
1.The Disassembly of Plastic Cover Board
Removal: put fingers on the handle slot at the bottom of cover plate (the position of clasp as figure 3-3),
and forcibly lift it upward until the card clasps between cover plate and shell break away, then pull the
cover plate down can disassemble the shell. See figure 3-3
Installation: slant cover plate into about 15°, then insert the fixed stator at the top of cover plate into fixed
slot on shell. Forcibly press the cover plate down until heard a click, which means the cover plate has been
in place.
Control
控制回路端子 loop terminal
Fastener position Main
主回路端子loop terminal
扣手位置下盖板Front
Lower 前插板plug
cover plate board
Figure 3-3 Disassembly and installation schematic diagram of plastic cover
2.The Disassembly of Sheet-metal Cover Board
Removal: First, knock off two set screws in cover board, and push down the lower cover board by 15mm,
then remove upwards the lower cover board, as Figure 3-4 is shown.
Installation: First, put the lower cover board on the sheet-metal guide rail, and push the lower board to reach
upper cover board, then make sure the screw holes match each other; finally knock in screws.
Screws lower cover board

push down the lower
cover board by15mm
Figure 3-4 The Disassembly and Installation Diagram of Sheet-metal Cover Board

3.5 Installation size of inverters

Type I Applicable Model: E280-4T0040G/4T0055P and under
W
W1 D
H1
H
Type Ⅱ Applicable Model: E280-4T0075G/4T0090P～E280-4T0300G/4T0370P
W
W1 D
H1
H

Type Ⅲ Applicable Model: E280-4T0370G/4T0450P～E280-4T2200G/4T2500P
W D
W1
H1H
Type Ⅳ Applicable Model: E280-4T2500G/4T2800P～E280-4T3150G/4T3500P
W D
W1
H1
H

W1：Distance between installation holes on the side board W：Side board width
H1：Distance between installation holes on the side board H ：Side board height
D：Distance between front and rear boards -
The inverter’s installation size is shown as below:

Inverter Model W1 W H1 H D Screw
Three-phase 380V (mm) (mm) (mm) (mm) (mm) specification
E280-4T0011G/4T0015P
87 97 152 162 130 M4
E280-4T0015G/4T0022P
E280-4T0022G/4T0030P
E280-4T0030G/4T0040P 95 105 190 200 146 M4
E280-4T0040G/4T0055P
E280-4T0055G/4T0075P 121 135 234 248 175 M4
E280-4T0075G/4T0090P 146 160 261 275 179 M5
E280-4T0090G/4T0110P
169 180 290 305 179 M5
E280-4T0110G/4T0150P
E280-4T0150G/4T0185P
160 210 387 405 202 M6
E280-4T0185G/4T0220P
E280-4T0220G/4T0300P
160 250 422 445 216 M8
E280-4T0300G/4T0370P
E280-4T0370G/4T0450P
E280-4T0450G/4T0550P 271 300 545 567 250 M8
E280-4T0550G/4T0750P
E280-4T0750G/4T0900P 344 381 588 614 298 M8
E280-4T0900G/4T1100P
E280-4T1100G/4T1320P 380 510 710 740 270 M8
E280-4T1320G/4T1600P
E280-4T1600G/4T1850P
400 580 760 793 300 M10
E280-4T1850G/4T2000P
E280-4T2000G/4T2200P
550 700 960 1000 340 M10
E280-4T2200G/4T2500P
E280-4T2500G/4T2800P
E280-4T2800G/4T3150P 580 730 1103 1130 355 M10
E280-4T3150G/4T3500P

Wiring Of Frequency Inverter 21
Chapter 4 Wiring Of Frequency Inverter
4.1 Wiring precautions
• Make sure intermediate circuit breaker is connected between the frequency inverter
and power supply to avoid expanded accident when the frequency inverter is faulty.
• In order to reduce electromagnetic interference, please connect surge absorber on the

coil of electromagnetic contactor, relay and etc. in the surrounding circuit of the
frequency inverter.
• Please use shielded wire of above 0.3mm² for the wiring of such analog signals as
frequency setting terminal and instrument loop, etc. The shielding layer shall be
connected on the grounding terminal of the frequency inverter (keep the shielding layer
earthed at single end) with wiring length less than 30m.
• The stranded wire or shielded wire of above 0.75mm² shall be selected for the wiring
of input and output loop of relay.
• The control wire shall be separated from the power line of major loop; it shall be at a
distance of above 10cm for parallel wiring and vertical for cross wiring.
• All the leading wires shall be completely fastened with the terminal to ensure good
contact. The leading wires of major loop shall be adopted cables or copper bar. When
using cables, wiring must not be carried out until they are cold pressed or welded well
by lug plate with corresponding section.
• The pressurization of all the leading wires shall be in compliance with the voltage class
of the frequency inverter.
• Please reliably ground the frequency inverter and motor locally.
Absorption capacitor or other RC absorbers shall not be installed at U, V and W
output end of the frequency inverter, as shown in figure 4-1.
电动机
Motor
U
变频器
Inverter V M
W
阻容吸收装置
RC absorber
Figure 4-1 The ketch of forbidding connecting a RC absorber at the output terminal

22 Wiring Of Frequency Inverter
4.2 Connection of optional fittings and frequency inverter

• Power supply
The power supply shall be in accordance with the specification of input power supply
designated by this operating manual.
• Air switch
1）When the frequency inverter is maintained or not in use for a long time, the air
switch will separate the frequency inverter from the power supply;
2）When the input side of the frequency inverter has failures like short circuit, the air
switch can protect.
• AC input reactor
When the interaction of higher harmonic between the frequency inverter and power
supply can not meet the requirements after serious wave form distortion of power
grid or the frequency inverter is equipped with DC reactor, the AC input reactor can
be added. The AC input reactor can improve the power factors at input side of the
inverter and reduce the influence caused by unbalanced voltage of three-phase
power supply.
• Filter at input side

EMI filter can be selected to restrict the high-frequency noise interference from the
power cord of the frequency inverter.
• Contactor
It can cut off the power supply when the system protective function acts to prevent
failure expanding.
• DC reactor:
In order to defend the influence of power supply to frequency inverter, protect the
inverter and restrict higher harmonic, DC reactor shall be equipped under the
following conditions:

1）When the power supply of frequency inverter has switch LBMJ on the node or with
silicon controlled phase control load, the voltage jump of the grid resulted from
reactive transient caused by capacitor switching and harmonic and grid wave form
gap caused by phase control load may damage the input rectifying circuit of the
frequency inverter.
2）When the three-phase power supply of the frequency inverter is unbalanced;
3）When the power factors at the input end of the frequency inverter are required to
improve.
• Filter at output side
EMI filter can be selected to restrict the interference noise generated at the output side
of the inverter and wire leakage current.
• AC output reactor
When the wiring from the frequency inverter to the motor is longer (exceeding 20m), it
can restrict radio interference and leakage current.
• Braking resistor
Improve the braking capacity of frequency inverter to avoid overvoltage failure when
slowing down

The specification of recommended electric appliances is as follows:

Adaptive motor(KW) Wire gauge Air circuit Electromagnetic
Model of frequency inverter Load for fan and (major loop) breaker contactor
General loads water pump (mm2) (A) (A)
E280-4T0011G/4T0015P 1.1 1.5 1.5 16 12
E280-4T0015G/4T0022P 1.5 2.2 2.5 16 12
E280-4T0022G/4T0030P 2.2 3.0 4 16 12
E280-4T0030G/4T0040P 3.0 4.0 4 20 16
E280-4T0040G/4T0055P 4.0 5.5 4 25 16
E280-4T0055G/4T0075P 5.5 7.5 6 32 22
E280-4T0075G/4T0090P 7.5 9.0 6 40 32
E280-4T0090G/4T0110P 9.0 11 10 50 32
E280-4T0110G/4T0150P 11 15 10 63 32
E280-4T0150G/4T0185P 15 18.5 10 63 38
E280-4T0185G/4T0220P 18.5 22 16 80 45
E280-4T0220G/4T0300P 22 30 16 100 63
E280-4T0300G/4T0370P 30 37 25 125 75
E280-4T0370G/4T0450P 37 45 25 160 85
E280-4T0450G/4T0550P 45 55 35 200 110
E280-4T0550G/4T0750P 55 75 50 225 140
E280-4T0750G/4T0900P 75 90 70 250 170
E280-4T0900G/4T1100P 90 110 70 315 205
E280-4T1100G/4T1320P 110 132 95 400 250
E280-4T1320G/4T1600P 132 160 95 400 330
E280-4T1600G/4T1850P 160 185 150 630 330
E280-4T1850G/4T2000P 185 200 150 630 400
E280-4T2000G/4T2200P 200 220 185 630 400
E280-4T2200G/4T2500P 220 250 185 800 500
E280-4T2500G/4T2800P 250 280 240 800 500
E280-4T2800G/4T3150P 280 315 240 1000 630
E280-4T3150G/4T3500P 315 350 300 1250 630

Main loop screw specification/ tightening torque, as listed below
Model of frequency inverter Screw specification Tightening torque(N*m) Recommended lug model no
E280-4T0011G/4T0015P M3.5 0.7~0.9 PTV1.25-9
E280-4T0015G/4T0022P M3.5 0.7~0.9 PTV1.25-9
E280-4T0022G/4T0030P M3.5 0.7~0.9 PTV2-9
E280-4T0030G/4T0040P M4 1.2~1.5 PTV2-9
E280-4T0040G/4T0055P M4 1.2~1.5 PTV2-9
E280-4T0055G/4T0075P M4 1.2~1.5 RNY5.5-4S
E280-4T0075G/4T0090P M4 1.2~1.5 RNY5.5-4S
E280-4T0090G/4T0110P M4 1.2~1.5 RNY5.5-4S
E280-4T0110G/4T0150P M4 1.2~1.5 RNY5.5-4S
E280-4T0150G/4T0185P M5 2~2.5 RNY8-5S
E280-4T0185G/4T0220P M5 2~2.5 RNY8-5S
E280-4T0220G/4T0300P M6 4~6 RNY14-6
E280-4T0300G/4T0370P M6 4~6 RNY14-6
E280-4T0370G/4T0450P M8 9~11 T25-8
E280-4T0450G/4T0550P M8 9~11 T35-8
E280-4T0550G/4T0750P M8 9~11 T50-8
E280-4T0750G/4T0900P M10 18~23 T70-10
E280-4T0900G/4T1100P M10 18~23 T70-10
E280-4T1100G/4T1320P M10 18~23 T95-10
E280-4T1320G/4T1600P M10 18~23 T95-10
E280-4T1600G/4T1850P M12 25~30 T150-12
E280-4T1850G/4T2000P M12 25~30 T150-12
E280-4T2000G/4T2200P M12 25~30 T185-12
E280-4T2200G/4T2500P M12 25~30 T185-12
E280-4T2500G/4T2800P M12 25~30 T240-12
E280-4T2800G/4T3150P M12 25~30 T240-12
E280-4T3150G/4T3500P M12 25~30 2*T150-12
General control board/extension card connection terminal
General control terminal Screw specification Tightening torque(N*m) Recommended lug model no

control board/extension
M2 0.1~0.2 E0.5-6
card terminal
control board/extension
M3 0.3~0.4 E0.75-6
card terminal
Lug model no E(mm) D(mm) d(mm) W(mm) B(mm) L(mm)
T25-8 8.3 9.1 6.7 13 13 32
T35-8 8.3 11 8.6 16.7 16 37
T50-8 10.3 12.4 9.5 18 17 41

T
T70-10 10.3 15 12 22.5 21.5 52.5
serie
T95-10 10.3 17 13.4 25 22.5 55
s
T150-12 12.7 21.2 16.5 30 27 67
T185-12 12.7 23 19 34 30 73
T1240-12 12.7 26.5 21 38 38 91.5
Lug model no d2(mm) W(mm) F(mm) L(mm) H(mm) d1(mm) D(mm) T(mm)
RNY2-4S 4.3 6.6 7.9 22.2 11 2.3 4.8 0.8

RNY
RNY5.5-4S 4.3 7.2 5.9 22.5 13 3.4 6.7 1
serie
RNY8-5S 5.3 8.8 9.3 29.7 16 4.5 8 1.2
s
RNY14-6 6.5 16 14.5 43.5 21.5 5.4 11 1.4
Lug model no W(mm) F(mm) L(mm) H(mm) d1(mm) D(mm) T(mm)
PTV1.25-9 1.9 9 19 10 1.7 4.2 0.8
PVT/E PTV2-9 1.9 9 19 10 2.3 4.7 0.8
series E0.5-6 1.1 6 12 6 1 2.6 /
E0.75-6 1.1 6 12.3 6.3 1.2 2.8 /
W W
E d2 T W
T
窥视孔
F
F
L
L
H
d1
H
L B
?d
?D
d1
D
D
T series RNY series PVT series

4.3 Wiring of control terminals

4.3.1 Wiring of standard terminals of control panel
CON4
Category I: CON3 and CON4 CON3 DI1 DI2 DI3 DI4 DI5 24V CM
terminals
TC TB TA AI1 AI2 AO1 VS GND DO1 CM
Applicable to:
E280-4T0040G/4T0055P and below
d l
CON1
Category II: CON1 and CON2
CON2 DI1 DI3 DI5 DO1 24V AI1 AO1 VS
terminals
TA TB TC DI2 DI4 DI6 DO CM AI2 AO2 GND
Applicable to:
E280-4T0055G/4T0075P and above
4.3.2 Function description of control terminal
Label of Function description of

Type Name Specification
terminal terminals
Multifunctional
DI1-CM
output terminal DI1 6-circuit programmable
switching value input Opto-isolated inputs：
Multifunctional
DI2-CM terminal, allowing for
output terminal DI2
selection of 98 kinds of 24Vdc/5mA
Multifunctional operational control
DI3-CM
Control output terminal DI3 commands via
Input impedance:
terminal Multifunctional programming offunction
DI4-CM codes in F3.0 group. See
output terminal DI4 Z = 4.7 KΩ
Comparison Table of
Multifunctional Multifunctional Output Input frequency:
DI5-CM
output terminal DI5 Terminal Functions for f ＜1k Hz
Multifunctional details (page P67).
DI6-CM
output terminal DI6
Input/output 2-circuit programmable NPN model OC
CM terminal common open-circuit collector output Maximum load
port output and 1-circuit current: 150mA,
Multifunctional programmable relay highest withstand
DO1-CM output terminal; 63 kinds voltage: 24V
output terminal DO1
of operating status output Output frequency:
Operating Multifunctional can be selected by the f ＜1k Hz
DO2-CM
status output output terminal DO2 function code in F3.1
TA Multifunctional relay group by programming.
output RO1 See Comparison Table for Contact capacity:
TB TA-TB normally Variables of AC 250V/2A
closed Multifunctional Output DC 30V / 0.5A
TC TA-TC normally Terminal for detail Cosθ=1
open (page 68).
+24V power supply

CM Power supply of switching Maximum output
Power supply reference place
value terminal current: 100mA
24V +24V power supply
AI1-GND Analog input AI1 Select input voltage range, Input voltage:
Analog input polarity and other 0~10V,
functions with function Input current:
AI2-GND Analog input AI2
code in F4 group. 0~20mA

Label of Function description of

Type Name Specification
terminal terminals
Multifunctional The programmable

AO1-GND
analog outputAO1 voltage/current signal
Analog output output terminal has 45
Multifunctional
AO2-GND kinds of monitoring status
analog outputAO2
to be selected by
programming. See Current input：
Comparison Table for 0~20mA，
Monitor Variables for voltage input ：0~10V
Common terminal of details. For JP1,
GND
analog signal current/voltage output is
selected (see DIP Switch
Power supply Jumper Selection in 4.3.3
for detail)
JP3 (see DIP
Provide externally
Switch Jumper
+10V/5V power +10V/10mA power supply
VS-GND Selection in
supply or +5V/50mA power
4.3.3 for detail)
supply.
selection
4.3.3 Description of dial switch on the control panel
1．There are two shifts for one dial switch.

Applicable model: E280-4T0040G/4T0055P and
below models
JP3
V
Shift V: Indicating that AO terminal externally outputs A
拨码
Dial
0~10V voltage signal 开关
switch
Shift A: Indicating that AO terminal provides
externally 0~20mA current signal.
2．There 3 shifts for three dial switches.

Applicable mode: E280-4T0055G/4T0075P and
above models.
JP1
Shift VO1: Indicating that AO1 terminal outputs
voltage signal. VO1 VO2 5V
拨码
Dial OFF OFF OFF
Shift OFF: Indicating that AO1 terminal is at vacant 开关
switch
CO1 CO2 10V
state.
Shift CO1: Indicating that AO1 outputs current signal.
JP2
Shift VO2: Indicating that AO2 terminal outputs voltage signal.
Shift OFF: Indicating that AO2 terminal is at vacant state.
Shift CO1: Indicating that AO2 outputs current signal.

JP3
Shift 5 V: Indicating that VS terminal provides externally 5V voltage signal.
Shift OFF: Indicating that VS terminal is at vacant state.
Shift 10V: Indicating that VS terminal provides externally 10V voltage signal.
4.4 Wiring of major loop terminal

4.4.1 Terminal Functions
Symbol Function description Symbol Function description
DC electric reactor can be

P+ DC side voltage positive terminal P connected between P+ and
PB.
DC side voltage negative

terminal, DC braking resistance can
P- Bus voltage input terminal of DC PB be connected between P+
braking unit can be connected and PB.
between P+ and P-.
Connect three-phase AC power Connect three-phase AC

R、S、T U、V、W
supply of grid motor
E Earthing terminal -- --

4.4.2 Main loop terminal diagram
Category I main loop terminal Applicable model: E280-4T0011G/4T0015P ～ E280-4T0015G/4T0022P
Energy consumption braking resistor
R S T P+ U V W PB E
Motor
Ground
Three-phase power supply
Category II main loop terminal Applicable model: E280-4T0022G/4T0030P ～ E280-4T0040G/4T0055P
R S T P+ E U V W PB
Ground Motor
Category Ⅲ main loop terminal Applicable model: E280-4T0055G/4T0075P
P+ R S T U V W PB E
Motor
Ground
Category Ⅳ main loop terminal Applicable model: E280-4T0075G/4T0090P ～ E280-4T0110G/4T0150P
P+ P- R S T E U V W PB
Motor Ground

Category Ⅴ main loop terminal Applicable model: E280-4T0150G/4T0185P～ E280-4T0185G/4T0220P
错误！链接无效。
DC reactor Ground Motor

Category Ⅵ main loop terminal Applicable model: E280-4T0220G/4T0300P
P P+ P- R S T E U V W
DC 直流电抗器
reactor
Ground Motor
Brake unit Three-phase power supply
Category Ⅶ main loop terminal Applicable model: E280-4T0300G/4T0370P
P P+ P- R S T E U V W
直流电抗器
DC reactor
Ground Motor
Brake unit Three-phase power supply
Category Ⅷ main loop terminal Applicable model: E280-4T0370G/4T0450P
P+ P P- R S T U V W E
直流电抗器大地
Ground
DC reactor
Brake unit 电动机

Motor
制动单元三相电源输入

Category Ⅸ main loop terminal Applicable model: E280-4T0450G/4T0550P ～
E280-4T0550G/4T0750P
R S T P P+ P- U V W E
直流电抗器
DC reactor 大地
Ground
Three-phase power supply Brake

制动单元 unit 电动机
Motor
三相电源输入
Category Ⅹ main loop terminal Applicable model: E280-4T0750G/4T0900P～E280-4T2200G/4T2500P
R S T P P+ P- U V W E
直流电抗器
DC reactor Ground
大地
Brake unit 电动机

Motor
Three-phase power supply 制动单元
三相电源输入
Category Ⅺ main loop terminal Applicable model: E280-4T2500G/4T2800P ～
E280-4T3150G/4T3500P
Ground 三相电源power
输入 supply
大地 Three-phase
E R S T
E U V W P- P+ P
大地
Ground 直
DC流电抗器
reactor
电动机
Motor Brake
制动单元unit

4.5 Wiring for basic operation of inverters
R U 电动机
Motor
S V M
T W
E 接大地
Grounding
DI1 TA
DI2 TB
可编程输出
Programmable output
DI3 TC
DI4
P+
DI5 Connected
P- to braking
外接制动电阻
DI6 resistor
PB
CM
E 24V 辅助直流电源
Auxiliary power supply
V350 CM
0－10V 频率设定
0-10Vfrequency
VS
AI1
E280 AO1 电压表（ 0-10V
Volt gauge ）/电流表（0-20mA
(0－10V)/ammeter ）
(0－20mA)
AO2 电压表（ 0-10V
Volt gauge ）/电流表（0-20mA
(0－10V)/ammeter ）
(0－20mA)
0-20mA
0－20mA 频率设定
frequency AI2
GND
GND
E
E Open collector
output
开路集电极输出
DO1
PG扩展卡（选配） DO2
+12V
CM
GD
E
A+
PG expansion A-
card (optional) PG B+
B-
Z+
Z-
E
Figure 4-2 Basic Wiring Diagram of E280 Series Inverters

34 Operation And Simple Running Of Frequency Inverter
Chapter 5
Operation And Simple Running Of Frequency Inverter
5.1 Basic function of the panel
The panel of the frequency inverter mainly has two functions apart of basic starting and stopping
control: monitoring of parameters for operating status and query and modification of internal
parameters. Accordingly, the operation panel is divided into two operating modes: monitoring
mode and parameter modification/query mode.
When powered on, the major display field will show the company’s Logo abbreviation from right
to left and restore to normal display in 3 seconds. At the same time, the auxiliary display column
displays the serial number of the frequency inverter statically such as “E-580” and displays the
model information of the frequency inverter except “T, S” 3 seconds later such as “4.0037” and
displays normally 3 seconds later. At this time, the operating parameters displayed in the
operation panel are determined by the internal parameters of the frequency inverter [F0.0.12],
[F0.0.13]. The operation panel will return normal monitoring mode at any status if there is no
keying operation within 1 minute. (See Chapter 3 for the appearance of the operation panel).
5.1.1 Panel description
LED main display

LED主显示 LED main display
LED主显示
LCD display
LEDarea
数码 LCDLEDdisplay
数码
显示区 LED auxiliary 显示area区 LED auxiliary display
LED辅显示 LED辅显示
display Unit combination
Unit combination 单位组合
indicator 单位组合
显示灯 indicator
显示灯
功能组合
Functional Function Functional
功能组合 combination
Function operating功area
能功能
indicator
操作区显示灯
combination operating操作区
area 显示灯
indicator
Figure 4-1-A Two-Line LED Small Panel Standard Figure 4-1-B Two-Line LED Standard Operating Panel
configuration for E280-4T0040G/4T0055and below models Standard Configuration for E280-4T0055G/4T0075P and
above models

Operation And Simple Running Of Frequency Inverter 35
Table 5-1 Functions of keys

Item Functions
Main digital Display the current operating status parameters and setting parameters of the
display frequency inverter.
Auxiliary
Display the current operating status parameters and setting parameters of the
digital
display frequency inverter
A, HZ, V displays the corresponding measurement unit of the data of the main digital
display. % displays compound unit
A, Hz, V, %
The compound unit indicator is defined as follows:
Hz+A = RPM； V+% = Sec. ；A + V = Min
Indicator for operating status, its flicker shows the frequency inverter is in F/R
FWD, REV
operation and has voltage output.
The indicator is off: the external terminal command is valid; the indicator is on: the
PANEL/REM operation panel command is valid;
OTE the indicator is flashing: the communication interface (or expanded communication
board or expanded function board) command is valid.
Alarm indicator:
ALARM The indicator is on: the frequency inverter is in warning status. It shall check up and
eliminate abnormalities; otherwise, the frequency inverter may be faulty and shut down.
Forward operation command key

Press this key to send forward operation command when the operation command channel of
the frequency inverter is set as operation panel control ([F0.3.33] or [F0.3.34]=0)
Reverse/inching operation command key

Press this key to send reverse operation command when the reverse function ([FF.4.42=# # #
0]) is selected and the operation command channel of the frequency inverter is set as operation
panel control ([F0.3.33] or [F0.3.34]=0); and press this key to send inching operation command
when inching function ([FF.4.42=# # # 1]) is selected.
Stop/reset key
When this key is pressed in operating status, the frequency inverter will shut down as per set
mode; and when pressing this key in fault conditions, the frequency inverter will reset and
return to normal stopped status.
Keys can be locked or functions can be changed by users (refer to Functional
Parameter F0.011).
Return key
At any status, it will return to the status of last level till normal monitoring mode by pressing this
key.
Mode key
Switch display function parameter set and monitoring parameter set in parameter modification
status. The corresponding “EROM stored value”, “value at this time of energizing” and “panel
backup value” of the current function code will be displayed at auxiliary display column in turn
by pressing this key.
Left shift key

The modified data bit can be selected from right to left by pressing this key and the modified bit
has flicker display.
Right shift key

The modified data bit can be selected from left to right by pressing this key and the modified bit
has flicker display.

Item Functions
Data modification key

Used to mofidy function code or parameter.
If digital setting mode is set currently, the digital setting value can be modified directly by using
this key in normal monitoring mode.
Local, terminal and communication control function switch key

The keyboard control, external terminal control and communication control functinos can be
swithced with each other through setting [F0.0.11]=##1## (the switch status is not stored and
lost after power down).
Shuttle selection key

Adjust data after addition in clockwise rotation and adjust data after subtraction in
counterclockwise rotation. When [F0.0.25]=3, select panel shuttle setting.
Ok key
Confirm the current status and parameters (the parameters are stored in the internal memory)
and enter into next-level function menu.

5.2 Basic functions and operating methods of panel

5.2.1 Basic functions of panel
The operation panel also has the following special functions aside from such basic functions as
forward operation, reverse operation, inching operation, shut down, fault reset, parameter
modifycation and inquiry and operating status parameter monitoring, etc.
Parameter copy and read/backup (parameter upload)
This operation panel allows for copying the internal parameters of the frequency inverter to the
operation panel (only the internal parameters opened to users) and storing permanently.
Therefore, users can backup their typical setting parameters to the operation panel for emergency.
The backup parameters in the operation panel do not influence the operation of the frequency
inverter and can be checked and modified separately.
When [F0.0.08]=####1, the keyboard will begin to read the internal parameters of the frequency
inverter and the operation panel will display the process of reading parameters in real time. After
the completion of parameter backup, the display mode will recover to normal monitoring
automatically. During parameter backup, the operation can be stopped at any time by pressing
key and the display will switch to normal monitoring mode.If alarm information is occurred,
please refer to Chapter 8.
Parameter copy/write in (parameter download)
This operation panel allows for copying the backup parameters to the internal memory of the
frequency inverter (only the internal parameters opened to users) and users can write in their
typical setting parameters backed up in the operation panel into the frequency inverter at one
time without separate modification.
When the frequency inverter set F0.0.08 as # # 1 2 or # # 1 3 in stopped mode, the keyboard will
begin to copy the backup parameters to frequency inverter and the operation panel will display
the process in real time. After the completion of copying, the display mode will recover to normal
monitoring automatically.
During parameter copying, the operation can be stopped at any time to abandon the copied
parameters by pressing key and the display mode will switch to normal monitoring
mode. If alarm information is occurred, please refer to Chapter 8.
Check and modification of internal parameters
In normal monitoring mode, the internal parameters of the frequency inverter can be checked
and modified as per general methods by pressing key.

Check and modification of panel backup parameters
In normal monitoring mode, the backup parameters in the operation panel can be checked and
modified by pressing and key simultaneously (double key compound use) and the
high-order code “F” will display flickeringly when function code is displayed. The modification
methods of backup parameters are the same as that of internal parameters.
Locking and unlocking of panel
1) Locking: part of or all the keying functions of the panel can be locked through setting the
application parameter F0.0.11. If the parameter is set as panel locking mode, the panel will be
locked immediately after the frequency inverter is energized.
2) Unlocking: the panel will be unlocked for 5 minutes temporarily by pressing and
maintaining and pressing twice in order within 5 seconds and it will automatically
recover to locking if there’s no keying within 5 minutes.
To unlock the panel thoroughly, the panel locking parameter [F0.0.11]

should be modified into “unlocked” status during the temporary unlock of
the panel.
Key function
key function is limited by the application parameter F0.0.11. In function enabling and
“normal monitoring mode”, press key to switch the operation command channel in
order “operation panel local terminal communication interface operation
panel”. indicator displays the selected command channel which will be valid by
pressing within 3 seconds. It will abandon the switch and return to original status by
pressing or without pressing within 3 seconds.
When switching command channel, if the original setting is “operation

panel” or “local terminal”, the “communication interface” will be defaulted
as local MODBUS field bus.
The operation command channel switched by this function is not stored permanently. It will
recover to original setting after the frequency inverter is power down and restarted. Relevant
application parameters of the frequency inverter should be modified to permanently change
the command channel.

5.2.2 Operating methods of panel

1) Query for status parameters (e.g.)
主显示：50.00Output
输出频率
Main display: 50.00
frequency
常态监控模式
Normal monitoring mode
辅显示：2.3
Auxiliary display: 2.3 输出电流
Output current
（单击2次）
(Click twice)
Query for status 主显示：d0.0.00Monitoring

监控代码
Main display: d0.0.00 code Select queried
状态参数查询
parameters
status
辅显示：50.00 Output
输出频率
Auxiliary display: 50.00
frequency parameters
Return
返
normal
回
control
常
态
控
制
Query for status 主显示: d0.0.04Function

功能代码
Main display: d0.0.04 code
状态参数查询
parameters
辅显示: 380
Auxiliary display: 380 输出电压
Output voltage
Return
the
确定查询
Confirm query for status
parameters last
状态参数 level
主显示: 380Output
输出电压
Main display: 380
voltage
参数查询
Parameter inquiry
辅显示: 2.3 输出电流
Auxiliary display: 2.3 Output current
进入参数
Enter into parameter
Main display: F0.0.01 Function code
modification mode Parameter modification
修改模式
(refer to the next section)
参数修改模式mode Auxiliary display: 2.3 Parameter data
（参见下节）
Figure 5-2 Query for status parameters

2) Parameter query and modification (e.g.)
主显示：50.00
Main 输出频率
display: 50.00 Output frequency
Normal monitoring
Modification/
备份参数
query for
修改/查询backup
(Click once)
parameters （单击1次）
Note: The function code character “F”

主显示：F0.0.00功能代码注：修改/查询备份参数时
will flicker when modifying/querying
参数查询
Parameter inquiry
功能代码字符“F”闪烁
backup parameters.
辅显示：0000
Auxiliary 参数数据
display: 0000 Parameter data
选择被
Select queried/modified
Abandon放 parameter items
查询/修改参数项
弃
modification
修
改

参数查询
Parameter inquiry
Auxiliary display: d0.00 Parameter data
确定查询
Confirm query for status
状态参数
Main display: d0.00 Parameter data

Parameter inquiry Continue to
Auxiliary display: 2.3 Output current 继 other
modify
Abandon 续
parameters
具体功能
See the indication
修or return
modifica-
for
详见标注detailed
Modify parameters as functions
tion 改
放
needed 其
根据需要弃
它
修改参数修
参
改
数
或
Main display: d0.07 Parameter data
返
Parameter modification 回
Store the modified

存储修改 parameters
过的参数
Parameter storage Main display: F0.0.14 Function code
Auxiliary display: d0.07 Parameter data
Figure 5-3 Parameter check and modification

Remark:In this status, the auxiliary display column will display the following in turn by
pressing key repeatedly. Default auxiliary monitoring parameters (original state)
EROM regional numerical value parameter values at initial energizing backup
parameters in operation panel, the numerical value will flicker when “EROM regional numerical
value”, “parameter values at initial energizing” and “backup parameters in operation panel” are
displayed.
5.3 Simple running of frequency inverter

5.3.1 Initial settings
● Selection of control mode

E280 frequency inverter has three control modes: vector control without PG, vector control with
PG and V/F control. The operation control mode is selected by the application parameter
F0.0.09.
Mode 0: vector control without PG, i.e. vector control without velocity sensor, also called open
loop vector control. It is applicable to the place where encoder is not installed, has higher
requirement to starting torque and speed control precision and the normal V/F control mode can
not satisfied.
Mode 1: vector control with PG, i.e. vector control with velocity sensor, also called closed loop
vector control. It is applicable to the place where faster response of torque and higher control
precision is required.
Mode 2: V/F control mode. Except normal V/F control application, it can also be applied to the
place where the frequency inverter drives more than one motor.
The control modes of frequency inverter vary from the type and control requirements of motor
and set by parameter F0.0.09=####. For instance, the field where three-phase asynchronous
motor is used can be selected through setting F0.0.09=###0 and the field where the control
precision is highly required with velocity sensor can be set to F0.0.09=##1# speed closed loop
vector control mode.
● Selection of frequency input channel (F0.2.25)
E280 frequency inverter has 29 frequency setting modes for each of the channel.
● Operation command input channel [F0.3.33]

5.3.2 Simple operation
It is absolutely forbidden to connect the power cord to the output U, V, W of the

frequency inverter.
Simple wiring diagram

three-phase
breakermode
三相断路器 motor
three- 电动机
三
phase R U
相
power
电 S V M
supply
源 T W
E
three-phase grounding
接大地
breakermode
三相断路器 PG expansion card
PG扩展卡（选配）
V350
电动机
three-
三
phase × R U
motor (match) +12V
GD
E280
相
power
电
× S V M A+
supply
源 × T W PG
A-
B+
E
B-
grounding Z+
接大地
Z-
E
Figure 5-3 Wiring for the operation of SVC mode Figure 5-4 Wiring for the operation of VC mode
SVC (non-inductive vector) operation

Take 7.5KW frequency inverter which drives 7.5KW three-phase AC asynchronous motor as the example
to indicate the operation process. The nameplate parameters of the motor are:
Rated power: 7.5KW

额定功率：7.5KW rated voltage: 380V
额定电压：380V rated current: 15.4A
额定电流：15.4A
Rated frequency: 50.00HZ rated
额定频率：50.00Hz speed: 1440rpm
额定转速：1440rpm pulse of encoder: 1000PPR
编码器的脉冲数：1000PPR
Use operation panel to conduct digital frequency setting and start-stop control.
1．Connect as per Figure 5-3;
2．Power on after making sure the wiring is correct;
3．Set parameters as follows:

[F0.0.09]=0000 (noninductive vector control)
[F0.0.00]=0001 (apply macroparameters, set as panel operation digital setting for
shortcut))
[F2.0.00]=7.5 (rated power of motor)
[F2.0.01]=380 (rated voltage of motor)
[F2.0.02]=15.4 (rated current of motor)

[F2.0.03]=50.00 (rated frequency of motor)
[F2.0.04]=1440 (rated speed of motor)

4．Press key to start frequency inverter. If the name plate parameters （F2.0.00 ~
F2.0.04) of the motor are modified in ③, the primary static parameter identification will be
started automatically, the frequency inverter will output 0 frequency and the auxiliary
display column will display the current output current (not limited by F0.0.13 at this time).
When the display current is stable as 0.0, the automatic learning is finished and operation
is started;
5．Press key to increase set frequency, where the output frequency of the frequency
inverter will be increased and the speed of motor will accelerate;
6．Observe the operation of motor, if there are abnormalities, stop it immediately and power
off and re-operate it after finding out the causes;

7．Press Data Modification key to reduce set frequency;
8．Press key to stop operation and cut off the power supply.
VC (inductive vector) operation

The following parameters also need to be set except the above set parameters required by
SVC operation. The wiring diagram is as shown in figure 5-4.
[F0.0.09]=0010 (inductive vector control)

[F8.0.04]=0 (speed feedback channel)
[F8.0.05]=1000 (pulse of encoder per revolution)
[F8.0.06] If F/R periodic vibration is occurred in starting, this parameter shall be
set as 1 (or exchange the wiring of A, B pulse); other operations are

the same as that of SVC operation.
If the motor is completely empty-load, slight oscillation may occur

sometimes in the operation under high carrier frequency. At this time,
please reduce the setting value of the carrier frequency. (Parameter
[F1.1.13 ]).

44 Functional Parameter Table
Chapter 6 Functional Parameter Table
Note:
"×": Indicates that the set value of the parameter cannot be changed when the inverter is running.
"☆": Indicates the parameter is relevant with the model of the inverter.
"R": Indicates the parameter is just for reading and cannot be changed;
"R/I": Indicates the parameter is just for reading and cannot be changed, but can be cleared by
initialization.
"—": Indicates the parameter is relevant with the type or status of connected accessories.
Variables: (H)-hexadecimal number; only bitwise data change is permitted (carry bit is not allowed),
and the upper and lower limit for bitwise change.

Functional Parameter Table 45
6.1 System management parameter

Function Factory Minimum Change
Name Setting Range and Description
Code Default Unit Limit
The unit: Application macro (0~F)

0: void (customized setting)
1: setting of panel operation digit (factory
default)
2: setting of panel operation shuttle
3: Two-line control 1 (AT1 setting)
Macro 4: Two-line control 2 (AT1 setting)
F0.0.00 0000 1 ×
parameter (H) 5: Three-line control 1 (AT1 setting)
6: Tool device spindle drive (AT1 setting)
Tens: reserved
Hundreds: dedicated macro
Kilobit: system macro (0~F)
0: standard operation
1: void (standard mode by default)
The unit: parameter display mode

0: Display all parameters
1: Display effective configuration
parameters
2: Display parameters different from
factory default
3: Display modified and stored
parameters after power-on this time
4: Display modified and un-stored
parameters after power-on this time
Parameter Tens: parameter modification mode

F0.0.01 display and 0: Effective and permanently stored after 0001 1
modification (H) modification
1: Effective after modification but not
stored, and getting lost after power-off
Hundreds: Reserved
Kilobit: batch restoring and batch saving
of parameters
2: Giving up modification of all unsaved
parameters (restore to original value)
5: Batch saving of all modified and
unsaved parameters
9: Restoring all parameters to initial
values at the time of power-on this time.
Modification
key for macro
F0.0.02 0~65535(1580) 0 1 ×
call parameters
(system macro)
LCD language
F0.0.03 0：Chinese 1：Reserved 0 1 -
selection
LCD display The unit: contrast 0~7

F0.0.04 0023 1 -
setting (H) Tens: normal display mode


0: Steady mode
1: Single parameter display
2: Dual parameter display
3: Three parameter display
The unit: parameter modification

permission
0: All parameters are permitted to be
modified
1: Except for this parameter, frequency
digital setting, PID digital setting,
revolution digital setting, torque digital
setting, locking password parameter
Parameter (F0.0.06), other parameters are
F0.0.05 0000 1
locking (H) forbidden to be modified.
2: All parameters are forbidden to be
modified except for this parameter and
the locking password.
Tens: Coded lock
0: Void
1: Effective – once the password is set,
this parameter cannot be modified
unless correct password is entered.
Parameter
F0.0.06 locking 0~65535 0 1
password
0: No action
1: Parameters of F0~F9 groups are
restored to the factory default.
2: Parameters of F0~FA groups are
3: Parameters of F0~Fb groups are
Parameter 4: Parameters of F0~Fc groups are
F0.0.07 0 1 ×
initialization restored to the factory default.
5: Parameters of F0~Fd groups are
6: Parameters of F0~FE groups are
7: Parameters of F0~FF groups are
8: Clear away fault records
The unit: Upload and download

0: No action
1: Parameter upload (inverter——>
panel)
Parameter 2: Parameter download (panel ——>
F0.0.08 0000 1 ×
copying (H) inverter)
3: Parameter download (except for
motor parameter F2 group)
Tens: Local download permitted


0: Parameter download forbidden
1: Parameter download permitted
The unit: Reserved
Tens: Control mode
Control mode
F0.0.09 0: SVC mode/open-loop vector control 0020 1 ×
selection
1: VC mode/closed-loop vector control
2: V/F control
Reserved
F0.0.10
parameter
The unit: Panel key locking

0: No locking
1: All keys are locked except for UP/DW
(Shuttle), Stop and RUN.
2: All keys are locked except for STOP
and RUN
3: All keys are locked except for STOP.
4: Lock all keys
Tens: STOP key function
Selection of 0: Non-panel control mode void
F0.0.11 panel key 1: Press STOP key in any control mode 0000 1 ×
functions (H)
to stop the device slowly
2: Press STOP key in any control mode
to stop the device freely
Hundreds: Function of PANEL/
REMOTE keys
0: Void
1: Stop effective
2: Continuously effective
Kilobit: Reserved
Principal
F0.0.12 monitoring d0.0~d0.55 / d1.0~d1.55 d0.00 1
parameter (H)
Auxiliary
parameter 1 (H)
Auxiliary
parameter 2 (H)
Parameter
F0.0.06 locking 0~65535 0 1
password
0: No action
1: Parameters of F0~F9 groups are
Parameter restored to the factory default.
F0.0.07 0 1 ×
initialization 2: Parameters of F0~FA groups are
3: Parameters of F0~Fb groups are


4: Parameters of F0~Fc groups are
5: Parameters of F0~Fd groups are
6: Parameters of F0~FE groups are
7: Parameters of F0~FF groups are
8: Clear away fault records

0: No action
1: Parameter upload (inverter—> panel)
2: Parameter download (panel —>
Parameter inverter)
F0.0.08 3: Parameter download (except for 0000 1 ×
copying (H)
motor parameter F2 group)
Tens: Local download permitted
0: Parameter download forbidden
1: Parameter download permitted
The unit: Reserved

Tens: Control mode
Control mode
F0.0.09 0: SVC mode/open-loop vector control 0000 1 ×
selection
1: VC mode/closed-loop vector control
2: V/F control
Reserved
F0.0.10
parameter
The unit: Panel key locking

0: No locking
1: All keys are locked except for UP/DW
(Shuttle), Stop and RUN.
2: All keys are locked except for STOP
and RUN
3: All keys are locked except for STOP.
4: Lock all keys
Tens: STOP key function
Selection of 0: Non-panel control mode void
F0.0.11 panel key 1: Press STOP key in any control mode 0000 1 ×
functions (H)
to stop the device slowly
2: Press STOP key in any control mode
to stop the device freely
Hundreds: Function of PANEL/
REMOTE keys
0: Void
1: Stop effective
2: Continuously effective
Kilobit: Reserved
F0.0.12 Principal d0.0~d0.55 / d1.0~d1.55 d0.00 1


monitoring
parameter (H)
Auxiliary
F0.0.13 monitor d0.0~d0.55 / d1.0~d1.55 d0.02 1
parameter 1(H)
Auxiliary
F0.0.14 monitor d0.0~d0.55 / d1.0~d1.55 d0.04 1
parameter 2(H)
6.2 Running command selection

F0.1.15 Reserved
F0.1.16 Reserved
The unit: direction switch

0: Void 1: Negate
Running Tens: direction locking

F0.1.17 0000 1
direction (H) 0: Void (determined by the direction
command)
1: FWD locking
2: REV locking
F0.1.18 Reserved
F0.1.19 Reserved
Maximum
F0.1.20 output 10.00~300.00Hz 60.00 0.01
frequency
Upper
F0.1.21 limiting [F0.1.22]~Min.（300.00Hz,[F0.1.20]） 50.00 0.01
frequency
Lower
F0.1.22 limiting 0.0Hz~[F0.1.21] 0.0 0.01
frequency
FWD jog
F0.1.23 0.0Hz~[F0.1.21] 10.00 0.01
frequency
REV jog
F0.1.24 0.0Hz~[F0.1.21] 10.00 0.01
frequency

6.3 Frequency setting

0: Panel digital setting (maintained after
stop )
1: Panel digital setting (zero clearing after
stop)
2: Panel digital setting (maintained after
stop and saved after power-off)
3: Setting of panel shuttle potentiometer
4: Terminal UP/DW setting (maintained
after stop)
5: Terminal UP/DW setting (zero clearing
after stop)
6: Terminal UP/DW setting (maintained
after stop and saved after power-off)
7: Terminal UP/DW two-way setting
( maintained in bipolar mode after stop)
8: Terminal UP/DW two-way setting
(maintained in bipolar mode after stop
and saved after power-off)
9: Analog input AI1
10: Analog input AI2
Frequency 11: Analog input AI3
F0.2.25 setting 12: Given by the analog input 0 1
channel AI1bipolarity
13: Given by the analog input AI3
bipolarity
14: Pulse input Fin
15: Given by the pulse input bipolarity
16: MODBUS fieldbus set value 1
18: AI1+AI2
19: AI2+AI3
20: AI2+pulse input Fin
21: AI1*AI2/rail-to-rail input (10V)
22: AI1/AI2
23: Process PID output
24: Reserved
25: Disturbance running frequency
26: Automatic multi-sage running
frequency
27: Terminal selection multi-stage
frequency
28: Virtual analog input SAI1
29: Virtual mode input SAI2
F0.2.26 Reserved
Minimum
value of
F0.2.27 0.0Hz~[F0.2.28] 0.0 0.01
frequency
setting
Maximum
F0.2.28 [F0.2.27]~[F0.1.20] 50.0 0.01
value of


frequency
setting
Panel digital
set value of
F0.2.29 0.0Hz ~[F0.2.28] 0.0 0.01
frequency
setting panel
F0.2.30
Reserved
～
parameters
F0.2.32
6.4 Control command source

0: Operating panel
1: External control terminal
F0.3.33 Control command 0 1
2: MODBUS fieldbus/standard
expansion card configuration
Reserved
F0.3.34
parameter
The unit: Control command

action mode
0: Two-line mode 1
1: Two-line mode 2
2: Three-line mode 1
External control 3: Three-line mode 2
F0.3.35 terminal action Tens: control command power-on 0000 1
mode (H) first starting mode
0: Running signal level starting
1: Running signal rising edge
starting (two-line mode 1 and 2)
Hundreds: reserved
Kilobit: reserved
F0.3.36 Reserved

6.5 Start and stop

The unit: Start permission

0: Function closed
1: Permitted when the multifunctional
terminal is effective
2: Command word from standard
fieldbus (standard expansion card)
Tens: Reserved
Start/Running Hundreds: Running permission

F0.4.37 0000 1 ×
permission (H) 0: Function closed
1: Permitted when the multifunctional
terminal is effective
2: Command word from standard
fieldbus (standard expansion card)
Kilobit: The action mode when the

running permission signal is void
0: Free stop
1: Deceleration stop
The unit: start mode

0: Normal start
1: Revolution tracking start
Start/Stop Mode
F0.4.38 Tens: Reserved 0000 1 ×
(H)
Hundreds: Stop mode
1: Free stop
F0.4.39 Start frequency 0.0Hz~50.00Hz 0.50 0.01
Start frequency
F0.4.40 0.00~10.00Sec. 0.0 0.01
holding time
Start
F0.4.41 pre-excitation 0.0~100.0(%) 35.0 0.1
current
Start
F0.4.42 pre-excitation 0.00~10.00Sec. 0.0 0.01
time
F0.4.43 Start delay 0.00~10.00Sec. 0.0 0.01
The unit: DC band-type brake

DC band-type function (effective when running
F0.4.44 brake control commands) 0000 1
(H) 0: Closed 1: Open
Tens: Reserved
DC band type
brake/brake
F0.4.45 0.0~[F0.1.21] 2.00 0.01
initial frequency/
speed
F0.4.46 DC brake action 0.0~10.00Sec. 0.0 0.01


time
DC band-type
F0.4.47 brake/brake 0.0~100.0(%) 50.0 0.1
injection current
Restart after 0: Forbidden
F0.4.48 0 1
power-off 1: Effective
Restart after
power-off/
F0.4.49 Standby time for 0.10~10.00Sec. 0.5 0.1
restart after free
stop
FWD and REV
F0.4.50 transition dead 0.00~5.00Sec. 0.0 0.01
time
FWD and REV 0: Switch at zero point
F0.4.51 0 1
switch mode 1: Start frequency switch
Zero speed
F0.4.52 (frequency) 0.0~2.00Hz 0.25 0.01
detection level
Zero speed
F0.4.53 0.0~10.00Sec. 0.1 0.01
delay time
0: The inverter will stop in deceleration
mode according to the emergency
Emergency stop
F0.4.54 stop and deceleration time. 0 1
mode (EMS)
1: The inverter will immediately stop in
free sliding mode.
6.6 Acceleration and deceleration characteristics parameters

Function Setting Range and Factory Minimum Change
Name
Code Description Default Unit Limit
The unit: Acceleration and

deceleration mode
0: Liner acceleration and
Acceleration and deceleration
deceleration 1: S curve acceleration and
F1.0.00 0000 1 ×
characteristics deceleration
parameters
Tens: Unit of acceleration and
deceleration time
0: Sec. (Second)
1: Min. (Minute)
Time ratio of S curve
acceleration
F1.0.01 5.0~100.0-[F1.0.02] 15.0 0.1
starting/deceleration
ending period
Time ratio of S curve
acceleration
F1.0.02 20.0~100.0-[F1.0.01] 70.0 0.1
rising/deceleration
decreasing period


Name
F1.0.03 Acceleration time 1 0.01~ 600.00 (Sec./Min.) ☆ 0.01
F1.0.04 Deceleration time 1 0.01~ 600.00 (Sec./Min.) ☆ 0.01
Acceleration 4/jog
F1.0.09 0.01~ 600.00 (Sec./Min.) ☆ 0.01
acceleration time
Deceleration 4/jog
F1.0.10 0.01~ 600.00 (Sec./Min.) ☆ 0.01
deceleration time
EMS emergency stop
F1.0.11 0.01~ 600.00 (Sec./Min.) ☆ 0.01
and deceleration time
F1.0.12 Reserve
6.7 Carrier frequency

Three-phase voltage vector
composition mode (FF.4.43 = ##0#) :
Carrier 2.0~12.0KHz
F1.1.13 ☆ 0.1
frequency Two-phase voltage vector composition
mode (FF.4.43 = ##1#) :
2.0~15.0KHz
The unit: Load linkage adjustment

0: Void 1: Effective
Tens: Temperature linkage

adjustment
Carrier Hundreds: Reference frequency
F1.1.14 2011 1
characteristics
linkage adjustment
Kilobit: Modulation mode

0: Asynchronous modulation
1: Synchronous modulation
2: Sound smooth

6.8 V/F parameters and overload protection

Name
Motor reference
F1.2.15 5.00~300.00Hz 50.00 0.01 ×
frequency
F1.2.16 Motor reference voltage 50~500V / 25 ~ 250V 380/220 1
F1.2.17 Reserved - - - ×
Torque increasing voltage
F1.2.18 0.0~20.0% ☆ 0.1
for motor
Frequency point 1 of
F1.2.19 0.0~[F0.1.21] 0.0 0.01 ×
motor V/F curve
Voltage point 1 of Motor
F1.2.20 0~500V 0.0 0.1
V/F curve
F1.2.21 0.0~[F0.1.21] 0.0 0.01 ×
motor 1 V/F curve
F1.2.22 0~500V 0.0 0.1
V/F curve
F1.2.23 0.0~[F0.1.21] 0.0 0.01 ×
motor V/F curve
F1.2.24 0~500V 0.0 0.1
V/F curve
Motor slip frequency
F1.2.25 0~150(%) 0 1
compensation
F1.2.26 - - - ×
～ Reserve
F1.3.38
6.9 Steady running

Name
Acceleration/deceleration
F1.4.39 120~180(%) 150 1
current limiting level
Strong start current
F1.4.40 120~200(%) 150 1
limiting level
Strong start current
F1.4.41 0.00~5.00Sec. 0.0 0.01
holding time
The unit: Overvoltage

suppression adjustor
0: Closed 1: Effective
(Frequency increasing
suppression)
F1.4.42 Trip Suppression Selection 0110 1
Tens: Undervoltage
suppression adjustor
(frequency decreasing
suppression)


Name
Hundreds: Frequency
decreasing and current
limiting adjustor
Kilobit: Reserved
Action level of the
F1.4.43 660~800 V 740 1
overvoltage adjustor
Overvoltage adjusting
F1.4.44 0.10~10.00 1.00 0.01
gain
Action level of the
F1.4.45 [FF.2.35]~480V 330V 1
undervoltage adjustor
Undervoltage adjusting
F1.4.46 0.10~10.00 1.00 0.01
gain
Action level of the
frequency decreasing
F1.4.47 20~200(%) 180 1
and current limiting
adjustor
Adjusting gain of the
frequency decreasing
F1.4.48 0.10~10.00 1.00 0.01
and current limiting
adjustor
0~5(the self-recovery
Recovery times of fault
F1.4.49 function is deactivated when 0 1
self resetting
it is set to 0)
0.2~5.0Sec （Real waiting
The recovery waiting
F1.4.50 time progressive increase with 1.0 0.1
time of fault self resetting
recovery times）
Time period for self
F1.4.51 900~36000Sec. 3600 1
resetting timing
The unit: overcurrent

0: Self resetting forbidden
1: Self resetting permitted
The tens: overvoltage
Selection of self resetting
F1.4.52 The hundreds: Output 0000 1 F1.4.52
fault
grounding
Kilobit: Running
undervoltage
F1.4.53 Display coefficient 0.001 ~ 60.000 1.000 0.001 F1.4.53

6.10 Motor parameters

Name
Rated power (tested from start
F2.0.00 0.1~1000.0KW ☆ 0.1KW ×
static status after modification)
Rated voltage (tested from start
F2.0.01 30~480V 380/220 1V ×
Rated current (tested from start
F2.0.02 0.01~650.00A ☆ 0.01A ×
Rated frequency (tested from
Max{5.00,[F2.0.04]/60}
F2.0.03 start static status after 50.00 0.01Hz ×
~300.00Hz
modification)
Rated revolution (tested from
10~Min.{30000,60*[F2.
F2.0.04 start static status after ☆ 1rpm ×
0.03]}rpm
modification)
0.15*[F2.0.02]~
F2.0.05 Idling current ☆ 0.01A ×
0.8*[F2.0.02]
F2.0.06 Stator resistance 0.01~65000mΩ 0.01 Hint ×
F2.0.07 Stator inductance 0.001~6500.0mH 0.01 Hint ×
F2.0.08 Total leakage inductance 0.001~6500.0mH 0.01 Hint ×
F2.0.09 Rotator time constant 5.0~6500.0ms ☆ 0.1ms ×
F2.0.10 Slip compensation coefficient 0.50~1.50 1.00 0.01
F2.0.11
~ Retention parameter ×
F2.0.23
F2.0.24 Z pulse initial angle 0.0 ~359.9 0.0 0.1 ×
F2.0.25 Motor overload protection 50.0~131.0(%)
110.0 0.1
coefficient (131 closed) (131--closed)
F2.1.26
~ Reserved ×
F2.1.51
6.11 Parameter measurement and pre-excitation

Name
Start excitation time in
F2.2.52 0.02 ~ 2.50Sec. ☆ 0.01
vector mode
0: Closed
Motor parameter 1: Static identification
F2.2.53 0 1 ×
measurement 2: Static + operating parameter
identification
The minimum unit of stator resistance, stator inductance and total leakage inductance o
asynchronous machines is relevant with models.

6.12 Multifunctional input terminal

Function Setting Range Factory Minimum Change
Name
Code and Description Default Unit Limit
F3.0.00 Multifunctional input terminal DI1 0~96 0 1 ×
Multifunctional input terminal DI7/
F3.0.06 0~96 0 1 ×
expansion function
Multifunctional input terminal DI8/
F3.0.07 0~96 0 1 ×
expansion function
Multifunctional input terminal
F3.0.08 0~98 97 1 ×
DI9/Fin/ standard expansion card
Multifunctional terminal filtering
F3.0.09 1~50ms 5ms 1
time (DI1~DI5)
Multifunctional terminal filtering
F3.0.10 time (DI6~DI9)/ standard 1~50ms 5ms 1
expansion card
The unit: DI1~DI4

terminal
0~F: 4-bit binary,
bit=0 power-on
effective, 1
disconnection
effective
Tens: DI5~DI8
F3.0.11 Input terminal effective level (H) 0000 1 ×
terminal
The same as
above
Hundreds: DI9
terminal
The same as
above
Kilobit: Reserved

6.13 Multifunctional output terminal multifunctional output terminal

Setting Range
Name and
Description
0~71 (No. 63’s
F3.1.12 Multifunctional output terminal DO1 function is not 1 1
valid)
0~71 (No. 63’s
F3.1.13 Multifunctional output terminal DO2 function is not 2 1
valid)
Multifunctional output terminal
F3.1.14 0~71 63 1
DO3/Fout/ expansion function
DO1 terminal effective signal output
F3.1.15 0.0~10.00Sec. 0.0 0.01
delay time
DO1 terminal void signal output delay
F3.1.16 0.0~10.00Sec. 0.0 0.01
time
F3.1.17 0.0~10.00Sec. 0.0 0.01
delay time
F3.1.18 0.0~10.00Sec. 0.0 0.01
time
F3.1.19 0.0~10.00Sec. 0.0 0.01
delay time
F3.1.20 0.0~10.00Sec. 0.0 0.01
time
0~71(No. 63’s
Multifunctional relay output
F3.1.21 function is not 4 1
(RO1A/B/C)
valid)
0~71(No. 63’s
Multifunctional relay output
F3.1.22 function is not 5 1
(RO2A/B/C)/standard expansion card
valid)
F3.1.23 RO1 power-on delay time 0.0~10.00Sec. 0.0 0.01
F3.1.24 RO1 disconnection delay time 0.0~10.00Sec. 0.0 0.01
F3.1.25 RO2 power-on delay time 0.0~10.00Sec. 0.0 0.01
F3.1.26 RO2 disconnection delay time 0.0~10.00Sec. 0.0 0.01
F3.1.27 Input variable of monitor 1 0~45 (referring 0 1
F3.1.28 Input variables of monitor 2 to the monitor 1 1
variable
F3.1.29 Input variables of monitor 3 comparison 2 1
table)
Lower limiting value of monitor 1
F3.1.30 0.0~100.0 (%) 0.0 0.1
variables (relative to full scale value
Upper limiting value of monitor 1
F3.1.31 0.0~100.0 (%) 100.0 0.1
F3.1.32 0.0~100.0 (%) 0.0 0.1
F3.1.33 0.0~100.0 (%) 100.0 0.1

Setting Range
Name and
Description
F3.1.34 0.0~100.0 (%) 0.0 0.1
F3.1.35 0.0~100.0 (%) 100.0 0.1
6.14 Pulse input (Configured with standard expansion I/O board, and this
group of parameters are effective when D19 selects the frequency input function)
Name
Minimum pulse input
F3.2.36 0.0~100.00KHz 0.0 0.01
frequency DI9/Fin
Maximum pulse input
F3.2.37 0.01~100.00KHz 10.0 0.01
frequency DI9/Fin
F3.2.38 Pulse detection cycle 1ms~20ms 10 1
F3.2.39 Number of single-loop pulse 1~4096 1024 1
Mechanical transmission
F3.2.40 ratio (=pulse shaft revolution: 0.010 ~ 10.000 1.000 0.001
motor shaft revolution )
Driving wheel diameter
F3.2.41 0.1~2000.0mm 100.0 0.1
(for liner speed calculation)
Maximum accumulative length
F3.2.42 10m~50000m 50000 1m
value
F3.2.43 Maximum liner speed 0.01~500.00m/sec. 10.00 0.01
Current accumulative length
F3.2.44 0~50000m — 1 R
value
F3.2.45 Current liner speed 0.0~500.00m/sec. — 0.01 R
6.15 Pulse output (Equipped with standard expansion I/O board, and this
group of parameters are effective when DO3 terminal selects the frequency
output function)
Name
0: 0.25~100.00KHz
frequency signal
Type of output pulse 1: 10.0~1000.0Hz frequency
F3.3.46 0 1
signal DO3/Fout signal
2: Pulse width modulation
(PWM) signal
Minimum output
F3.3.47 0.25~100.00KHz 0.25 0.01
frequency DO3/Fout
Maximum output 0.25~100.00KHz (PWM
F3.3.48 10.0 0.01
frequency DO3/Fout signal reference frequency)
Pulse output mapping 0~45 (monitor variable
F3.3.49 0 1
variable comparison table)
DO3/Fout assignment
F3.3.50 0.0~[F3.3.51] 0.0 0.1
lower limit
DO3/Fout assignment
F3.3.51 [F3.3.50]~100.0 (%) 100.0 0.1
upper limit

6.16 Analog input

Name
F4.0.00 Analog input AI1 min. (0~10V) 0.00~[F4.0.01] 0.0 0.01
F4.0.01 Analog input AI1 max. (0~10V) [F4.0.00]~10.00V 10.00 0.01
F4.0.02 Analog input AI2 min. (4~20mA) 0.00~[F4.0.03] 4.00 0.01
F4.0.03 Analog input AI2 max. (4~20mA) [F4.0.02]~20.00mA 20.00 0.01
Analog input AI3 min. (-10V~
F4.0.04 -10.00~[F4.0.05] 0.00 0.01
10V)/standard expansion card
Analog input AI3 max. (-10V~
F4.0.05 [F4.0.04]~10.00V 10.00 0.01
10V)/standard expansion card
Analog input AI1 filtering time
F4.0.06 1~1000ms 10 1
coefficient
F4.0.07 1~1000ms 10 1
coefficient
F4.0.08 coefficient/standard expansion 1~1000ms 10 1
card
6.17 Analog input curve correction

Name
Analog input AI1 curve correction
F4.1.09 [F4.0.00]~[F4.0.01] 0.0 0.01
point 1
F4.1.10 [F4.0.00]~[F4.0.01] 0.0 0.01
value 1
F4.1.11 [F4.0.00]~[F4.0.01] 10.00 0.01
point 2
F4.1.12 [F4.0.00]~[F4.0.01] 10.00 0.01
value 2
F4.1.13 [F4.0.02]~[F4.0.03] 4.00 0.01
point 1
F4.1.14 [F4.0.02]~[F4.0.03] 4.00 0.01
value 1
F4.1.15 [F4.0.02]~[F4.0.03] 20.00 0.01
point 2
F4.1.16 [F4.0.02]~[F4.0.03] 20.00 0.01
value 2
Analog input AI3 zero hysteresis/
F4.1.17 0.0~2.00 0.10 0.01
standard expansion card
F4.1.18 [F4.0.04]~[F4.0.05] 0.0 0.01
point 1/standard expansion card
F4.1.19 [F4.0.04]~[F4.0.05] 0.0 0.01
value 1/standard expansion card
F4.1.20 [F4.0.04]~[F4.0.05] 10.00 0.01
point 2/standard expansion card
F4.1.21 [F4.0.04]~[F4.0.05] 10.00 0.01
value 2/standard expansion card

6.18 Analog output

Name
Mapping variable of multifunctional 0~45 (monitor
F4.2.22 analog output AO1 (subjecting to variable compari- 0 1
F5.4.44 exceeding function ) son table)
Mapping variable of 0~45 (monitor
F4.2.23 multifunctional analog output variable compare- 2 1
AO2/standard expansion card son table)
F4.2.24 AO1 minimum 0.00~10.00V 0.0 0.01
F4.2.25 AO1 maximum 0.00~10.00V 10.00 0.01
F4.2.26 AO1 lower limiting value 0.0~[F4.2.27] 0.0 0.1
F4.2.27 AO1 upper limiting value [F4.2.26]~100.0 (%) 100.0 0.1
F4.2.28 AO1 filtering time coefficient 0.01~10.00Sec. 0.10 0.01
AO1 fixed output value (at the time 0.0~20.00mA
F4.2.29 0.0 0.01
of fixed output value) (0.0~10.00V)
AO2 minimum value /standard
F4.2.30 0.00~10.00V 0.0 0.01
expansion card
AO2 maximum value/ standard
F4.2.31 0.00~10.00V 10.00 0.01
expansion card
AO2 lower limiting value /
F4.2.32 0.0~[F4.2.33] 0.0 0.1
AO2 upper limiting value /
F4.2.33 [F4.2.32]~100.0 (%) 100.0 0.1
AO2 filtering time coefficient/
F4.2.34 0.01~10.00Sec. 0.10 0.01
AO2 fixed output value (at the time
0.0~20.00mA
F4.2.35 of fixed output value)/ standard 0.0 0.01
(0.0~10.00V)
expansion card

6.19 Analog input wire breakage detection

The unit: AI1 wire breakage

detection
Analog input wire Tens: AI2 wire breakage
F4.3.36 breakage detection detection 0000 1 ×
function 0: Void 1: Effective
Hundreds: AI3 wire breakage
detection
AI1 wire breakage
detection threshold
F4.3.37 0.00~10.00V 0.25 0.01
value (the value
before correction)
AI1 wire breakage
F4.3.38 detection delay action 0.01~50.00Sec. 2.00 0.01
time
0: No action (for non-stop alarm)
1: Forcedly set to the minimum
Action selection after 2: Forcedly set to the maximum
F4.3.39 0 1 ×
AI1 wire-break 3: Forcedly set to the defaults
value (F4.3.40)
4: Inverter forced trip stop
Default input value
F4.3.40 0.00~10.00V 0.0 0.01
after AI1 wire-break
AI2 wire breakage
detection threshold
F4.3.41 0.00~20.00mA 4.00 0.01
value (the value
before correction)
AI2 wire breakage
time
F4.3.43 0 1 ×
AI2 wire-break 3: Forcedly set to the defaults
value (F4.3.44)
Default input value
F4.3.44 after AI2 wire 0.00~20.00mA 4.00 0.01
breakage
AI3 wire breakage
detection upper
F4.3.45 threshold value (the -10.00~10.00V 0.25 0.01
value before
correction)
AI3 wire breakage
F4.3.46 detection lower -10.00~10.00V -0.25 0.01
threshold value (the


value before
correction)
AI3 wire breakage
time
F4.3.48 0 1 ×
AI3 wire-break 3: Forcedly set to the defaults value
(F4.3.49)
Default input value
F4.3.49 -10.00~10.00V 0.0 0.01
after AI3 wire breakage
6.20 Virtual analog input

0: void (0 value)
1: SAI_CF1*AI1
Virtual analog
F4.4.50 2: SAI_CF1*AI2 0 1 ×
input SAI1
3: SAI_CF1*AI3
4: SAI_CF1*AO1
5: SAI_CF1*AO2
6: SAI_CF1*AI1+SAI_CF2*AI2+SAI_CST
7: SAI_CF1*AI1+SAI_CF2*AI3+SAI_CST
8: SAI_CF1*AO1+SAI_CF2*AO2+SAI_CST
9: SAI_CF1*AI1+SAI_CF2*AO1+SAI_CST
Virtual analog
F4.4.51 10: SAI_CF1*AI2+SAI_CF2*AO2+SAI_CST 0 1 ×
input SAI2
11: SAI_CF1*AI1+SAI_CF2*AO1
12: SAI_CF1*AI3+SAI_CF2*AO2
13: SAI1_CF1*AI1/AI2+SAI_CST
Virtual input 0.01 ~ 500.00
combination
F4.4.52 1.00 0.01 ×
coefficient 1
(SAI_CF1)
Virtual input 0.01 ~ 500.00
combination
F4.4.53 1.00 0.01 ×
coefficient
2(SAI_CF2)
Virtual input -4080 ~ 4080
combination
F4.4.54 0 1 ×
constant
(SAI_CST)

6.21 Hopping frequency

Name
F5.0.00 Hopping frequency1 0.0~[F0.1.21] 0.0 0.01 ×
F5.0.01 Range of hopping frequency 1 0.0~10.00Hz 0.0 0.01 ×
F5.0.02 Hopping frequency 2 0.0~[F0.1.21] 0.0 0.01 ×
F5.0.04 Hopping frequency3 0.0~[F0.1.21] 0.0 0.01 ×
6.22 Built-in auxiliary timer

Timer 1 (UT1) The unit: Clock selection

F5.1.06
operating mode (H) 0: 1ms
1: 1Sec.
2: 1min.
3: Timer 1 cycle reaching pulse
Timer 2 (UT2) (effective for UT2, UT3)
F5.1.07
operating mode (H) 4: Timer 2 cycle reach pulse (only
effective for UT3)
Tens: Start and stop
0: Multifunctional terminal triggering
start(Edge triggering function No.
52~54)
1: Stop-->Run status change
triggering (edge triggering)
2: Run-->Stop status change
3: Synchronously started with timer
1 (effective for UT2, UT3) 0000 1 ×
4: Timer 1 cycle reach pulse
(effective for UT2, UT3)
5: Timer 2 cycle reach pulse
Timer 3 (UT3) (effective for UT3)
F5.1.08
operating mode (H) Hundreds: Timer status resetting
(timer value and status )
0: Multifunctional terminal (Function
No. 55~57)
1: Automatic resetting when the
cycle is reached
2: Automatic resetting when timer is
stopped
Kilobit: Timing cycle
0: Single-cycle timing (resetting and
re-triggering required)
1: Multi-cycle timing (start again
after auto clearing)
F5.1.09 Timer 1 timing cycle 0~65535 (clock cycle) 30000 1


Timer 1
F5.1.10 comparative 0~[F5.1.09] 10000 1
threshold value
Timer 2 timing
F5.1.11 0~65535 (clock cycle) 30000 1
cycle
Timer 2
F5.1.12 comparative 0~[F5.1.11] 10000 1
threshold value
Timer 3 timing
F5.1.13 0~65535 (clock cycle) 30000 1
cycle
Timer 3
F5.1.14 comparative 0~[F5.1.13] 10000 1
threshold value
The unit: Timer 1 (UT1) gated

signal
0: No gating function
1: Multifunctional terminal (Function
No. 58)
2: timer 1 comparative value
reached (effective for UT2, UT3)
3: Timer 1 cycle reached (effective
Timer door control for UT2, UT3)
F5.1.15 signal selection 4: Timer 2 comparative value 0000 1
(H) reached (effective for UT3)
5: Timer 2 cycle reached (effective
for UT3 )
Tens: Timer 2 (UT2) gated signal
selection
The same as above
Hundreds: Timer 3 (UT3) gated
signal selection
The same as above
Timer 1 output The unit: output signal1
F5.1.16 0041 1
signal (H) 0: Comparative value reached (0.5s
Timer 2 output pulse)
F5.1.17 0041 1
signal (H) 1: Comparative value reached
(level)
2: Comparative value reached and
reversed
3: Cycle reached (0.5s pulse)
4: Cycle reached (level)
Timer 3 output 5: Cycle reached and reversed
F5.1.18 0041 1
signal (H) 6: Comparative value or cycle
reached and reversed
Tens: Output signal 2
The same as above
Hundreds: Reserved


The unit: timer 1
0: Clock unit (original value)
1: Sec. 2: Min. 3: H.
Timer value
F5.1.19 Tens: timer 2 0000 1
display unit (H)
The same as above
Hundreds: timer 3
The same as above
6.23 Built-in auxiliary counter

Counter 1 The unit: Counter pulse
F5.2.20 0000 1
operating mode (H) selection (Function No. 44, 45)
0: Multifunctional terminal
"voidÆeffective"
"effectiveÆvoid"
2: Aforesaid two conditions are
both effective
Tens: Starting mode
0: Start immediately after power-on
(no trigger start)
1: Multifunctional terminal trigger
(Function No. 46, 47)
2: Stop-->Run status change
Counter 2
F5.2.21 triggering (edge triggering) 0000 1
operating mode (H)
3: Run-->Stop Status change
4: Running status (gated triggering)
5: Stop status (gated triggering)
Hundreds: Counter resetting
source
(Function No.48, 49)
1: Set value 1 reaches auto
resetting
2: Set value 2 reaches auto
resetting
Set value 1 of
F5.2.22 0~65535 1000 1
counter 1
Set value 2 of
F5.2.23 0~65535 2000 1
counter 1
Set value 1 of
F5.2.24 0~65535 1000 1
counter 2
Set value 2 of
F5.2.25 0~65535 2000 1
counter 2


Counter 1 output The unit: output signal1
F5.2.26 0000 1
signal (H) 0: Reach set value 1
(0.5Sec.pulse)
1: Reach set value 1 (level)
2: Set value 1 reached and
reversed
3: Reach set value 2
(0.5Sec.pulse)
4: Reach set value 2 (level)
Counter 2 output 5: Set value 2 reached and
F5.2.27 0000 1
signal (H) reversed
6: Set value 1 or set value 2
reached and reversed
Tens: output signal 2
The same as above
Hundreds: Reserved
Kilobit: Reserved
6.24 Auxiliary functions

The unit: 1st priority (highest)

0: No definition
2: Reserved
3: Swing frequency running
command
4: Automatic multi-stage
frequency running command
5: Multi-stage operating
Priority selection of frequency selected by external
F5.3.28 frequency (revolution) terminals 0000 1 ×
command source (H) 6: Revolution setting channel
(F8.0.00)
7: Frequency setting channel
(F0.2.25)
Tens: 2nd priority
The same as above
Hundreds: 3rd priority
The same as above
Kilobit: 4th priority
The same as above
0: Output 0 frequency when it is
below the lower limiting
Lower limiting
frequency
F5.3.29 frequency action 0 1
1: Output the lower limiting
mode
frequency when it is below the
lower limiting frequency


Automatic voltage 0: Closed
F5.3.30 regulation (effective in 1: Effective 0 1
VVV control mode) 2: Deceleration process void
Automatic
energy-saving
0: Void
F5.3.31 operation (effective 0 1
1: Effective
for asynchronous
motors)
0: Void
1: Effective
F5.3.32 Magnetic flux brake 0 1
effective (Function No. 65)
Magnetic flux braking
F5.3.33 strength (brake 0~100% ☆ 1
exciting current)
Voltage
F5.3.34 0: Void 1: Effective 1 1
overmodulation
Use ratio of dynamic
F5.3.35 braking (for some 50~100(%) 100 1
models)
Level of dynamic
F5.3.36 650~760V 690 1
braking starting action
Vibration suppression
coefficient (only
F5.3.37 0.0, 0.01~10.00 0.0 0.01
effective in VF control
mode)
0: Void
Load dynamic 1: Effective
F5.3.38 0 1
balance 2: Multifunctional terminal
0: Digital setting (F5.3.40)
1: AI1 input
Reference source for
F5.3.39 2: AI2 input 0 1
dynamic balance load
3: AI3 input
4: Fieldbus set value 1
Reference value for
F5.3.40 0.0~ 200.0 (%) 100.0 0.1
dynamic balance load
Dynamic balance
F5.3.41 0.0~100.00 50.00 0.01
adjustment gain
Dynamic balance
F5.3.42 0.0~100.00 (%) 1.00 0.01
adjustment limit
F5.4.43
~ Reserved
F5.4.47

6.25 Multi-stage frequency setting

1st operating
F6.0.00 [F0.1.22]~[F0.1.21] 5.00 0.01
frequency
nd
2 operating
F6.0.01 [F0.1.22]~[F0.1.21] 10.00 0.01
frequency
3rd operating
F6.0.02 [F0.1.22]~[F0.1.21] 15.00 0.01
frequency
4th operating
F6.0.03 [F0.1.22]~[F0.1.21] 20.00 0.01
frequency
th
5 operating
F6.0.04 [F0.1.22]~[F0.1.21] 25.00 0.01
frequency
th
6 operating
F6.0.05 [F0.1.22]~[F0.1.21] 30.00 0.01
frequency
th
7 operating
F6.0.06 [F0.1.22]~[F0.1.21] 35.00 0.01
frequency
8th operating
F6.0.07 [F0.1.22]~[F0.1.21] 40.00 0.01
frequency
th
9 operating
F6.0.08 [F0.1.22]~[F0.1.21] 45.00 0.01
frequency
th
10 operating
F6.0.09 [F0.1.22]~[F0.1.21] 50.00 0.01
frequency
th
11 operating
F6.0.10 [F0.1.22]~[F0.1.21] 25.00 0.01
frequency
12th operating
F6.0.11 [F0.1.22]~[F0.1.21] 5.00 0.01
frequency
13th operating
F6.0.12 [F0.1.22]~[F0.1.21] 15.00 0.01
frequency
th
14 operating
F6.0.13 [F0.1.22]~[F0.1.21] 35.00 0.01
frequency
th
15 operating
F6.0.14 [F0.1.22]~[F0.1.21] 50.00 0.01
frequency

6.26 Simple programmable multi-stage operation

The unit: Function selection

0: Function closed
1: Multi-stage frequency/revolution
operation effective
2: Multi-stage frequency/revolution
operation condition effective (Function
No. 23)
3: Multi-stage PID setting operation
effective
4: Multi-stage PID setting operation
condition effective (Function No. 23)
Tens: Operation mode
Selection of 0: Single cycle
programmable 1: Single cycle stop mode
F6.1.15 multi-stage 2: Continuous cycle 0000 1 ×
speed operation 3: Continuous cycle stop mode
mode (H) 4: Keeping the final value
5: Keeping the final value stop mode
Hundreds: Selection of
breakpoint/stop recovery mode
0: Restore running at the first stage
1: Start running at the interruption time
(effective for multi-stage
frequency/revolution operation)
2: Start running at the stage of
interruption
Kilobit: Power-off status storage
0: Not stored
1: Stored


F6.1.16 Stage 1 setting (H) The unit: Operating frequency 0000 1
source/setting source at each stage
0: multi-stage frequency setting
F6.1.17 Stage 2 setting (H) 1~15/Process PID multi-stage setting 0000 1
1~7
1: Frequency command
(F0.1.16)/Process PID setting
F6.1.18 Stage 3 setting (H) (F7.0.01) 0000 1
F6.1.19 Stage 4 setting (H) 0000 1
Tens: Setting direction of each
F6.1.20 Stage 5 setting (H) stage 0000 1
F6.1.21 Stage 6 setting (H) 0: FWD 0000 1
F6.1.22 Stage 7 setting (H) 1: REV 0000 1
F6.1.23 Stage 8 setting (H) 2: Determined by the running 0000 1
command channel
F6.1.25 Stage 10 setting (H) Hundreds: Selection of acceleration 0000 1
and deceleration time at each stage
0: Acceleration and deceleration time 1
1: Acceleration and deceleration time 2
F6.1.28 Stage 13 setting (H) 2: Acceleration and deceleration time 3 0000 1
F6.1.29 Stage 14 setting (H) 3: Acceleration and deceleration time 4 0000 1
Kilobit: Running time unit of each
stage
0: Sec.
1: Min.
F6.1.31 Stage 1 running time 0.0~6500.0(Sec./Min.) 0.0 0.1

6.27 Swing frequency operation

The unit: Function Setting

0: Function closed
1: Function effective
2: Terminal selectivity effective
(Function No. 24)
Tens: Stop restart mode
0: Start with the memory status
before stop
1: Restart
Function Hundreds: Swing control
F6.2.46 0000 1 ×
selection (H) 0: Fixed swing (relative
maximum frequency)
1: Variable swing (relative central
frequency)
Kilobit: Status storage
0: Not saved after power-off, and
run again after restart
1: Save the status after
power-off, and run again from
the saved status.
Swing frequency
F6.2.47 0.0~[F0.1.21] 10.00 0.01
preset frequency
Preset frequency
F6.2.48 0.0~6000.0Sec. 0.0 0.1
waiting time
Swing frequency
F6.2.49 0.0~50.0(%) 10.0 0.1
amplitude
Sudden jump
F6.2.50 0.0~50.0(%) 10.0 0.1
frequency
Triangular wave
F6.2.51 0.1~1000.0Sec. 10.0 0.1
rising time
Triangular wave
F6.2.52 0.1~1000.0Sec. 10.0 0.1
decreasing time
Frequency setting
F6.2.53 in the center of the 0.0~[F0.1.21] 10.00 0.01
swing frequency

6.28 Process PID (4ms control cycle)

The unit: Process PID controller

selection
0: Process PID closed
1: Unconditionally effective
2: External multifunctional terminal
Process PID selectivity effective (Function No. 22)
F7.0.00 0000 1 ×
function selection Tens: Reserved
Hundreds: Process PID controller
output
0: Frequency /revolution set value
1: Independent PID (can be set by AO
terminal output or as torque)
0: Setting channel 1 independently
effective
1: Setting channel 2 independently
effective
2: Multifunctional terminal selection
(Function No. 31)
3: Setting channel 1+Setting channel
Process PID set
F7.0.01 2 0 1
value selection
4: Setting channel 1-Setting channel 2
5: Setting channel 1* (1+Setting
channel 2/100.0)
6: Setting channel 1* (1-Setting
channel 2/100.0)
7: Setting channel 1*Setting channel
2/100.0
Process PID setting 0: Internal digital setting (F7.0.08)
F7.0.02 0 1 ×
channel 1 (power-off auto save)
1: Panel shuttle potentiometer preset
2: Analog input AI1
3: Analog input AI2
4: Analog input AI3
5: UP/DW terminal single polarity
adjustment (clear after stop)
6: UP/DW terminal single polarity
adjustment (maintained after stop and
Process PID saved after power-off)
F7.0.03 0 1 ×
setting channel 2 7: Analog input AI3 dual polarity
setting
8: UP/DW terminal dual polarity
adjustment (clear after stop)
9: UP/DW terminal dual polarity
adjustment (maintained after stop and
saved after power-off)
10: MODBUS Fieldbus set value 1
F7.0.04 Analog input quantity 0.0V~ [ F7.0.05 ]/ 0.0 0.01


corresponding to 0% AI2: 0.0mA ~[F7.0.05]
setting (Channel 1)
Analog input quantity
corresponding to [F7.0.04]~10.00 /AI2:
F7.0.05 10.00 0.01
100% setting (Channel [F7.0.04]~20.00mA
1)
0.0V~[ F7.0.07 ]/AI2: 0.0mA
F7.0.06 corresponding to 0% 0.0 0.01
~[F7.0.07]
setting (Channel 2)
corresponding to [F7.0.06]~10.00 /AI2:
F7.0.07 10.00 0.01
100% setting (Channel [F7.0.06]~20.00mA
2)
Process PID internal
F7.0.08 -100.0~100.0 (%) 0.0 0.1
digital preset
0: Feedback channel 1 independently
effective
1: Feedback channel 2 independently
effective
2: Multifunctional terminal selection
(Function No. 32)
3: Feedback channel 1+ feedback
channel 2
4: Feedback channel 1- feedback
channel 2
Process PID
5: Feedback channel 1* feedback
F7.0.09 feedback value 0 1
channel 2/100.0
selection
6: 100.0* feedback channel 1/
feedback channel 2
7: Min.{ feedback channel 1, feedback
channel 2}
8: Max{ feedback channel 1, feedback
channel 2}
9: sqrt (| feedback channel 1-
feedback channel 2|)
10: sqrt (| feedback channel 1|)+sqrt (|
feedback channel 2|)
Process PID 0: Analog input AI1
F7.0.10 0 1
feedback channel 1 1: Analog input AI2
2: Analog input AI3
Process PID feedback 3: Analog input AI3 dual polarity PID
F7.0.11 0 1
channel 2 feedback
4: Fin pulse input
Analog feedback
quantity corresponding
F7.0.12 0.0~[F7.0.13]/AI2: 0.0mA~[F7.0.13] 0.0 0.01
to 0% feedback
(feedback channel 1)
Analog feedback
quantity corresponding [F7.0.12]~10.00V /AI2:
F7.0.13 5.00 0.01
to 100% feedback [F7.0.12]~20.00mA


Analog feedback
quantity corresponding
F7.0.14 0.0~[F7.0.15]/AI2: 0.0mA~[F7.0.15] 0.0 0.01
to 0% feedback
Analog feedback
quantity corresponding [F7.0.14]~10.00V/AI2:
F7.0.15 5.00 0.01
to 100% feedback [F7.0.14]~20.00mA
Feedback
multiplication
F7.0.16 factor(e.g. calculate 0.01~100.00 1.00 0.01
flow rate with
differential voltage)
F7.0.17 Proportional gain 0.0~100.00 2.00 0.01
F7.0.18 Integration time 0.0, 0.1~1000.0Sec. 20.0 0.1
F7.0.19 Differential coefficient 0.0, 0.01~10.00 0.0 0.01
Differential inertia
F7.0.20 0.01~100.00Sec. 10.00 0.01
filtering time
The unit: deviation polarity

0: Positive deviation
1: Negative deviation (negation)
Tens: output polarity
0: Single polarity
PID controller 1: Dual polarity (the symbol can be
F7.0.21 characteristics reversed) 0000 1
configuration (H) Hundreds: Action selection after
the controller conditions is
canceled.
0: PID control closed (automatically
switch to next level of priority setting)
1: PID output held up and current
setting status is maintained.
Permitted static
F7.0.22 deviation (relative 0.0~20.0% 5.0 0.1
100% setting)
PID output preset (at
the time of output
F7.0.23 frequency as 0.0~100.0 (%) 0.0 0.01
compared to the upper
limiting frequency)
Preset hold time
F7.0.24 0.0~3600.0Sec. 0.0 0.1
before PID starting
Actual sensor value
F7.0.25 (range) corresponding 0.01~100.00 1.00 0.01
to 100% feedback
Actual sensor value
F7.0.26 corresponding to 0% -100.00~100.00 0.0 0.01
feedback

6.29 Process PID multi-stage setting

Name
F7.1.27 Process PID multi-stage preset 1 -100.0~100.0 (%) 0.0 0.1
6.30 Process PID sleep function (Effective when PID output is used as the
frequency command)
0: Closed 1: Activated
2: Activated when the
F7.2.34 Sleep function 0 1
multifunctional input selection is
valid (Function No. 33)
F7.2.35 Sleep frequency 0.0~[F0.1.21] 0.0 0.01
F7.2.36 Sleep delay 0.1~3600.0Sec. 60.0 0.1
Awakening deviation
F7.2.37 (compared with the 0.0~100.0 (%) 25.0 0.1
100% set value )
F7.2.38 Awakening delay 0.1~3600.0Sec. 60.0 0.1

6.31 Revolution setting and feedback

0: Set by frequency setting
parameter (F0.2.25)
(maintained after stop and saved
after power-off)
2: Panel shuttle potentiometer
Revolution setting
setting
channel (only
F8.0.00 3: Analog input AI1 0 1
applicable to VC and
4: Analog input AI2
SVC mode)
5: Analog input AI3 (dual polarity)
6: Frequency signal input (Fin)
Minimum set signal
0~60*[F0.1.21]/ pairs of motor
F8.0.01 corresponding 0 1
poles (rpm)
revolution
Maximum set signal
corresponding 0~60*[F0.1.21]/ pairs of motor
F8.0.02 1500 1
revolution (limited poles (rpm)
upper limit frequency)
Revolution Digital
0~60*[F0.1.21]/ pairs of motor
F8.0.03 setting (limited upper 0 1
poles (rpm)
limit frequency)
0: Decoder (PG card needs to be
equipped)
Revolution feedback 1: Single pulse input (Fin port)
F8.0.04 0 1 ×
channel 2: Analog input AI1
3: Analog input AI2
4: Analog input AI3 (dual polarity)
Pulse of decoder per
F8.0.05 1~8192 1024 1 ×
revolution (PG)
PG rotation direction 0: Phase A is leading
F8.0.06 0 1 ×
(Effective for PG card) 1: Phase B is leading
PG zero pulse (Z 0: Void
F8.0.07 0 1 ×
pulse) 1: Effective
0: ABZ incremental decoder
1: ABZUVW incremental type
F8.0.08 Decoder type 0 1 ×
2: SINCOS
3: Rotary transformer
The Unit: PG revolution check

cycle 1~5ms
PG revolution Tens: Reserve
F8.0.09 0402 1
check/control cycle
Hundreds: Revolution
closed-loop control cycle
(*0.25ms) 1~8


The unit: Detection of speed

measuring signal detection
0: Not detect
Missing detection
1: Detect and treat
F8.0.10 and action of speed 0001 1 ×
detection signal Tens: Act after missing of the
speed detection signal
0: Fault alarm and free stop
1: Reserved
Judging time for
F8.0.11 speed detection signal 0.01~5.00Sec. 2.00 0.01
missing
Wire breakage zero
speed signal level (as
F8.0.12 0~20.0 (%) 0.0 0.1
compared to the
maximum set speed)
Speed measuring loop
wire breakage
F8.0.13 detection flexibility (as 0.1~100.0 5.0 0.1
compared to the
maximum set speed)
Detection revolution
F8.0.14 filtering time 0 (closed) , 1~50ms 1 1
coefficient
The minimum
revolution correspond-
F8.0.15 0~30000rpm 0 1
ing to the feedback
signal (not PG)
The maximum
revolution correspond-
F8.0.16 0~30000rpm 1500 1
ing to the feedback
signal (not PG)
F8.0.17 —— —— —— ——

6.32 Revolution closed-loop parameters

Name
0: Single PID parameter
(the second group of
parameters are effective
Controller parameter separately)
F8.1.18 2 1
selection 1: Dual PID parameter
(hysteresis switching)
2: Dual PID parameter
(continuous switching)
PID parameter switching
lower limiting revolution
F8.1.19 0~[F8.1.20] 100 1
(ASR1 group parameter low
revolution effective)
PID parameter switching
upper limiting revolution [F8.1.19]~60*[F0.1.21]/pa
F8.1.20 300 1
(ASR2 group parameter irs of motor poles (rpm)
high revolution effective)
Proportional gain 1
F8.1.21 0.50~1.20 1.00 0.01
(ASR-P1)
F8.1.22 Integration time 1 (ASR-I1) 0.0, 0.01~50.00 Sec. 1.50 0.01
Differential coefficient 1
F8.1.23 0.0, 0.01~10.00 0.0 0.01
(ASR-D1)
Differential output filtering
F8.1.24 0.10~5.00 Sec. 1.00 0.01
constant 1 (ASR-DT1)
Proportional gain 2
F8.1.25 0.50~1.20 0.80 0.01
(ASR-P2)
F8.1.26 Integration time 2 (ASR-I2) 0.0, 0.01~50.00 Sec. 5.00 0.01
Differential coefficient 2
F8.1.27 0.0, 0.01~10.00 0.0 0.01
(ASR-D2)
Differential output filtering
F8.1.28 0.10~10.00 Sec. 1.00 0.01
Adjustor output upper limit
F8.1.29 amplitude (limited by 0.0~250.0 (%) 180.0 0.1
transient positive torque)
Adjuster output lower limit
F8.1.30 amplitude (limited by -250.0~0.0 (%) -180.0 0.1
transient negative torque)
Adjustor output filter time
F8.1.31 0.0, 0.1 ~ 50.0mS 0.0 0.1
coefficient

6.33 Protection parameter

Name
Excessive action of revolution 0: No action
F8.2.32 0 1 ×
deviation (DEV) 1: Alarm free stop
2: Alarm deceleration stop
Over speed (OS) detection 3: Alarm continuing
F8.2.33 1 1 ×
action running
0.0~50.0% (as compared
Detected value of excessive
F8.2.34 to upper limiting 20.0% 0.1
revolution deviation (DEV)
frequency)
Detection time of excessive
F8.2.35 0.0~10.00Sec. 10.00 0.01
0.0~150.0% (as compared
Detected value of over
F8.2.36 to upper limiting 120.0% 0.1
speed (OS)
frequency)
Detection time of over speed
F8.2.37 0.0~2.00Sec. 0.10 0.01
(OS)
SVC revolution estimated
F8.2.38 0.10 ~ 10.00 1.00 0.01
gain coefficient
6.34 Torque control

Selection of torque
F8.3.39 2: Multifunctional terminal selection 0 1 ×
control mode
1: Panel shuttle potentiometer
setting
2: Analog input AI1
3: Analog input AI2
Selection of torque 4: Analog input AI3
command channel 5: Analog input AI3 (dual polarity)
F8.3.40 0 1
(selecting the 6: Frequency signal input (Fin)
command direction) 7: Process PID output
8: Reserved (0 by default)
F8.3.41 Torque digital setting -250.0~250.0 (%) 0.0 0.1
Torque value rising time
F8.3.42 0.0~50.000Sec. 0.01 0
(relative to rated torque)
Torque value decreasing
F8.3.43 time (relative to rated 0.0~50.000Sec. 0.01 0
torque)


The unit: FWD revolution

(frequency) limiting setting
source
0: Setting of FWD revolution
limiting value (F8.3.45)
1: Determination of frequency
Revolution limiting Setting channel 1 (F0.2.25)
F8.3.44 0000 1
setting (H) Tens: Reserved
Hundreds: REV revolution
(frequency) limiting setting
source
0: Setting of REV revolution
limiting value (F8.3.46)
1: Reserved
FWD revolution limiting 0~60*[F0.1.21]/pairs of motor
F8.3.45 1500 1
value poles (rpm)
REV revolution limiting 0~60*[F0.1.21]/pairs of motor
F8.3.46 1500 1
value poles (rpm)
The unit: Minimum torque

selection source (negative
torque limit)
0: Minimum torque set value 1
(F8.3.48)
1: Minimum torque set value 2
(F8.3.49)
2: Multifunctional selection terminal
setting 1 or 2
3: AI1 set value
4: AI2 set value
Setting of torque set 6: MODBUS Fieldbus set value 2
F8.3.47 1
value limit (H) Tens: Reserved
Hundreds: Maximum torque
selection source
0: Maximum torque set value 1
(F8.3.50)
1: Maximum torque set value 2
(F8.3.51)
2: Multifunctional selection terminal
setting 1 or 2
3: AI1 set value
4: AI2 set value
F8.3.48 Minimum torque limit 1 -250.0~0.0 (%) -200.0 0.1
F8.3.49 Minimum torque limit 2 -250.0~0.0 (%) -200.0 0.1
F8.3.50 Maximum torque limit 1 0.0~250.0 (%) 200.0 0.1
F8.3.51 Maximum torque limit 2 0.0~250.0 (%) 200.0 0.1
F8.3.52 Torque zero offset -25.0 ~ 25.0 (%) 0.0 0.1

6.35 MODBUS fieldbus (Standard expansion card configuration)

0: The communication card not
connected
Communication
1: Standard MODBUS
FA.0.00 card connection — 1 R
communication card connected
and bus status
2: listen only status
3: Communication interrupted
The unit: Baud rate selection

0: 1200 kbit/s 1: 2400 kbit/s
2: 4800 kbit/s 3: 9600 kbit/s
Configuration 4: 19200 kbit/s 5: 38400 kbit/s
FA.0.01 0003 1 ×
parameter 6: 76800 kbit/s
Tens: Data format
0: 1-8-1-N, RTU 1: 1-8-1-E, RTU
2: 1-8-1-O, RTU 3: 1-8-2-N, RTU
Local device station 0~247(0 stands for broadcasting
FA.0.02 1 1 ×
address address)
Local device
FA.0.03 0~1000ms 5ms 1
response delay
Communication
FA.0.04 0.01~10.00Sec. 1.00 0.01 ×
failure judging time
Communication
FA.0.05 1: Run as per last received 0 1
failure action
command
6.36 Mapping access parameter

Name
FA.1.08 Mapping application parameter 1 (H) F0.00 ~ FF.55 F0.29 1
FA.1.14 Mapping status parameter 1 (H) d0.00 ~ d1.49 d0.00 1
FA.1.18 Mapping status parameter 5 (H) d0.00 ~ d1.49 d0.04 1 ×

6.37 Communication linkage synchronous control

The unit: Selection of linkage

function
0: Void
1: The device is the salve device
2: The device is the master
device
Tens: Linkage target value
0: Proportional linkage of
frequency /revolution set value
1: Proportional linkage of
frequency /revolution integrator
output value
Hundreds: linkage command
Linkage synchronous (slave device parameter)
FA.2.25 0: Independent control of slave 0310 1 ×
control options (H)
device (start and stop not linked)
1: Start and stop command
linked
2: Start-stop/jog linked
3: Start-stop/jog/excitation linked
4: Start-stop/jog/excitation /DC
bind-type brake/DC braking
linked
Kilobit: Linkage setting
selection
0: The unit option of the
parameter is effective
1: External terminal switching
(Function No. 39)
Correction coefficient
of communication
FA.2.26 0.010~10.000 1.000 0.001
setting for this
device.
0: No fine adjustment
Fine adjustment
1: Analog input AI1
FA.2.27 source for linkage 0 1
2: Analog input AI2
proportion coefficient
3: Analog input AI3
0: No offset
1: Determined by frequency
Slave device offset
FA.2.28 setting source 1 0 1
frequency/Revolution
2: Determined by frequency
setting source 2
0: Void
Linkage balancing 1: Current balancing
FA.2.29 0 1
function 2: Torque balancing
3: Power balancing
Linkage balancing
FA.2.30 0.001~10.000 1.000 0.001
gain

6.38 Expansion multifunctional input terminal

Expand
multifunctional input
Fb.0.00 terminal EDI1~ED8
~ (effective when 0~96 0 1 ×
Fb.0.07 expansion
components are
inserted)
Fb.0.08 Multifunctional
1ms~50ms 5 1
Terminals Filter time
The unit: EDI1~EDI4 terminal

0~F: 4-bit binary system, bit=0
Effective level of power-on effective, 1
expansion Disconnection effective
Fb.0.09 0000 1 ×
multifunctional input Tens: EDI5~EDI8 terminal
terminal (H) The same as above
Hundreds: Reserved
Kilobit: Reserved
6.39 Expansion multifunctional output terminal

Name
Expand multifunctional input
Fb.1.10 terminal EDO1~EDO8
~ (effective when 0~62 0 1
Fb.1.17 corresponding expansion I/O
components are connected)
6.40 Zero-speed torque and position control

Name
Fb.2.18 Automatic shift frequency 0.0 ~ 5.00Hz 1.00 0.01
Automatic shift switching
Fb.2.19 0.10 ~ 2.00Sec. 0.30 0.01
cycle
0: Void
Zero frequency torque 1: Bind-type brake torque
Fb.2.20 holdup (DC bind-type brake effective 0 1 ×
preferred) 2: Position locking (PG
feedback VC mode)
Fb.2.21 Position locking gain 0.01 ~ 10.00 1.00 0.01
PG speed shaft propulsion
Fb.2.22 0.001 ~ 50.000mm 0.500 0.001
distance per revolution

6.41 Virtual input and output

Name
The unit: FF parameter group

modification forbidden
0: Forbidden (effective for no
display)
FF configuration 1: Permitted
FF.0.00 parameter locking Tens: Reserved 0000 1
function (H) Hundreds: Reserved
Kilobit: Initialization of FF
parameter group
0: Forbidden
1: Permitted
Definition of virtual 0~71(No. 63’s function is not
FF.0.01 0 1
output node (SDO1) valid)
FF.0.02 0 1
FF.0.03 0 1
FF.0.04 0 1
FF.0.05 0 1
FF.0.06 0 1
FF.0.07 0 1
FF.0.08 0 1
Definition of virtual
FF.0.09 0~96 0 1 ×
input function (SDI1)
FF.0.10 0~96 0 1 ×
FF.0.11 0~96 0 1 ×
FF.0.12 0~96 0 1 ×
FF.0.13 0~96 0 1 ×
FF.0.14 0~96 0 1 ×
FF.0.15 0~96 0 1 ×
FF.0.16 0~96 0 1 ×
Virtual output- input The unit: SDO1-SDI1

FF.0.17 0000 1 ×
connection polarity


Name
(H) 0: Homopolar connection
1: Antipolar connection
Tens: SDO2-SDI2
0: Homopolar connection
Hundreds: SDO3-SDI3
Kilobit: SDO4-SDI4
The unit: SDO5-SDI5

Tens: SDO6-SDI6
Virtual output- input
FF.0.18 connection polarity 0000 1 ×
(H) Hundreds: SDO7-SDI7
Kilobit: SDO8-SDI8
6.42 Protection function configuration parameters

Name
The unit: Operation

undervoltage protection
0: No action 1: Act
Tens: Output grounding
protection
0: No action 1: Act
Hundreds: Output voltage
phase shortage protection
Protection action (Void for single camera)
FF.1.19 1001 1
configuration 1 (H) 0: No action
1: Trip and stop
2: Nonstop alarm
Kilobit: Output current phase
shortage or unbalancing
protection
0: No action
1: Trip and stop
2: Nonstop alarm
FF.1.20 Protection action The unit: Temperature sensor 1111 1


Name
configuration 2 (H) fault
0: No action
1: Trip and stop
2: Nonstop alarm
Tens: Inverter overheat alarm
0: Closed 1: Act
Hundreds: Input voltage
unbalancing protection (Void
for single camera)
0: No action
1: Trip and stop
2: Nonstop alarm
Kilobit: Motor
overtemperature protection
0: No action
1: Trip and stop
2: Nonstop alarm
The unit: Relay action fault

protection
0: No action 1: Act
Tens: Internal data memory
Protection action abnormity protection
FF.1.21 0110 1
configuration 3 (H) 0: No action 1: Act
Hundreds: Inverter
undervoltage operation alarm
0: Closed 1: Act
Kilobit: Reserved
The unit: Drive protection

action
0: Closed 1: Act
Protection action Tens: Reserved
FF.1.22 0100 1
configuration 4 (H)
Hundreds: A and B pulse
reverse connection
protection of PG card
0: Closed 1: Act
The Unit: Alarm information

shielding
Protection action 0: Closed
FF.1.23 0 1
configuration 5 (H) 1: Act (alarm information not
displayed)
Tens: Reserve
FF.1.24 —— ——

6.43 Correction parameter

Name
FF.2.25 AI1 zero offset adjustment -0.500~0.500V 0.0 0.001
FF.2.26 AI1 gain correction 0.950~1.050 1.000 0.001
4mA offset adjustement for
FF.2.27 -0.500~0.500mA 0.0 0.001
AI2
FF.2.29 AI3 zero offset adjustment -0.500~0.500V 0.0 0.001
FF.2.31 AO1 zero offset correction -0.500~0.500V 0.0 0.001
FF.2.32 AO1 gain correction 0.950~1.050 1.000 0.001
FF.2.33 AO2 zero offset correction -0.500~0.500V 0.0 0.001
FF.2.34 AO2 gain correction 0.950~1.050 1.000 0.001
FF.2.35 Undervoltage action level 320~450V 320 1 ×
Correction coefficient of DC
FF.2.36 0.950~1.050 1.000 0.001
side voltage detection value
6.44 Special functional parameters

Name
The unit: Constant torque

area torque limitation
0: Only limited by torque
limiting parameter (including
Revolution PID output limit)
1: Also limited by
acceleration and
deceleration current level
Setting of torque ultimate and maximum permitted
FF.3.37 current. 0101 1
limiting mode (H)
Tens: Reserved
Hundreds: Constant power
area torque limitation
0: Treated the same as the
constant torque area
1: Simultaneously adjusted
as per constant power
algorithm
Current closed-loop
FF.3.38 0.10 ~ 10.00 1.00 0.01
proportional gain
Current closed-loop
FF.3.39 0.10 ~ 10.00 (Sec.) 1.00 0.01
integration time constant
Total leakage inductance
FF.3.40 0.10 ~ 10.00 1.00 0.01
compensation coefficient

6.45 Other configuration parameters

The unit: Soft start function (effective
for model 4T0370 and below)
0: No action 1: Act
Tens: Air volume auto adjustment
Cooling fan (effective for model 4T0370 and below)
FF.4.41 0101 1
control (H) 0: No action 1: Act
Hundreds: Start time
1: Start after running
Kilobit: Reserved
The unit: Panel REV/JOG key function

selection
0: REV (REV running key)
1: JOG (FWD jog key)
Tens: Reserved
Hundreds: Reserved
Operating Kilobit: Panel control selection (except
FF.4.42 panel control STOP key) 0000 1 ×
options 0: Standard panel interface control (can
be connected to monitoring panel via
RS485)
1: RS485 port external panel
control(standard panel, only for
monitoring)
2: Multifunctional terminal switching
(Function No. 40)
The unit: Motor parameter

identification auto-start
0: Forbidden 1: Permitted
Tens: Voltage vector composition
Special
mode
function
FF.4.43 0: Three-phase composition 0001 1
configuration
1: Two-phase composition
(H)
Hundreds: Voltage small pulse
shielding
Kilobit: Reserved
The unit: Stator resistance

Tens: Total leakage inductance
Asynchrono-
us motor
FF.4.44 parameter Hundreds: Rotor time constant 1011 1
adaptive 0: Void 1: Effective
correction LED Kilobit: Torque increasing
function
(gradually increasing)


Random
FF.4.45 reference 0~65535 1 R
value
FF.5.46
~ Reserved
FF.5.55
6.46 Historical fault recording

Name
dE.0.00 Last time fault recording - - - R/I
dE.0.01 Historical fault 1 - - - R/I
6.47 Operation status at the last fault

Name
Operating frequency
dE.0.08 (rotor synchronous -3000.0~300.00Hz 0 0.01 R/I
frequency)
dE.0.09 Output current 0.0~3000.0A 0 0.1 R/I
dE.0.10 Output voltage 0~1000V 0 1 R/I
Detection motor
revolution (when
dE.0.11 0~30000rpm 0 1 R/I
revolution sensor is
equipped)
dE.0.12 Voltage at the DC side 0~1000V 0 1 R/I
dE.0.13 Output torque -300.0~ 300.0% 0 0.1% R/I
dE.0.14 Target frequency 0.0~300.00Hz 0 0.01 R/I
Equipment maximum
dE.0.15 0.0~150.0 0 0.1℃ R/I
temperature
The unit:
0: Stop command
1: Running command
dE.0.16 Command status 0000 1 R/I
Tens: Reserved
Hundreds: Reserved
Kilobit: Reserved
The unit: Operation mode

dE.0.17 Inverter operation status 0: VF mode 0000 1 R/I
1: Open-loop vector speed
2: Closed-loop vector speed


Name
3: Open-loop torque control
4: Closed-loop torque control
Tens: Operation status
0: Stop
1: Start acceleration
2: Stop deceleration
3: Decreasing frequency and
deceleration
4: Steady operation
Hundreds: Electric/braking
status
0: Electric operation
1: Power generation
operation
Kilobit: Limit suppression
0: No action
1: Overcurrent suppression
action
2: Overvoltage suppressor
action
3: Undervoltage suppression
action
Accumulative startup
dE.0.18 running time at the last 0~65535 65535 1H R/I
fault
Startup running interval
dE.0.19 between the last two 0~65535 65535 1H R/I
faults
Synchronous output
dE.0.20 -300.00~300.00Hz 0 0.01 R/I
frequency
6.48 Basic status parameter

Function Value Range and Factory Minimum Change
Name
Output frequency and
d0.0.00 direction (rotor synchronous -300.0Hz ~ 300.00Hz 0.01Hz R
frequency)
Motor revolution and
d0.0.01 -30000~30000rpm 1rpm R
direction
d0.0.02 Output current 0.0~ 6000.0A 0.1A R
d0.0.03 Output torque -300.0~300.0% 0.1% R
d0.0.04 Output voltage 0~500V 1V R
d0.0.05 Output power -1000.0~1000.0KW 0.1KW R
Device body maximum
d0.0.06 0~150.0℃ 0.1℃ R
temperature
d0.0.07 Voltage at DC side 0~1000V 1V R
The unit: Operation
d0.0.08 Inverter running status mode 1 R
0: VF mode


Name
1: Open-loop vector speed
2: Closed-loop vector
speed
3: Open-loop torque
control
4: Closed-loop torque
control
5: V-F separated control
Tens: Operation status
0: Stop
1: Start acceleration
2: Stop deceleration
3: Decreasing frequency
and deceleration
4: Steady operation
Hundreds:
Electric/braking status
0: Electric operation
1: Power generation
operation
Kilobit: Limit
suppression
0: No action
1: Overcurrent
suppression action
2: Overvoltage suppressor
action
3: Undervoltage
suppression action
Frequency setting channel
d0.0.09 -300.00Hz ~ 300.00Hz 0.01Hz R
command value ( frequency)
Revolution Setting channel
d0.0.10 -30000~30000rpm 1rpm R
command value (Revolution )
Torque command value (set
d0.0.11 -300.0~300.0% 0.1% R
input)
Target operating frequency
d0.0.12 -300.0Hz ~ 300.00Hz 0.01Hz R
(integrator input)
Target running revolution
d0.0.13 -30000~30000rpm 1rpm
(integrator input)
d0.0.14 Speed adjuster deviation -3200~3200rpm 1rpm
d0.0.15 Speed adjuster output -300.0~300.0(%) 0.1%
d0.0.16 Process PID setting -100.0~100.0(%) 0.1%
d0.0.17 Process PID feedback -100.0~100.0(%) 0.1%
d0.0.18 Process PID deviation -100.0~100.0(%) 0.1%
d0.0.19 Process PID output -100.0~100.0(%) 0.1%
d0.0.20~
Reserve
d0.0.23
Accumulative running time
d0.0.24 0~65535h 1h
(H)


Name
Accumulative power-on time
d0.0.25 0~65535h 1h
(H)
Power-on (hh.mm.s) cycling
d0.0.26 00.00.0~23.59.9 1
timing
d0.0.27 Kilowatt-hour counter (low) 0~1000.0KWh 0.1KWh
d0.0.28 Kilowatt-hour counter (high) 0~60000KKWh 1KKWh
d0.0.29 Megawatt hour counter 0~60000MW 1MW
6.49 Auxiliary status parameter

Name
Frequency setting source 1 set
d0.1.30 0.0~300.00Hz - 0.01Hz R
value
Frequency setting source 2 set
d0.1.31 0.0~300.00Hz - 0.01Hz R
value
Frequency/revolution integrator
d0.1.32 -300.0~300.00Hz - 0.01Hz R
output
d0.1.33 Stator synchronous frequency -300.0Hz ~ 300.00Hz - 0.01Hz R
Actually measured revolution
d0.1.34 -30000~30000rpm - 1rpm R
value
Inverter overload integrator
d0.1.35 0~1020 _ 1 R
value
Process PID set variable
d0.1.36 0.01~60000 - 0.01 R
(physical quantity)
Process PID feedback
d0.1.37 0.01~60000 - 0.01 R
variable(physical quantity)
d0.1.38 Reserve - --
d0.1.39 Reserve - --
d0.1.40 Torque current -3000.0~3000.0A - 0.1A R
d0.1.41 Excitation current 0.0~3000.0A - 0.1A R
Device body temperature
d0.1.42 0~150.0℃ - 0.1℃ R
detection 1
d0.1.43 Reserve
d0.1.44 Reserve
d0.1.45 Reserve

6.50 MODBUS fieldbus status parameter (Standard expansion I/O board)

Name
d0.2.46 Bus communication set value 1 -10000~10000 1 R
d0.2.47 Bus communication set value 2 -30000~30000 1 R
d0.2.48 Bus command word 1 (HEX) 0~0FFFFH 1 R
Total quantity of bus
d0.2.52 0~65535 1 R
information
Number of bus CRC check
d0.2.53 0~65535 1 R
errors
Number of error data accepted
d0.2.54 0~65535 1 R
by bus
d0.2.55 Number of effective data of bus 0~65535 1 R
6.51 Terminal status and variable

Name
Segment identifier
d1.0.00 Terminal input (DI1~DI10) - - R
(see Figure 6-1)
d1.0.01 Terminal input (EDI1~EDI10) Segment identifier - - R
d1.0.02 Pulse input (Fin) 0.0~100.00KHz 0.01 R
d1.0.03 Analog input AI1 0.00~10.00V 0.01 R
d1.0.04 Analog input AI2 0.00~20.00mA 0.01 R
d1.0.05 Analog input AI3 -10.00~10.00V 0.01 R
Digital signal output
d1.0.06 Segment identifier - - R
(DO1~DO4、EDO1~ EDO6)
Relay contact output
d1.0.07 Segment identifier - - R
(RO1~RO4、ERO1~ERO6)
Frequency output Fout
d1.0.08 (indicating the duty ratio in the 0.0~100.0KHz 0.01 R
case of PWM signal output)
d1.0.09 Analog output AO1 0.00~10.00V 0.01 R
d1.0.10 Analog output AO2 0.00~10.00V 0.01 R
Figure 6-1 Terminal Effective Sketch
As shown in figure 6-1, DI2, DI3, DI7, DI9 terminal input is in effective status, and other
terminals are at void status.

6.52 Counter timer value

Name
d1.1.11 Counter 1 current value 0~65535 1 R
d1.1.12 Counter 2 current value 0~65535 1 R
d1.1.13 Timer 1 current value 0~65535 1 R
6.53 Positioning status parameter

Name
Spindle (PG installation shaft)
d1.2.16 0~359.9 0.1 R
position angle
Spindle (PG installation shaft )
d1.2.17 0~65536 1 R
travelling circle number
Accumulative number of position
d1.2.18 0~65535 1 R
pulse (low)
Accumulative number of position
d1.2.19 0~65535 1 R
pulse (middle)
d1.2.20 Progressive distance 0.0~5000.0mm 0.1 R
6.54 Equipment information

Function Minimum Factory Change
Name Value Range and Description
Code Unit Default limit
The unit: Reserved

Tens: Standard expansion board
0: Not connected
1: Connected
Hundreds: Functional expansion
Expansion module board 1
d1.4.40 connection 0: Not connected 1 — R
information 1~F: Connected (the value stands
for the type of expansion board)
Kilobit: Functional expansion
board 2
0: Not connected
1~F: Connected ( the value stands
for the type of expansion board)
Total quantity of
panel
d1.4.41 0~65535 1 — R
communication
information
Number of panel
communication CRC
d1.4.42 check errors + 0~65535 1 — R
number of errors
accepted
d1.4.43 Number of effective 0~65535 1 — R

Function Minimum Factory Change

Name Value Range and Description
Code Unit Default limit
data of panel
communication
d1.4.44 Reserve — --
d1.4.45 Equipment capacity 0.1~1000.0KW 0.1KW — R
Motherboard
d1.4.46 5100~5999 1 — R
program version (H)
d1.4.47 Reserve — --
Motherboard check
d1.4.48 2009~2100 1 — R
date (H)
Motherboard check
d1.4.49 0101~1231 1 — R
date (H)
Motherboard check
d1.4.50 0 ~ 50000 1 — R
serial number
Exhibit 1 Comparison table of multifunctional terminal (DI/EDI/SDI) functions

S/N Function S/N Function
0 No function 1 Multi-speed control 1
2 Multi-speed control 2 3 Multi-speed control 3
4 Multi-speed control 4 5 FWD jog
Forward (FWD) running command

6 REV jog 7
terminal
Reverse (REV)running command Acceleration and deceleration time

8 9
terminal selection 1
Acceleration and deceleration time

10 11 Running command switching
selection 2
12 Frequency command switching 13 Fault resetting input (RESET)
Frequency or Process PID set

14 Emergency stop (EMS) 15
value ascending (UP)
Frequency or Process PID set value

16 17 UP/DW set frequency clear
descending (DW)
18 External equipment fault 19 Three-line running control

20 Stop DC braking command 21
forbidden
Simple PLC multi-stage running

22 Process PID effective 23
effective
24 Swing frequency running effective 25 Reserve
Simple PLC multi-stage running Swing frequency status resetting

26 27
status (when stopping ) resetting (effective when stopping)
Multi-stage process PID giving Multi-stage Process PID giving

28 29
terminal 1 terminal 2
30 Multi-stage process PID giving 31 Process PID setting selection

terminal 3 (switching)
Process PID feedback selection

32 33 Process PID sleep activation
(switching)
Minimum torque limiting set value

34 Torque/speed control mode switching 35
selection
Maximum torque limiting set value Zero torque (zero loss) tracks free
36 37 sliding
selection
38 Load dynamic balancing effective 39 Linkage setting conditions effective
RS485 external/Standard operation

40 41 Reserved
panel control switching
42 Start permission 43 Running permission
44 Counter 1 clock terminal 45 Counter 2 clock terminal
46 Counter 1 trigger signal 47 Counter 2 trigger signal
48 Counter 1 resetting terminal 49 Counter 2 resetting terminal
50 Counter 1 gated signal 51 Counter 2 gated signal
52 Timer 1 trigger signal 53 Timer 2 trigger signal
54 Timer 3 trigger signal 55 Timer 1 resetting
56 Timer 2 resetting 57 Timer 3 resetting
58 Timer 1 gated signal 59 Timer 2 gated signal
Single pulse accumulative length

60 Timer 3 gated signal 61
value resetting
Motor temperature detection contact

62 63 Reserved
input
64 Reserved 65 Magnetic flux brake
Position pulse counting (PG pulse Automatic shifting (Spindle shifting

66 67
counting accumulation) resetting jog running)
Reserve (for function expansion

68~80 Reserved 81~96
card)
0.10~100.00KHz pulse input port (Fin 1.0~1000.0Hz pulse input port (Fin
97 98
effective) effective)

Exhibit 2 Comparison table of multifunctional output terminal (DO/EDO/SDO)

Inverter running ready (normal voltage, no

0 No definition 1
emergency stop input)
2 Inverter is running 3 Equipment normal (fault-free running)
4 Equipment fault (trip) 5 Equipment alarm
6 Equipment fault or alarm 7 REV running
Running command input (irrelevant

8 9 Running with zero frequency
with start or running signal)
10 Speed not at zero 11 Inverter undervoltage stop
12 Terminal control effective 13 In the process of acceleration running
In the process of deceleration

14 15 Braking power generation running status
running
Determined by standard MODBUS Determined by extended communication

16 17
Fieldbus module
Completion of current stage of multi-stage

18 Reserved 19
running (0.5s pulse )
Multi-stage running completed (0.5S Multi-stage running completed

20 21
pulse ) (continuous level output)
Multi-stage running cycle completed

22 23 Swing frequency upper and lower limit
(0.5Spulse )
Decoder direction positive (A pulse

24 25 Decoder direction negative (A behind B)
surpassing B pulse )
Monitor 1 input variable below the Monitor 1 input variable above the upper
26 lower limit (Void when above the 27 limit
upper limit) (void when below the lower limit)
Monitor 1 input variable between the Monitor 2 variable below the lower limit
28 29
upper limit and the lower limit (void when above the upper limit)
Monitor 2 input variable above the

Monitor 2 input variable between the
30 upper limit 31
upper limit and the lower limit
(void when below the lower limit)
Monitor 3 input variable below the Monitor 3 input variable above the upper
32 lower limit 33 limit
(void when above the upper limit) (void when below the lower limit)
Monitor 3 input variable between the

34 35 Reserved
upper limit and the lower limit
Analog input AI1 wire breakage Analog input AI2 wire breakage detection
36 37
detection effective effective
Analog input AI3 wire breakage

38 39 Reserved
detection effective
40 Counter 1 output signal 1 41 Counter 1 output signal 2

42 Counter 2 output model 1 43 Counter 2 output signal 2
44 Timer 1 output signal 1 45 Timer 1 output signal 2
50~54 Retained for extension modules 55 DI1 terminal status effective
56 DI2 terminal status effective 57 DI3 terminal status effective
Terminal as frequency output (only

62 DI8 terminal status effective 63
applicable to DO3/Fo terminal)
64 SDO1 LDI 65 SDO2 LDI
66 SDO1⊙SDO2 AND 67 SDO3⊙SDO4 AND
68 SDO5⊙SDO6 AND 69 SDO3⊕SDO4 OR
70 SDO5⊕SDO6 OR 71 SDO7⊕SDO8 OR
Direction will not be considered for comparison of monitor variables.
Exhibit 3 Monitor variable comparison table

S/N Monitoring Parameter Variable 100% full-scale output
Output frequency (rotor

0 Upper limiting frequency
synchronous frequency)
1 Motor Revolution Upper limiting frequency *60/pairs of motor poles
2 Output current 250%* Inverter rated current
3 Output torque 300% rated torque
Motor rated voltage (reference voltage in VF

4 Output voltage
mode)
5 Output power 2* motor rated power
Maximum temperature of the

6 150.0℃
equipment
7 Voltage at the DC side 1000V (single phase 500V)
8 Motor temperature/ PTC resistance 500.0℃/5000 Ohm
9 Frequency setting channel set value Upper limiting frequency
10 Speed command Upper limiting frequency *60/pairs of motor poles
11 Torque command 300% rated torque

S/N Monitoring Parameter Variable 100% full-scale output
12 Target operating frequency Upper limiting frequency
Difference between frequency

13 Upper limiting frequency (revolution)
(revolution) output and set value
14 Speed adjuster deviation Upper limiting frequency *60/pairs of motor poles
15 Speed adjuster output 300.0%
16 Process PID setting 100.0%
17 Process PID feedback 100.0%
18 Process PID deviation value 200.0%
19 Process PID output 100.0%
20~23 Reserved --
24 AI1 input (0.00~10.00) 10.00V
25 AI2 input (0.00~20.00) 20.00mA
26 AI3 input (-10.00~10.00) 10.00V
27 Fin input Maximum input frequency
28 Current liner speed (Fin calculation) Maximum permitted liner speed
Accumulative counted length ( liner

29 Maximum counted length
speed accumulation)
30 Counter 1 value Counter 1 set value 2
31 Counter 2 value Counter 2 set value 2
32 Timer 1 value Timer 1 timing cycle
35 Built-in Fieldbus set value 1 10000
Extended communication module

36 10000
set value 1
37 Built-in Fieldbus set value 2 30000
Extended communication module

38 30000
set value 2
39~44 Reserved
45 Fixed output (current or voltage) 20.00mA (10.00V)

102 Function Details
Chapter 7 Function Details
Remark: Unless otherwise especially instructed, the status of terminals will be defined under
positive logic conditions (“ON” terminals effective, and “OFF” terminals void).
7.1 System management (Group F0.0)
Group F0.0 parameters are especially used to define system control parameters, e.g. locking,
initializing, motor type and control mode as well as display of monitoring parameters, etc.
F0.0.00 Macro parameters (H) Setting range: 0000~2006 Factory default: 0000
Macro parameters include application macro, system macro and special configuration macro; the
application macro allows for conveniently setting and curing multiple common parameters and
simplifying parameter setting for general applications; the system macro allows for conveniently
switching equipment’s work mode (e.g. switching between high and low frequency operation mode)
and automatically defining partial parameters; the special macro allows for internal integration and
settings for special functions or parameters with one key according to typical industrial applications.
Macro parameters are not influenced by the initializing parameter F0.0.07 and partial macro-related
parameters are locked at specific value or within specific range.
The unit: Application macro (0-F)

0: Void
Customized settings, all parameters can be customized without being influenced by the application
macro parameters.
1: Digital setting of panel operation
Refer to Figure 7-1 for the application wiring diagram, and refer to Table 7-1 for macro-related
parameters.
2: Shuttle setting panel operation
parameters.
3: Two-Line Control 1/AI1 Setting
Refer to Figure 7-2-A for the application wiring diagram, and refer to Table 7-1 for macro-related
parameters.
4: Two-Line Control 2 /AI1 Setting
Refer to Figure 7-2-B for the application wiring diagram, and refer to Table 7-1 for macro-related
parameters.

Function Details 103
5: Three-line control 1/AT1 setting
parameters.
6: Machine tool spindle drive macro / AI1 setting.
parameters.
Table 7-1: Table Application Macro Association Self-Setting Parameters
Applicati Applicati Applicati Applicati Applicati

Parameters on on on on on Remarks
Macro 1 Macro 2 Macro 3 Macro 4 Macro 5
F0.2.25 2 (0~2) 3 9 9 9 Locked
F0.3.33 0 0 1 1 1 Locked
F0.3.35 — — 0 1 2 Locked
F0.4.37 0 0 0 0 0 Locked
F0.4.38 0 0 0 0 0 Locked
F3.0.01 — — — — 19 Locked
F3.0.02 — — 7 7 7 Locked
F3.0.03 — — 8 8 8 Locked
F3.0.04 13 13 13 13 13 Locked
F6.1.15 0 0 0 0 0 Relocatable
FA.2.25 0 0 0 0 0 Relocatable

DI5 故障复位输入（RESET）
Fault reset input (RESET)
Figure 7-1 Wiring Diagram for Panel
Operation Digital/Shuttle Setting CM 数字输入公共地
Digital input public address
AI1 Input frequency given: 0~10V

输出频率给定：0～10V
1~10KΩ
1~10KΩ
GND Analog
模拟输入地 input address
+10V Reference voltage: 10 VDC,max. 10mA

Figure 7-2-A Two-Line Control 1/AI1
DI3 Forward (FWD) running command
Setting Wiring Diagram
DI4 Reverse (REV) running command
DI5 Fault resetting input (RESET)
CM Digit input public address
AI1 ? ? frequency
Input ? ? ? ?given:
: 0~0~10V
10V
1~10KO
1~10KΩ
GND Analog
? ? ?input
? ?address
Figure 7-2-B Two-Line Control 2/AI1 +10V Reference

? ? ? ? voltage:
: 10VDC,10 VDC,
? ?max.
10mA10mA
DI3 ? ? ? command
Running ?
DI4 ? ? ?disengaged:
Switch ? : ? ? ?FWD
? ?command
? ? ?engaged:
Switch ? : ? ?REV
? ?command
?
DI5 ? ? resetting
Fault ? ? ? ?input
( RESET)
(RESET)
CM ? ?input
Digit ? ?public
? ? address
?
AI1 ? ?frequency
Input ? ? ? given:
? : 0~ 10V
0~10V
1~10KΩ
1~10KO
GND Analog
? ? input
? ? address
?
+10V Reference
? ? ? ?voltage: 10 VDC, ?max.
: 10VDC, 10mA
? 10mA
DI2 ? ? ? ?
Three-line ? ? control
running
Figure 7-3 Three-Line Control 1/AI1
DI3 Forward(FWD)
? ? FWD?running
? ? ?command
( ? ? (pulse
) )
DI4 Reverse (REV) running
? ? REV? ? ? ? command
( ? ? (pulse
) )
DI5 ? ?resetting
Fault ? ? ? input
? ( (RESET)
RESET)
CM ? input
Digit ? ? public
? ? ?address
?
AI1 ? ? frequency
Input ? ? ? ?given:
: 0~0~10V
10V
1~10KΩ
1~10KO
GND Analog
? ? ?input
? ?address
+10V Reference
? ? ? ? voltage: 10 VDC,
: 10VDC, ? ?max. 10mA
10mA
DI2 ? ?to?electric
Shift ? drive
Figure 7-4 Driven by machine tool
DI3 Forward (FWD)?running
? ? FWD? ? ? command
spindle / AI1 preset wiring diagram
DI4 Reverse
? ? REV?(REV)? running
? ? command
DI5 ? ? resetting
Fault ? ? ? ?input
( RESET)
(RESET)
DI6 ? ? switching
Motor ? ?
CM ? ?input
Digit ? ?public
? ? address
?
TA
TB ? ?output
Fault ? ?
TC

Macro-related parameters
Related
F0.0.09 F0.2.25 F0.3.33 F0.3.35 F0.4.37 F0.4.38 F3.0.01 F3.0.02 F3.0.03
parameters
Macro set value 0000 9 1 0 0 0 67 7 8
Value locking N Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y
Related
F3.0.04 F3.0.05 F3.1.21 F5.3.32 F6.1.15 F6.2.46 F7.0.00 F8.0.00 F8.3.39
parameters
Macro set value 13 41 4 1 0 0 0 0 0
Value locking Y Y Y Y N N N N N
F0.0.01 Parameter display and

Setting range: 0000~9014 Factory default: 0001
modification (H)
The unit: Parameter display mode:

0: Display all parameters
1: Display effective configuration parameters
To automatically hide the parameters irrelevant with current command or hardware according to
different parameter setting commands or different current hardware configuration (e.g. various
expansion boards), so as to simplify field commissioning.
2: Display parameters different from factory default
3: Display modified and stored parameters after power-on this time
4: Display modified and un-stored parameters after power-on this time
Tens: Parameter modification mode

The macro parameter F0.0.00 is also limited by this function.
0: Effective and permanently stored after modification
Parameters modified will be immediately stored in the memory and permanent saved, and will not
lose after power-off.
1: Effective after modification but not stored, and getting lost after power-off
Parameters modified are effective but are not saved in the memory. And parameters modified will
automatically restore to the values saved in the memory after completion of relevant operation or
power-off. This function is used for tentative modification of undetermined parameters for field
commissioning; after commissioning, all modified and unsaved parameters can be displayed for
view separately (when the unit of this parameter is set to 4), and batch recovery or batch storage
will be conducted (when the kilobit of this parameter is set to 2 or 5).
Hundred: Reserve
Kilobit: Batch recovery or batch storage of parameters
The macro parameter F0.0.00 is not subject to the influence of this function.
2: Abandon modifying all un-saved parameters (restoring to original value)
All unsaved parameters will be rapidly restored to the values stored in the memory with one key.

This function can only be used when the device is stopped. If this function is activated when the
device is running, the inverter will send alarm aL.058 and give up operation.
5: Batch storing all modified and unsaved parameters
All modified and unsaved parameters will be saved in the memory.
9: resume all parameters to initial values at the last power-on
To restore all parameters to the initial values at the last power-on. Even after initialization, all
parameters can be restored to the preliminary power-on values with this function. This function is
used to make correction during field commissioning when the system works abnormally because no
one knows which parameter is modified incorrectly at the current power-on.
This function can only be used when the device is stopped. If this function is activated when the
device is running, the inverter will send alarm aL.059 and give up operation.
[F0.0.00] and [F0.0.01] are not limited by the parameter display mode, and will not
be concealed in any display mode. The panel displaying parameters concealed
due to parameter display mode will not influence the access to the concealed
parameter via communication port.
F0.0.02 Macro-call parameter (system

macro) modification password
For modifying the system macro setting (kilobit) of the macro parameter F0.0.00, the modification
password 1580 must be entered. This password will automatically disappear after 30 seconds. The
macro parameter cannot be modified once within 30 seconds upon input of the password. If it is
intended to make modification once again, the password should be entered again.
F0.0.03 LCD language selection Setting range: 0~1 Factory default: 0
This parameter is valid when LCD operating panel is configured, and is used to set language of LCD
display.
0: Chinese 1: English (the reserved option for this series of products)
F0.0.04 LCD display setting (H) Setting range: 0000~0037 Factory default: 0023
This function is only effective for the operating panel equipped with LCD.
The unit: Contrast ratio, setting range 0~7.
Tens: Normal display mode
0: Steady mode
1: Single parameter display
The LCD panel will only display the status parameters set for F0.0.12 in the normal monitoring mode.

2: Dual parameter display

The LCD panel will display the status parameters set for F0.0.12 and F0.0.13 in the normal monitoring
mode.
3: Three parameter display
The LCD panel will display the status parameters set for F0.0.12, F0.0.13 and F0.0.14 in the normal
monitoring mode.
F0.0.05 Parameter locking (H) Setting range: 0000~0012 Factory default: 0000
F0.0.06 Parameter locking password Setting range: 00000~65535 Factory default: 0
After the parameter locking is effective, during modification of the locked parameter, LED panel will
display “---”; LCD panel will prompt “password locked and modification forbidden”. This function is used
to forbid modification of functional parameters by unauthorized personnel.
The password setting will take effect if OK key is pressed down within 30 seconds. If no confirmation
(OK key) is conducted beyond 30 seconds or any other key is pressed down within 30 seconds, the
password setting will be given up. The sketch of locking operation is as below:
1 2 3 4 The ten’s digit is flashing

on main display LED
Main display 0 Main display F0.0.00 Main display F0.0.05 Main display 0000 Main display 0000
Auxiliary display 0.0 Auxiliary display 0000 Auxiliary display 0000 Auxiliary display 0.0 Auxiliary display 0.0
5
9 8 7 6
Main display 12345 Main display 0 Main display Main display Main display 0010
F0.0.06 F0.0.05
0 Auxiliary display 0.0
Auxiliary display Auxiliary display 0.0 Auxiliary display 0 Auxiliary display 0010
10
The locking password is
effective, and is 12345.
Main display F0.0.06 No keys are pressed within 30s Main display F0.0.06
Auxiliary display 12345 Auxiliary display 0
Enter preset password and then press OK, and then the parameter locking status will be relieved. The
sketch of unlocking operation is as below:
1 2 3 4 5
Main display 0 Main display F0.0.00 Main display F0.0.06 Main display 0 Main display 12345 Main display F0.0.06
Auxiliary display 0.0 Auxiliary display 0000 Auxiliary display 0 Auxiliary display 0.0 Auxiliary display 0 Auxiliary display 0
Successfully unlocked

F0.0.08 Parameter copying (H) Setting range: 0000~0013 Factory default: 0000

0: No action
1: Parameter upload
The inverter will upload parameter values in the control board memory to the panel memory.
2: Parameter download
The parameter values in the panel memory will be downloaded to the control board memory.
3: Parameter download (except for F2 group parameters)
The parameter values in the panel memory will be downloaded to the control board memory (motor
parameters will not be downloaded).
Uploading and downloading is forbidden when the inverter is operating, and the
settings of this parameter are invalid.
During parameter upload and download, all keys except for STOP key on the panel are temporarily
locked. Press STOP key to forcedly terminate upload and download; when the unload operation is
forcedly terminated, the parameters uploaded will be stored in the panel memory, and the
parameters not unloaded will be kept unchanged;
When the download operation is forcedly terminated, the inverter will give up all parameters already
downloaded into the control board memory, and automatically restore to the values before down-
load.
The alarm signal relevant with this parameter is as below:
aL.071 – Parameter unload failed. Uploaded parameters will be saved in the panel memory, and
parameters not uploaded will be kept unchanged.
aL.072 – Uploaded parameter storage failed. The panel memory is damaged or the memory is una-
vailable.
aL.074 – Parameter download failed. Terminate the parameter download process, and all parame-
ters downloaded will be automatically restored to the values before download.
aL.075 – The board memory parameters are not consistent with the frequency inverter parameters
in terms of the version.
aL.076 – There are no effective parameters in the board memory.
aL.077 – Some set values among the panel parameters are out of the allowable range. Terminate
the parameter download process, and all parameters downloaded will be automatically restored to
the values before download.

F0.0.11 Selection of panel key functions (H) Setting range: 0000~0224 Factory default: 0000
The unit: Locking of panel keys

0: Not locked
All keys are effective on the operating panel.
1: All keys except for UP/DW (shuttle), STOP and RUN are locked.
Only UP/DW (shuttle), STOP and RUN keys on the operating panel are effective.
2: All keys except STOP and RUN are locked.
Only the STOP and RUN keys on the operating panel are effective.
3: All keys except STOP are locked.
Only the STOP key on the operating panel is effective.
4: Locking all keys
All keys are void on the operating panel.
When the button locking function is set by this parameter, the locking will not take
effective unless ESC button is pressed to back to the normal monitoring mode.
See 5.2 Basic Function and Operating Methods of Control Panel for details.
Tens: Function of STOP key

0: The modes other than the panel control are void.
Only when the running command channel is the operating panel is it effective to press down the STOP
key.
1: Press STOP key in any control mode for deceleration stop.
No matter the running command preset channel is the operating panel, external terminals or the
communication port, when STOP key is pressed, the inverter will control the motor to achieve
deceleration stop according to the current effective deceleration time. The priority of this stop mode is
higher than that of parameter F0.4.38.
2: Press STOP key in any control mode for free stop.
No matter the running command preset channel is the operating panel, external terminals or the
communication port, when STOP key is pressed, the inverter will stop output, and the motor stop in free
sliding mode. The priority of this stop mode is higher than that of parameter F0.4.38.
Hundreds: Function of PANEL/REMOTE keys

0: Void
The running command channel cannot be switched with PANEL/REMOTE key.
1: Effective at stop
PANEL/REMOTE key is effective at the stop status, but it is void to switch the running command
channel with this key when the device is running.
2: Continuous effective
PANEL/REMOTE keys can be used to switch the running command channel both at the stop and
running status.

• When the functional setting of PANEL/REMOTE keys is effective, and in the normal monitoring
mode, the PANEL/REMOTE keys can be used to switch the running command channel. The
switching status is not saved, and will get lost after power-off. The running command channel for the
inverter is still the operating panel after power-on once again.
• If PANEL/REMOTE keys are used to circularly switch to desired running command channel, it is
required to press “OK” key for confirmation within 5 s. Otherwise, it will not get effective.
• The switching sequence of the running command channel: Operating panel running command chan-
nel (PANEL/REMOTE light on)→external terminal operating running command channel (PANEL/
REMOTE light off) → communication port running command channel (PANEL/REMOTE light
flashing) → operating panel running command channel (PANEL/REMOTE light on).
The command channel switching at the running status of the inverter should
be used carefully. Be sure the safety before operation. If the running command
(FWD/REV/JOG) after switching is inconsistent with that before switching, the
inverter will change its current running status (stop, run or REV), which may
cause accident.
F0.0.12 Principal
Setting range: d0.00~d0.55 / d1.00~d1.55 Factory default: d0.00
monitoring parameter (H)
F0.0.13 Auxiliary Factory default: d0.02

Setting range: d0.00~d0.55 / d1.00~d1.55
monitoring parameter 1 (H)
F0.0.14 Auxiliary Factory default: d0.04

Setting range: d0.00~d0.55 / d1.00~d1.55
monitoring parameter 2 (H)
This group of parameters is used to determine display contents on the operating panel at the status
monitoring mode, and bitwise operation must be followed for setting.
Principal monitoring parameter: used to determine display contents on the main display column of
the LED panel, or the first display parameter on the LCD panel (signal parameter display).
Auxiliary monitoring parameter 1: used to determine display contents on the auxiliary display column
of the LED panel, or the second display parameter on the LCD panel (dual parameter display) when the
inverter is running.
Auxiliary monitoring parameter 2: is used to determine display contents on the auxiliary display
column of the LED panel, or the third display parameter on the LCD panel (three parameter display)
when the inverter is stopped.
The corresponding physical quantity of the display data can be referred to the status monitoring
parameter table. When the inverter is conducting detection of motor parameters, the auxiliary display
will display the value of the current output current, which is not restricted by the parameter F0.0.13.

7.2 Running command selection (Group F0.1)

F0.1.17 Running direction (H) Setting range: 0000~0021 Factory default: 0000
The unit: Direction switching
0: Void
The running direction is controlled by the direction command.
1: Negate
The running direction is opposite to that directed by the direction command.
Tens: Direction locking

0: Void
The running direction is controlled by the direction command.
1: FWD locking
The motor will run in FWD direction no matter the FWD running command or REV running command is
given.
2: REV locking
The motor will run in REV direction no matter the FWD running command or REV running command is
given.
• Setting can be down when the inverter is operating. Be sure to confirm

that this operation is safe.
• The function of “Direction locking” (tens) has precedence over the
function of “direction switching” (the unit).
F0.1.20 Maximum
Setting range: 10.00~300.00Hz Factory default: 60.00
output frequency
F0.1.21 Upper
Setting range: [F0.1.22]~Min (300.00Hz,[F0.1.20]) Factory default: 50.00
limiting frequency
F0.1.22 Lower
Setting range: 0.0Hz~[F0.1.21] Factory default: 0.0
limiting frequency
1． The maximum output frequency is the allowable output maximum frequency of the inverter as set by
users (maximum stator synchronous frequency of the asynchronous motor);
2．The upper limiting frequency is the maximum frequency allowed for running of the asynchronous
motor as set by users (the maximum frequency corresponding to the mechanical rotor of the
asynchronous motor);
3．The maximum output frequency must be higher than the upper limiting frequency;
4．The lower limiting frequency is the minimum frequency allowed for running of the motor as set by
users.
5．The maximum output frequency, upper limiting frequency and lower limiting frequency shall carefully
set according to the actual nameplate parameters and operating status of the controlled motor and.
The relationship among the three is shown in Figure 7-7.

Output
输出电压 voltage
[F1.2.16]
Output
输出频率 frequency
[F0.1.22] [F1.2.15] [F0.1.21] [F0.1.20]
Figure 7-7 Frequency Parameter Definition Sketch
[F1.2.15] in figure 7-7 represents the motor’s reference frequency, and [F1.2.16]
referents the motor’s reference voltage.
F0.1.23 FWD jog frequency Setting range: 0.0Hz~[F0.1.21] Factory default: 10.00
F0.1.24 REV jog frequency Setting range: 0.0Hz~[F0.1.21] Factory default: 10.00
Jog running is a special running mode of the inverter. No matter the inverter is initially stopped or
running, as long as the jog command is inputted, the inverter will transit to the jog frequency according
to the preset jog acceleration and deceleration time. However, it is also influenced by the startup
frequency and startup frequency duration as well as the functions of DC band-type braking, startup
delay and startup pre-excitation.
Jog acceleration time

点动加速时间 Frequency
Frequency 频率 Jog deceleration
点动减速时间
频率 [F1.0.09]
[F1.0.10]
正转点动
FWD jog 减速时间 1/2/3/4
Deceleration time
频率
frequency FWD
正转点动jog
加速时间time
Deceleration 1/2/3/4
1/2/3/4
频率
frequency
时间
Time Time
时间
Jog signal Jog signal
点动信号
点动信号
Figure 7-8 FWD Jog Running Curve

7.3 Frequency setup (Group F0.2)

F0.2.25 Frequency setting source Setting range: 00~29 Factory default: 0
0: Panel digital setting (maintained after stop)

The frequency set value is determined by the value of the parameter F0.2.29. In the normal monitoring
mode, it is applicable to make direct modification with the ∧ and ∨ keys (or shuttle) on the panel. The
modified values will not be saved and will get lost after power-on.
1: Panel digital setting (zero clearing after stop)

Similar to the case of “0” as above, the inverter will automatically clear current set value after stop.
2: Panel digital setting (maintained after stop and saved after power-off)
Similar to the case of “0,1” as above, the inverter will automatically save the current set value after
power-off, and take the saved value as the initial set value after power-on once again.
3: Setting of panel shuttle potentiometer

Its function is equivalent to the high-precision panel potentiometer. The set resolution is the minimum
quantitative value (e.g. 0.01 Hz), and data are saved in the internal memory of the panel.
4: Terminal UP/DW setting (maintained after stop)

Multifunctional terminals are used to directly increase, decrease (function no. 15, 16) or clear (function
no. 17) the set frequency. The terminal function is selected by parameters F3.0.00 ~ F3.0.08.The set
data will not be saved and will get lost after power-off.
The relationship between the status setting combination of the three external switches and the current
frequency set value of the inverter is shown in Figure 7-2.
Preconditions for below instruction: multifunctional terminal DI1 frequency or process PID setting UP
function ([F3.0.00]=15), DI2 sets frequency or process PID DW function ([F3.0.03]=16), and DI5 sets
UP/DW with frequency clear function ([F3.0.04]=17).
Table 7-2 External Switch Status and Current Frequency
UP switch
UP? ?
DI1 I 设
Set
n 定
DOWN?
Down ?
switch Frequency
频 Maintai Increas Deceas Maintai
DI2 ?v 端
子
Terminal 率 ned ed ed ned
Zero
Clear
? ? ?switch
? ?er 状
态
Status
DI5
?t DI1 OFF ON OFF ON Random
e
COM r DI2 OFF OFF ON ON Random
DI5 OFF OFF OFF OFF ON
Figure 7-9 Terminal UP/DW Wiring Diagram

5: Terminal UP/DW setting (maintained after stop)

Similar to the case of “4” as above, the inverter will automatically clear current set value after stop.
6: Terminal UP/DW setting (maintained after stop and saved after power-off)
Similar to the case of “4” as above, the set value will be saved automatically after power-off, and the
initial set data will be the set value at the last power-off when the inverter is powered on once again.
7: Terminal UP/DW two-way setting (maintained in bipolar mode after stop)

The basic operation is slimier to that as stated in "4" and the difference is that: in the mode of “4”, the
set frequency is unsigned values (not containing direction information), and the setting range of the
frequency is: 0~upper limiting frequency; while in the mode of “7”, the set frequency is signed values
(containing direction changing information), and the setting range of the frequency is: - upper limiting
frequency upper limiting frequency.
The inverter’s actual running direction is according to “XOR” calculation of the command direction
(FWD, REV) and the set frequency direction.
8: Terminal UP/DW two-way setting (maintained in bipolar mode after stop and saved after
power-off)
The basic operation is similar to the case of “7” as above. The set value will be saved automatically
after power-off, and the initial set data will be the set value at the last power-off when the inverter is
powered on once again.
9: Analog input Al1

The frequency set value is given via the analog input AI1; for relevant characteristics please see the
instructions of the parameters F4.0.00 and F4.0.01.
10: Analog input Al2

11: Analog input Al3

12: Given by the analog input AI1 bipolarity

The frequency set value is given by the bipolarity of the analog AI1 ([F4.0.00]~[F4.0.01]), and AI1
contains the direction changing information. For relevant characteristics please see the
13: Given by the analog input AI3 bipolarity

The frequency set value is given by the bipolarity of the analog AI3 ([F4.0.04]~[F4.0.05]), and AI3
contains the direction changing information. For relevant characteristics please see the instructions
of the parameters F4.00.04 and F4.00.05.

14: Pulse input Fin

The frequency set value is given by the pulse input Fin.
15: Given by the pulse input bipolarity

The frequency set value is given by the pulse input Fin bipolarity, and the pulse signal contains the
direction changing information.
16: MODBUS fieldbus set value 1 (relative set value)

The frequency set value is given by the principal computer through MODBUS fieldbus (RS485
communication port), and the set value (-10000 ~ 10000) is relative data and is corresponding to the
upper limiting frequency.

The frequency set value is given by the principal computer through MODBUS fieldbus (RS485
communication port), and the set value (-30000 ~ 30000) is absolute value neglecting the decimal point)
(e.g., the value 5000 corresponds to the set frequency 50.00Hz in general mode, and corresponds to
the set frequency 500.0Hz in the high-frequency macro mode.
18: AI1+AI2
The frequency set value = the frequency value corresponding to the analog input AI1 + the frequency
value corresponding to the analog input AI2.
19: AI2+AI3
value corresponding to the analog input AI3
20: AI2+pulse input Fin

value corresponding to the pulse input Fin.
21: AI1*AI2/rail-to-rail input (10V)

The frequency set value = the frequency value corresponding to AI1 *the frequency value
corresponding to AI2/the frequency corresponding to the maximum input of AI2.
22: AI1/AI2
The frequency set value= the frequency value corresponding to AI1/the frequency value corresponding
to AI2.

The frequency set value is given by the process PID output. This option is mainly for the system in
which the PID running output needs to be combined with other setting channel for running. In general
running system, this value does not need to be selected. PID output will automatically participate in
setting competition according to the frequency setting priority.
When this mode is used, the priority (F5.3.28) of command source shall be correctly set, and the PID
output shall be base on the maximum setting of this channel (F0.2.28) (upper limit frequency shall be

regarded as the reference for those beyond common modes).
24: Compensation PID output (the reserved item of this function for this series of products)
25: Disturbance running frequency

The frequency set value is given by the disturbance running frequency. This option is mainly for the
system in which the disturbance running output needs to be combined with other setting channel for
running. In general running system, this value does not need to be selected. The disturbance output will
automatically participate in setting competition according to the frequency setting priority.
26: Automatic multi-sage running frequency

The frequency set value is given by the multi-stage running frequency. This option is mainly for the
system in which the multi-stage running output needs to be combined with other setting channel for
running. In general running system, this value does not need to be selected. The multi-stage running
output will automatically participate in setting competition according to the frequency setting priority.
Correct setting of priority of command sources ((F5.3.28) is required for afore-said items (item 25 and
26).
27: Terminal selection multi-stage frequency

The frequency set value is determined by the combination status of the four multifunctional input termi-
nals (function no. 1, 2, 3, 4), and the terminal function is set by the parameters F3.0.00~F3.0.08.This
way allows for multi-stage frequency running.

The frequency setting source and set value are determined by the virtual input parameter group F4.4.50
~ F4.4.54.
7.4 Control command source (Group F0.3)
F0.3.33 Control command Setting range: 0~2 Factory default: 0
To select the input physical channel of the inverter control commands (start, stop, forward, reverse,
jog and reset, etc).
0: Operating panel
The running control command is given via the operating panel. Please see Chapter 5 for the use of
the operating panel.
1: External control terminal
The running control command is given via external control commands, and the terminal function is
set by the parameter F3.0.
2: MODBUS fieldbus/standard expansion card configuration
The operation command is specified through the expansion communication mode.

F0.3.35 External control terminal Setting range: 0000~0013 Factory default: 0000
action mode (H)
The unit: Control command action mode
Preconditions for below instructions: the multifunctional terminal DI3 is for FWD command function
([F3.0.02]=7)，DI4 is for REV function ([F3.0.03]=8), and DI5 is for three-line running control function
([F3.0.04]=19).
0: Two-line mode 1
1: Two-line mode 2 Control Operation
DI4 DI3 Figure
mode command
2: Three-line mode 1
OFF OFF Stop FWD I
When K0 is engaged, FWD and REV DI3 n
v
Two-line OFF ON FWD 变
control is effective; and when K0 is REV
e
mode DI4 频
r
unengaged, FWD and REV control is 1 ON OFF REV t
器
e
void, and the inverter will stop. COM r
ON ON Stop
DI3 terminal ascending edge indicates
OFF OFF Stop
FWD running command FW D
INVERTER
D I3
DI4 terminal ascending edge indicates Two-line OFF ON FWD

REV
mode D I4
REV running command 2 ON OFF Stop
COM
Three-line mode 2
ON ON REV
When K0 is engaged, FWD and REV
control is effective; when K0 is unengaged, FWD and REV control is void, and the inverter will stop.
DI3 terminal rising edge indicates running command;
DI4 terminal disconnection indicates FWD command;
DI4 terminal connection indicates REV command.
Tens: Control command power-on FWD

I FWD I
initial start mode n DI3 n DI3
变
v REV 变
v REV
Running signal level starting e DI4 e DI4
Running signal rising edge starting
频
r K0 频
r K0
t DI5 t DI5
(two-line mode 1/2)
器
e
器
e
COM COM
r r
The signal given by two-line mode
running command is level signal, and
Figure 7-10 Figure 7-11
when the terminal is at effective status,
Three-line operation mode 1 Three-line operation mode 2
the inverter will automatically start after
power-on. In the system in which
power-on auto start is not expected, it is applicable to select the way of rising edge start.

7.5 Start and stop (Group F0.4)

F0.4.37 Start/Running permission (H) Setting range: 0000~1202 Factory default: 0000
The unit: Start permission

0: Function closed
The inverter can start without start permission signal.
1: Permitted when the multifunctional terminal is effective.
The inverter will not start until it is defined that the multifunctional input terminal (group F3.0) of the start
permission (function No. 42) is continuously effective; start is forbidden when it is void, and the inverter
which is running will stop freely (alarm code: aL.031). The inverter will not start again until the rising
edge of the starting signal is detected.
2: Command word from standard fieldbus (standard expansion card)
The start permission signal is from the bus command word.
Hundreds: Running permission

0: Function closed
The inverter can run without running permission signal.
1: Permitted when the multifunctional terminal is effective
The inverter will not start until the multifunctional input terminal (group F3.0) which is defined to be
running permissible (function no. 43) is effective; if it is void, the inverter will stop in the way defined by
the kilobit of this parameter, and will then automatically run again after signal recovery.
2: Command word from standard fieldbus (standard expansion card)
The start permission signal is from the bus command word.
Kilobit: The action mode when the running permission signal is void
0: Free stop
The inverter stops outputting, and the motor stops freely.
The inverter will stop at deceleration mode according to preset deceleration time.
Start
启动允许 permission
运行允许permission
Running
运行命令
Running command
Auto clear
自动清 Re-giving
重新给不清除命令
Not clear
command
除命令 command
定命令 command
电机状态
Motor status
加速时间
Acceleration 自由停机
time Free stop Deceleration
减速停机减速时间 time
Deceleration
stop
Figure 7-12 Schematic Diagram of Start Process

F0.4.38 Start/Stop Mode (H) Setting range: 0000~0101 Factory default: 0000
The unit: Start mode

0: Normal start
There are no special requirements for most load start mode. Normal start mode will be adopted.
1: Revolution tracking start
It is applicable to the occasion of fault resetting and restart and restart after power-off. The inverter
will automatically judge the running speed and direction of the motor, and starts the rotating motor in
a smooth and impact-free way according to the detection and judge results; see below figure for the
revolution tracking start sketch.
Hundreds: Stop mode

In the case of deceleration stop, the inverter will gradually reduce the output frequency according to
the preset deceleration time until it stops.
1: Free stop
At stop, the inverter outputs zero frequency and clocks output signals, and the motor will stop in a
free sliding way according to inertia.
At free stop, if it is needed to restart the motor before the motor stops running completely, it is
necessary to appropriately configure the revolution tracking start function; otherwise, it will leads to
overcurrent or overvoltage fault protection.
If the motor has not stopped completely in deceleration way, because of high load inertia of the field
work and short deceleration time, it is then applicable to start DC band-type braking control. See the
instructions of the parameter F0.4.44 for details.
Free stop
自由停机
Motor revolution
电机转速
Inverter 变频器
output
输出频率
frequency
Running
运行指令
command
Detecting检测电机转速及方向
motor revolution and direction
Figure 7-13 Revolution Tracking Start Sketch

F0.4.39 Start frequency Setting range: 0.0Hz~50.00Hz Factory default: 0.50
F0.4.40 Start frequency holding time Setting range: 0.00~10.00Sec. Factory default: 0.0
The start frequency means the initial frequency when the inverter starts up, and is not limited by the
lower limiting frequency F0.1.22.
The start frequency holding time means the duration of operation at the start frequency, and can be
set according to actual needs. When it is set to 0, the start frequency is void.
For the system with high inertia, heavy load and high requirement of start torque, the start frequency
can effectively overcome the difficult of start, and the start frequency is also effective in each
acceleration process when the inverter switches between forward and reverse running.
频率 Current
电流
Frequency
[F1.2.15] [F0.4.41]
F[0.4.41]
Current
Output
输出频率
[F0.4.39] frequency
[F0.4.40] 时间
F[0.4.42]
[F0.4.42]
Figure 7-14 Start Frequency Sketch Figure 7-15 Start Frequency Sketch
F0.4.41 Start pre-excitation current Setting range: 0.0~100(%) Factory default: 35.0
F0.4.42 Start pre-excitation time Setting range: 0.00~10.00Sec. Factory default: 0.10
It costs some time to develop air gap flux for asynchronous motor (approaching to the constant of the
rotor time). When it is at stop status before the motor is started, in order to get enough start torque, it is a
must to develop the air gap flux. Therefore, it is needed to start pre-excitation for the asynchronous
motor. See Figure 7-15 for the pre-excitation process.
The set value of start pre-excitation current is the percentage with respect to the inverter rated output
current.
The start pre-excitation time means the duration in which the inverter inputs start pre-excitation current
for the inverter.
When the rated current of the adapter motor differs greatly from the rated current
of the inverter, please carefully set the pre-excitation current (F0.4.41), as
excessive setting may damage the motor.

F0.4.43 Start delay Setting range: 0.00~10.00Sec. Factory default: 0.0
Start delay means the waiting time before the inverter starts after receiving the running command.
F0.4.44 DC band-type brake control (H) Setting range: 0000~0001 Factory default: 0000
The unit: DC band-type brake control

The DC band-type brake means to lead DC current into the motor rotor so as to generate braking torque.
The DC band-type braking function cannot be used when synchronous motor is driven.
When both the set value and the actual speed of the motor has decreased below [F0.4.45], the inverter
will stop generating sine current but will inject direct current to the motor, and the current value is to be
set by the parameter [F0.4.47]. When the given speed or the motor speed has surpassed the
parameter [F0.4.45], the inverter will stop DC power supply and restore to the normal running status. If it
is started, the permission signal will be disconnected, and the DC band-type brake will be void.
参考值
Reference value
[F0.4.45]
时间
Time
电机转速
Motor revolution DC band-type
brake
直流抱闸
时间
Time
Figure 7-16 DC Band-Type Brake Sketch
Injecting current to the moor may lead over-temperature of the motor. In the
circumstances where long-time DC band-type brake is needed, forced air-cooling
motor should be used. During the long time of band-type braking, if there is con-
stant load in the motor band-type brake, DC band-type brake will not guarantee
that the motor shaft will not rotate.
F0.4.45 DC band type brake/brake

Setting range: 0.0~[F0.1.21] Factory default: 2.00
initial frequency/speed
In the deceleration and stop process of the inverter, when the output frequency is lower than the DC
band-type brake/brake start frequency/speed, the DC band-type brake/brake function will be started.

F0.4.46 DC brake action time Setting range: 0.0~10.00Sec. Factory default: 0.0
F0.4.47 DC band-type brake/brake

Setting range: 0.0~100(%) Factory default: 50.0
injection current
The DC brake time is the duration of the output DC braking current. If it is selected that the external
terminal stop DC braking is effective, the parameter of DC braking action time will be void.
The DC band-tape brake/brake injection current means the brake current outputted at the time of
inverter DC band-type brake/brake. Its set value is the percentage with respect to the rated current.
DC brake
Output initial
frequency frequency
Start
frequency Start
起动频率 frequency
起动频率 holding
保持时间 time
DC brake action time
直流制动作用时间
Stop
Start Running
运行时间 time
起动频率 DC brake
直流制动
Start frequency initial
FWD and REV
正反转起始频率
frequency dead zone time
死区时间 frequency
holding time
Figure 7-17 Stop DC Brake Sketch
F0.4.48 Restart after power-off Setting range: 0, 1 Factory default: 0
F0.4.49 Restart after power-off/

Setting range: 0.10~10.00Sec. Factory default: 0.5
restart standby time after power-off
This is mainly for the trigger start modes of “panel control, bus control and three-line control". If the
power-off restart function is effective, the inverter will automatically save the running command/
status before power-off, and will automatically restore to the running status before power-off after the
stop restart waiting time when it is powered on again. The power-off restart will restore running in the
mode of inspection speed restart.
F0.4.50 Forward and reverse

transition dead time
The forward and reverse transition dead time is used to set the waiting time for the motor to shift from
FWD to REV or from REV to FWD. This function is used to overcome reversal current compact caused
by mechanical dead zone, as shown in Figure 7-18.
Output
输出频率 frequency Output frequency
输出频率
Time
时间 Time
时间
-[F0.4.39]
[F0.4.50]
[F0.4.50]
Figure 7-18 FWD and REV Transition Dead Zone Figure 7-19 Sketch of Start Frequency FWD and
Sketch REV Switching

F0.4.51 Forward and reverse switch mode Setting range: 0, 1 Factory default: 0
0: Switch at zero point

To switch between FWD and REV at the zero point.
1: Start frequency switch
To switch between the FWD and REV at the start frequency, as shown in Figure 7-19.
F0.4.52 Zero speed (frequency)

Setting range: 0.0~2.00Hz Factory default: 0.25Hz
detection level
F0.4.53 Zero speed delay time Setting range: 0.0~10.00Sec. Factory default: 0.1
When the inverter output frequency is lowered to zero, it will immediately lock the output. At this time,
the motor revolution may not at zero, but the motor is completely at the free stop status, and will slide to
stop.
Within the delay time, when the inverter output frequency is lower than the zero speed (frequency)
detected level [F0.4.52], within the zero speed delay time [F0.4.53], the inverter will keep working and
output a DC current, and the motor will keep excitation. The inverter may rapidly restart at any time.
无零速延时零速延时
No zero speed delay Zero speed delay
Speed
速度速度
Speed
[F0.4.52] [F0.4.52]
Time
Time
时间时间
[F0.4.53]
Figure 7-20 Comparison diagram when with or without zero speed delay

7.6 Acceleration and deceleration characteristics (Group F1.0)
F1.0.00 Acceleration and deceleration

characteristics parameters
The unit: Acceleration and deceleration mode
0: Liner acceleration and deceleration
The output frequency of the inverter increases or decreases according to fixed speed. The output
frequency has liner relationship with the acceleration and deceleration time, and steadily increases
or decreases according to constant gradient.
1: S curve acceleration and deceleration
The output frequency of the inverter increases or decreases according to grading speed, and the
characteristics of S curve is determined by the parameter [F1.0.01] and [F F1.0.02]. This function is
mainly to reduce noise and ventilation during acceleration and deceleration, and decrease impact of
the starting and stop load. When the load inertia is excessive, leading to overload fault during
deceleration, it can be improved by adjusting the parameter setting ([F1.0.01] and [F F1.0.02]) of S
deceleration curve, so as to reasonably adjust the deceleration rate at different frequency.
Tens: Unit of acceleration and deceleration time

0: Sec. (Second) The acceleration and deceleration time is in the unit of second, and is at factory
default value.
1: Min. (Minute) The acceleration and deceleration time is in the unit of minute.
F1.0.01 Time ratio of S curve acceleration Setting range:

Factory default: 15.0
starting/deceleration ending period 5.0~100.0-[F1.0.02]
F1.0.02 Time ratio of S curve acceleration Setting range:

rising/deceleration decreasing period 20.0~100.0-[F1.0.01]
Define the curve parameters of acceleration and deceleration of S curve.
As shown in item ① in Figure 7-21, the acceleration starting/deceleration ending period of S curve is
indicated by the percentage of the total acceleration and decoration time.
As shown in item ② in Figure 7-21, the acceleration rising/deceleration decreasing period of S curve is
indicated by the percentage of the total acceleration and decoration time.
Output frequency(Hz)
Straight line
2 2
S Curve
1 1
Time
[F0.0.01] [F0.0.02] （Sec./min.）
Figure 7-21 Acceleration and deceleration curve

F1.0.03~F1.0.08
Setting range: 0.01~600.00 (Sec./Min.) Factory default: ☆
Acceleration/deceleration time 1/2/3
F1.0.09
Acceleration 4/jog acceleration time
F1.0.10
Deceleration 4/jog deceleration time
The acceleration time means the time required for the inverter to accelerate from 0.00Hz to maximum
output frequency [F0.1.21].
The deceleration time means the time required for the inverter to decelerate from the maximum output
frequency [F0.1.21] to 0.00Hz.
E280 series inverters are defined with 4 kinds of acceleration/deceleration time. The acceleration/
deceleration time 1~4 during the running process of the inverter can be selected through different
combinations of external terminals. During simple PLC running, it is also applicable to use them as the
acceleration and deceleration time at the time of switching among different running frequency at each
stage. See instructions of F6.1 group parameters for detail.
The acceleration/deceleration time 4/jog acceleration/deceleration time are also used as the accele-
ration and declaration running time at the status of jog running. The jog frequency has the highest
priority. At any state, the inverter will immediately transit to the jog frequency running state according to
the preset jog acceleration and deceleration time as long as the jog command is inputted. (See the
instructions of the functional parameter F0.1.23 and F0.1.24) the unit (sec., min.) of the acceleration and
deceleration time is determined by the tens’ digit of the parameter F1.0.00.
Frequency
Time
time selection terminal 1
Acceleration and deceleration Acceleration/ Acceleration/
time selection terminal 2 Acceleration/ Acceleration/ deceleration deceleration
deceleration deceleration time 3 time 4
time 1 time 2
Operation command
Figure 7-22 External Terminal Selection Mode for Acceleration and Deceleration Time
F1.0.11 MS emergency stop

and deceleration time
The time for decelerating from the maximum output frequency [F0.1.20] to the zero frequency will only
function when the inverter stops in deceleration way (F0.4.54 is set to 0) after receiving EMS emergency
stop command (function no. 14).

7.7 Carrier frequency (Group F1.1)

Setting range:
F1.1.13 Carrier frequency 2.0~12.0KHz (FF.4.43=##0#) Factory default: ☆
2.0~15KHz (FF.4.43=##1#)
It is the switch frequency determining the inverter’s internal power module. The allowable maximum
carrier frequency is relevant with the inverter model. The carrier frequency mainly influences the audio
noise and heat effect during running. When mute running is required, it is applicable to appropriately
increase the value of the carrier frequency, but the maximum load allowable for the inverter may be
somewhat reduced, accompanied by somewhat increase of interference of the inverter to the outside
world. For the circumstances where the motor wire is too long, it may lead to leaking current between
motor wires and between the wire and the ground. When the ambient temperature is too high and the
motor load is too high, or the inverter is failed due to above reasons, it is suggested to appropriately
decrease the carrier frequency to improve thermal characteristics of the inverter.
F1.1.14 Carrier characteristics Setting range: 0000~2111 Factory default: 2011

This parameter is used to set some characteristics relevant with the carrier (binary system setting), and
usually needs not be modified.
The unit: Load linkage adjustment

When this function is effective, if the load current is excessive, the carrier frequency will be automatically
decreased in order to ensure safe running of the inverter.
Tens: Temperature linkage adjustment

When this function is effective, the inverter will automatically decrease the carrier frequency if the
ambient temperature is too high.
Hundreds: Reference frequency linkage adjustment

The inverter will appropriately decrease the carrier frequency if the output frequency is too low.
Kilobit: Modulation mode

0: Asynchronous modulation- It is application to most applications with the output below 300HZ.
1: Synchronous modulation –The carrier frequency and base frequency keep constant ratio, and it is
suitable to use this mode in high-frequency operation mode so as to promote high-frequency operation
stability.
2-5: Noise smoothing – When this function is effective, the inverter will automatically adjust carrier
frequency to smooth audio noise.

7.8 V/F parameters and overload protection (Group F1.2)

Setting range:
F1.2.15 Reference frequency of motor Factory default: 50.00
5.00~300.00Hz
Setting range:
F1.2.16 Reference voltage of motor Factory default: 380/220
50~500V/25~250V
The reference frequency means the minimum frequency when the inverter outputs the maximum
voltage, and generally is rated frequency of the motor.
The reference voltage means the output voltage when the inverter outputs the reference frequency, and
generally is rated voltage of the motor.
This group of parameters is set according to the motor’s parameters, and do no need to be modified
except for special circumstances.
F1.2.18 Motor torque increasing voltage Setting range: 0.0~20.0% Factory default: ☆
It is used to improve the inverter’s low frequency torque characteristics. When the inverter runs at
low frequency, it will make compensation for the inverter's output voltage. Its set value is the
percentage relative to the motor’s reference voltage [F1.2.16]. See figure 7-23-A and 7-23-B.
? ?
Voltage Voltage
电压
[F1.2.15] [F1.2.15]
[F1.2.18]
? voltage
? ? ? [F1.2.18]
Boost
Boost提升电压
voltage
[F1.2.16] ?Frequency
? [F1.2.16] 频率
Frequency
Figure 7-23-A Sketch of Torque Booster for Figure 7-23-B Sketch of Torque Booster for Constant
Descending Torque Curve Torque Curve
F1.2.19 Frequency point 1 of motor V/F curve Setting range: 0.0~[F0.1.21] Factory default: 0.0
F1.2.20 Voltage point 1 of Motor V/F curve Setting range: 0~500V Factory default: 0.0
This group of parameters is used to flexibly set V/F curve desired by users, as shown in Figure 7-24.

Voltage
电压
[F1.2.16]
F[1.2.16]
[F1.2.24]
F[1.2.24]
F[1.2.22]
[F1.2.22]
[F1.2.20]
F[1.2.20]
[F1.2.19] F[1.2.21]
F[1.2.19] [F1.2.21] [F1.2.15] 频率Hz
[F1.2.23]F[1.2.15]
F[1.2.23] Frequency(Hz)
Figure 7-24 V/F Customized Curve
F1.2.25 Motor slip frequency compensation Setting range: 0~150(%) Factory default: 0
The actual revolution difference of the motor may vary with the change of the load. Through setting of
this parameter, the inverter will automatically adjust the inverter's output frequency according to the load,
so as to offset the influence of the load to the motor revolution.
This parameter is only effective to V/F control mode.
Acceleration
Frequency
频率 time adjustment
加速时间调整
Output current
Output current Slip compensation is 100%
Slip compensation is 100%
150%
150%
Time
时间
Current
电流
100%
100% After slip
Before slip
Before slip compensation After slip compen
compensation
compensation [F1.4.39]
50%
50%
Motor revolut
Motor revolution
Time
时间
Figure7-25 Sketch of Slip Frequency Compensation Figure 7-26 Sketch of Acceleration and
Deceleration Current Limit

7.9 Steady running (Group F1.4)

F1.4.39 Acceleration/deceleration Factory default: 150 (%)
Setting range: 120~180 (%)
current limiting level
When the frequency inverter is in acceleration and deceleration running, for the acceleration and
deceleration time does not match to the motor inertia or load breaks, there can be phenomenon of steep
current rise. This parameter is used for setting the allowed output level when frequency inverter is in
state of acceleration. Setting value is the relevant percentage of rated output current of frequency
inverter.
When the output current of frequency inverter exceeds the specified level of this parameter,
acceleration and deceleration time will be automatically delayed, to ensure the output current limited
within the range of this level, refer to the figure 7-26. Thus, for occasions requiring shorter acceleration
time, acceleration torque level shall be properly improved.
F1.4.40 Strong start current limiting level Setting range: 120~200 (%) Factory default: 150(%)
F1.4.41 Strong start current holding time Setting range: 0.00~5.00Sec. Factory default: 0.0
Function is similar with [F1.4.39], limit the current value when frequency inverter is in acceleration and
starting. For some systems with large inertia, or requires to overcome great static friction at start, large
starting current can be set for a certain time ([F1.4.41]), to meet the requirement. Setting value is the
relevant percentage of rated output current of frequency inverter.
When F1.4.41 is set as zero, it means the function of current limit of strong start is
closed.
F1.4.42 Function selection for adjustors Setting range: 0000~0111 Factory default: 0111
The unit: Overvoltage suppression adjustor

When setting is valid, for load with energy feedback, in order to suppress overvoltage, frequency
inveter may lift output frequency automatically, making it exceed selected frequency (limited by upper
limiting frequency). Be attention if it is dangerous to the equipment safety when setting.
Tens: Undervoltage suppression adjustor

When setting is valid, undervoltage caused by sudden fall of grid voltage, frequency inverter may lower
output frequency automatically, accessing into feedback braking state, to keep running with mechanical
energy for a certain time to ensure the normal running of equipment.
Hundreds: Frequency modulation and current

When setting is valid, if the output current exceeds the maximum current [F1.4.47], frequency inverter
will lower output frequency automatically.

F1.4.43 Action level of the overvoltage adjustor Setting range: 660~800V Factory default: 740
F1.4.44 Overvoltage adjusting gain Setting range: 0.10~10.00 Factory default: 1.00
When the motor is dragging overvoltage or in process of deceleration stop with large inertia, it may
access into recycle braking state, causing rapid rise of direct current bus voltage of frequency inverter,
leading to overvoltage protection action. When frequency inverter detects the direct current bus voltage
exceeds [F1.4.43], it will adjust output frequency (extended deceleration time or increase frequency), to
ensure continually safe running.
Frequency Frequency
频率增加 incase
频率
[F1.4.20] Frequency
频率
[F0.1.20]
Extension of
deceleration time
延长减速时间
Voltage直流侧电压
at the DC side Time
时间 Voltage at直流侧电压
the DC side Time
时间
[F1.4.43]
[F1.4.43] [F1.4.43]
[F1.4.43]
Time
时间 Time
时间
Figure 7-27-A Overvoltage Suppression Figure 7-27-B Overvoltage Suppression
during Steady Running during Deceleration Process
The larger the overvoltage adjusting gain is, the more obvious the suppression is, but
it may lead to unsteady running.
F1.4.45 Action level of the undervoltage adjustor Setting range: [FF.2.35]~480V Factory default: 330V
F1.4.46 Undervoltage adjusting gain Setting range: 0.10~10.00 Factory default: 1.00
When frequency inverter detects the direct current bus voltage is below [F1.4.45], it may lower output
frequency automatically, accessing into recycle braking state, keep running with mechanical energy.
The larger the undervoltage adjusting gain is, the stronger undervoltage suppression is.

Frequency
频率 Frequency
频率增加incase Frequency
Output frequency(Hz)
[F0.1.20]
Straight line of deceleration time
Extension
2 2
Time Time
时间
Voltage at the DC side
直流侧电压 VoltageS
at Curve
the DC side
[F1.4.43]
1 1
Time
Time
时间 0 01] [F0 0 02] （Sec./min.）
Time
Figure 7-28-A Sketch of Undervoltage Adjusting Figure 7-28-B Sketch of Undervoltage Adjusting
F1.4.47 Action level of current limiting adjustor Setting range: 20~200(%) Factory default: 180
F1.4.48 Adjusting gain of the current limiting

Setting range: 0.10~10.00 Factory default: 1.00
adjustor
When the output current of frequency inverter exceeds [F1.4.47], it may lower output frequency
automatically to suppress current from further increasing, to ensure continually safe running. The bigger
(F1.4.48) gain is, the stronger current suppression is. Setting value is relevant percentage of rated
output current of frequency inverter.
F1.4.49 Recovery times of fault self resetting Setting range: 0~5 Factory default: 0
F1.4.50 The recovery waiting time of fault self

Setting range: 0.2~5.0Sec Factory default: 1.0
resetting
F1.4.51 Time period for self resetting timing Setting range: 900~36000Sec Factory default: 3600
Fault self resetting refers to that when the frequency inverter breaks down, with a period of time, fault
self resetting can be operated and recover to run with starting way of speed inspection. When
accumulated resetting times exceeds setting value [F1.4.49], self resetting action terminates. When self
resetting time [F1.4.49] is set as zero, it means this function is banned.
Recovery waiting time of fault self resetting gets longer with resetting times: waiting time=[F1.4.50] *
already reset times.
Each time it passes the set parameter period [F1.4.51], or external forced fault reset, it will automatically
eliminate one self resetting record.

F1.4.52 Self-restoration fault selection Setting range: 0000~1111 Factory default: 0.000
The Unit: overcurrent 0: self-resetting forbidden 1: Self-resetting permitted

Tens: overvoltage 0: self-resetting forbidden 1: self-resetting permitted
Hundreds: Output earthing 0: self-resetting forbidden 1: self-resetting permitted
Kilobit: Operation undervoltage 0: self-resetting forbidden 1: self-resetting permitted
F1.4.53 Display coefficient Setting range: 0.001~60.000 Factory default: 1.000

It is used to monitor display correction of parameters d0.0.00, d0.0.01, d0.0.9 and d0.0.10. Displayed
value = actual value × [F1.4.53].
7.10 Motor parameters (Group F2.0)

F2.0.00~F2.0.04 Motor rated parameters —— Factory default: ☆
Nameplate parameters of asynchronous motor, for ensuring g performance control, make sure that:
1) Correctly set nameplate parameters;
2) Power level of motor and frequency inverter shall be match with each other; generally motor
only can be two levels less or one level more than frequency inverter.
After the rated power setting (F2.0.00) is changed, following parameters (F2.0.00 ~ F2.0.09) will
then automatically matched and modified. Please conduct setting according to the sequence.
When any one of the nameplate parameters is changed, the frequency inverter will automatically set
static identification of motor parameters once. With the motor is connected for operation for the first
time, it will automatically conduct one time of parameter static identification (parameter FF.4.43 can
shield this function).
F2.0.10 Slip compensation coefficient Setting range: 0.50~1.50 Factory default: 1.00
Slip compensation coefficient is used for slip frequency calculation, valid with vector control mode.
With SVC running, this parameter can be amended to adjust speed for compensation control
F2.0.24 Z pulse initial angle Setting range: 0.0~359.9 Factory default: 0.0
This parameter is valid when Z pulse selection is valid ([F8.0.07] = 1), used for set corresponding
mechanical rotating angle of Z pulse position.
F2.0.25 Motor overload protection

Setting range: 50.0~131.0% Factory default: 110.0
coefficient
This parameter is used for setting sensitivity of heat relay protection to load motor of frequency
inverter. When the rated current of the load motor does not match with the rated current of the
inverter, correct thermal protection can be secured by setting this value.

The set value of this parameter can be confirmed through below formula:
[F2.0.25]=motor rated current /inverter rated current*100%.
When fixed value of this parameter is 131.0%, overload protection function of motor closes.
When one frequency inverter runs with several motors in parallel, function of heat
relay protection of frequency inverter will be out of action automatically. In order to
protect motor efficiently, it is suggested that installation of heat protection relay in
each motor.
7.11 Parameter measurement and pre-excitation (Group F2.2)

F2.2.52 Start pre-excitation time in vector mode Setting range: 0.02~2.50Sec. Factory default: ☆
This parameter is valid with vector operation; the pre-excitation action must be conducted prior to start
of motor, to build air gap flux to obtain enough starting torque. This excitation process shall be conducted
after action defined of parameter F0.4.42, excitation current shall be calculated automatically as selected
time. The shorter the excitation time is, the larger the current is.
F2.2.53 Motor parameter measurement Setting range: 0, 1, 2 Factory default: 0
Motor parameter measurement function must be started when vector control mode is selected (tens of
F0.0.09 is set as 0 or 1).
When this function (when F2.2.53 is set as 1 or 2) is enabled, parameter identification operation will be
carried when the frequency inverter is start. After parameter identification is over, F2.2.53 will be
automatically reset. Obtained motor parameters will be stored in internal memory of the frequency
inverter, and value of parameter F2.0.05 ~ F2.0.09 will be automatically updated.
Before identification operation, please confirm that:

1) Nameplate parameter of motor (F2.0.01~F2.0.04) has been input correctly;
2) The motor is in stopped condition.
0: Closed
1: Static identification
During parameter setting, the motor will be always kept in stop status (idling motor may be subject to
slight offset of axis angle).
2: Static + operating identification
Frequency inverter will conduct static identification at first, and then automatically start operation
identification process. During operation identification process, stop order can be input to forcedly
terminate identification process. At that time, the identification request is not cleared out, so when
restarted, identification process will be enabled again.
Top operating frequency of operation identification will reach 80% of rated frequency of motor. Before

identification starts, please be sure to confirm the equipment safety, and it will automatically stop
operating when identification ends.
During the process of operation identification of motor parameter, it is a must that

there is no load of motor during the whole process; otherwise, incorrect motor
parameters will be obtained.
7.12 Multifunctional input terminal (Group F3.0)

F3.0.00~F3.0.05 Multifunctional input terminals
Setting range: 0~96 ——
DI1~DI6
F3.0.06 Multifunctional input terminal DI7/

F3.0.07 Multifunctional input terminal DI8/

F3.0.08 Multifunctional input terminal DI9/Fin/

Control terminals Dl1~Dl9/Fin are functional programmable switch input terminals; they can define
the Dl1~Dl9/Fin functions respectively by way of the setup of F3.0.00~F3.0.08 values; See their set
values and relevant functions in Exhibit 1 (Comparison Table of Multifunctional Terminals (DI/EDI/
SDI) Function).
For example: Define F3.0.00 as 23, so the function of DI1 can be defined as "Simple PLC Multistage
Operation Input"; when the DI1 terminal status validates, simple PLC multi-stage operation input
function can be realized.
The function specifications in the table as following:

1~4: Multi-speed control terminals 1~4
By means of the ON/OFF status combinations of these four functional terminals, select the
set frequencies relevant to F6.0.00~F6.0.15 parameters as the current set frequencies of
frequency converter.
Table 7-3 Multi-speed operation selection table
Multi-speed Multi-speed Multi-speed Multi-speed

Frequency set
control 4 control 3 control 2 control 1
Ordinary operation frequency
OFF OFF OFF OFF
(F0.1.16 determined )
OFF OFF OFF ON Multi-stage operation frequ ency 1
OFF OFF ON OFF Multi-stage operation frequency 2
OFF OFF ON ON Multi-stage operation frequency 3
OFF ON OFF OFF Multi-stage operation frequency 4

Multi-speed Multi-speed Multi-speed Multi-speed

Frequency set
control 4 control 3 control 2 control 1
OFF ON OFF ON Multi-stage operation frequency 5
OFF ON ON OFF Multi-stage operation frequency 6
OFF ON ON ON Multi-stage operation frequency7
ON OFF OFF OFF Multi-stage operation frequency 8
ON OFF OFF ON Multi-stage operation frequency 9
ON OFF ON OFF Multi-stage operation frequency10
ON OFF ON ON Multi-stage operation frequency 11
ON ON OFF OFF Multi-stage operation frequency 12
ON ON OFF ON Multi-stage operation frequency 13
ON ON ON OFF Multi-stage operation frequency 14
ON ON ON ON Multi-stage operation frequency 15
5~6: External forward/Reverse jog control

Used for jog operation control under the external terminal control mode (regard F0.3.33/F0.3.34
as 1).
7~8: Forward (FWD)/Reverse (REV) running command terminal
The forward (FWD)/reverse (REV) running control applied under the external terminal control
mode(regard F0.3.33 as 1); according to the setup of F0.3.35, it can jog two-line mode and
three-line mode (regard another external control terminal as three-line running command
function (Function No. 19)).
9~10: Acceleration and deceleration time 1 and 2
By means of the acceleration and deceleration time, selecting the ON/OFF status combinations
of terminals can realize the selection of acceleration and deceleration time 1~4 (refer to
parameter specifications of F1.0.03~F1.0.10). If the user doesn't define this function, frequency
inverter can automatically select acceleration and deceleration 1, except simple PLC jog. See
the acceleration and deceleration time selection as following table.
Table 7-4 Contrast table of acceleration and deceleration time selection

Acceleration and Acceleration and
deceleration time deceleration time Acceleration and deceleration time
selection 2 selection 1
OFF OFF Acceleration time 1/Deceleration time 1
OFF ON Acceleration time 2/Deceleration time 2
ON OFF Acceleration time 3/Deceleration time 3
ON ON Acceleration time 4/Deceleration time 4

11: Running command switching

This function is applied to switch running command of frequency inverter between control command
1 and control command 2. See the running command switching status as following table:
Table 7-5 Contrast table of jog command switching

Terminal status Running command of frequency inverter
ON Running command 2
OFF Running command 1
12: Frequency command switching

This function is applied to switch frequency setting source of frequency inverter between frequency
setting source 1 and frequency setting source 2. See the frequency command switching status as
following table:
Table 7-6 Contrast table of frequency command switching
Terminal status Frequency setting source of frequency inverter
ON Frequency setting source 2
OFF Frequency setting source 1
13: Fault resetting input (RESET)

When fault alarm occurs to the frequency inverter, resetting can be done through external terminals,
and the input rising edge is valid; the function is coincident to the function of the STOP/RESET
button on the operating panel.
14: Emergency stop (EMS)
Whatever status frequency inverter operates, if the functional terminal is effective, frequency
inverter stops in terms of set emergency stop mode (F0.4.54) and starts to operate with rising
edge of running command.
15~16: Frequency or Process PID set value ascending (UP)/descending (DW)
V320 frequency inverter can achieve the setup of operation frequency via external terminal and
long-distance frequency set operation. If the terminal is effective, set frequency increases
progressively or decreases progressively in the light of set speed; if the terminal is ineffective, set
frequency keeps same. If both terminals are effective, set frequencies keep same. See 4~8
parameter functional specifications of F0.2.25.
17: UP/DW set frequency zero clearing
Set frequency of external terminal can be cleared to zero through the functional terminal (set
frequencies of frequency increasing progressively command UP/decreasing progressively
command DW). The function invalidates frequencies set by other frequencies setting modes.
18: External equipment fault
Inputting external equipment fault signal through the terminal is easy for frequency inverter to fault
supervision and communication to external equipment. Since frequency converter receives external
equipment fault, displaying "Fu.017" indicates the external equipment fault, and the inverter will
make a stop forcefully.

19: Three-line running control

When select the three-line running mode under the external terminal control (regard F0.3.33/
F0.3.34 as 1), define three-line running control for input terminal. See Three-line Mode Introduction
(regard F0.3.35 as 2 or 3).
20: Stop DC braking command
When frequency inverter is in the process of deceleration stop and running frequency is lower than
the straight flow brake or brake starting frequency or speed, the function is effective. When the
terminal status is effective, execute DC brake; only when the terminal status is ineffective, DC
brake can be stopped. When operate this function, DC braking functional time
F0.4. 46 is ineffective.
21: Acceleration and deceleration forbidden
When the terminal is effective, suspend acceleration and deceleration forbidden and frequency
inverter keeps current frequency operation as the acceleration and deceleration achieves; if the
terminal is ineffective, execute ordinary acceleration and deceleration command.
正转/停止
FWD/Stop
The command of
禁止加减速指令
forbidding acceleration
and deceleration
输出频率
Output frequency
时间
Time
保持
Holding 保持
Holding
Figure 7-29 Sketch of Acceleration and Deceleration Forbidden
22: Process PID effective

When selecting the multifunctional input terminals in the process PID, the function can achieve
process PID's input and cutting off.
23: Simple PLC multi-stage running effective
When select the multi-stage frequencies or rotation running condition input in the programmable
multi-stage speed operation mode (regard F6.1.15 as ###2), the functional terminal can achieve
simple PLC multi-stage running's input and cutting off.
24: Swing frequency running effective
If swing frequency running is valid of terminal (set F6.2.46 as ###2), the functional terminal can
input and cut off swing frequency running. If terminal status is effective, frequency converter runs
swing frequency. If terminal status is ineffective, frequency inverter can accelerate and decelerate
into swing frequency preset frequency [F6.2.47] for running according to effective acceleration and
deceleration time (set acquiescent value to acceleration and deceleration time 1).
25: Reserve

26: Simple PLC multi-stage running status (when stopping) resetting

Simple PLC multi-stage running status at stop status can be selected to be automatically
memorized ([F6.1.15] = #1##/#2##). The functional terminal can allow for forceful restoration to
the status of being automatically memorized.
27: Swing frequency status resetting (effective when stopping)
If the swing frequency's current running status selects ([F6.2.46] = ##0#) swing frequency
operation when automatic memory stop, the functional terminal can reset the status of swing
frequency forcefully.
28~30: Process PID multi-stage given terminals 1~3
Using status combinations of ON/OFF of multi-stage process PID given terminals 1~3 can achieve
selection of multi-stage process PID given terminals as following table.
Table 7-7 Contrast table of multi-stage process PID given terminals selection
Process PID
Multi-stage process Multi-stage process Multi-stage process
multi-stage given
PID given terminal 3 PID given terminal 2 PID given terminal 1
selection
Ordinary process PID
OFF OFF OFF given (determined
by F7.0.01)
Process PID
OFF OFF ON
multi-stage given 1
Process PID
OFF ON OFF
multi-stage given 2
Process PID
OFF ON ON
multi-stage given 3
Process PID
ON OFF OFF
multi-stage given 4
Process PID
ON OFF ON
multi-stage given 5
Process PID
ON ON OFF
multi-stage given 6
Process PID
ON ON ON
multi-stage given 7

31: Process PID setting selection (switching)

The functional terminal is applied to switch process PID setting of frequency inverter between
process PID setting 1 and process PID setting 2. See process PID setting switching status as
following table:
Table 7-8 Contrast table of switching status of process PID setting
Terminal status Process PID setting of frequency inverter
ON Process PID setting 2
OFF Process PID setting 1
32: Process PID feedback selection (switching)

This functional terminal is applied to switch Process PID feedback of frequency inverter
between process PID setting 1 and process PID setting 2. See switching status of process PID
as following table:
Table 7-9 Contrast table of switching status of process PID feedback
Terminal status Process PID feedback of frequency inverter
ON Process PID feedback 2
OFF Process PID feedback 1
33: Process PID sleep activation

When the sleep function is activated by multifunctional input terminals (set F7.2.34 as 2), the
functional terminal can activate process PID sleep function.
34: Torque/speed control mode switching
The functional terminal is applied to switch closed loop control mode of frequency inverter
between torque control and speed control. See the closed loop control mode of frequency
inverter as following table:
Table 7-10 contrast table of closed loop control mode of frequency inverter
Terminal status Closed loop control mode of frequency inverter
ON Speed control mode
OFF Torque control mode
35: Select minimum torque limit setting value

This function is applied to switch minimum torque limit setting value of frequency inverter
(negative torque limit) between minimum torque limit 1 and minimum torque limit 2. See
switching status as following table:
Table 7-11 Minimum torque limiting selection contrast table of frequency inverter
Terminal status Minimum torque limit set value of frequency inverter
ON Minimum torque limit 2
OFF Minimum torque limit 1

36: Selection of maximum torque limit setting value

This function is applied to switch maximum torque limit setting value of frequency inverter between
maximum torque limit 1 and maximum torque limit 2. See switching status as following table:
Table 7-12 Maximum torque limit selection contrast table of frequency inverter
Terminal status Maximum torque limit setting value
ON Maximum torque limit 2
OFF Maximum torque limit 1
37: Reserved
38: Load dynamic balance effective
39: Communication linkage setting effective
During communication linkage control, the linkage setting of (effective) slave machine can be
separately removed. Then other setting channel can be automatically selected according to the
priority setting.
40: RS485 external/Standard operation panel switching
When two operation panels are inserted to frequency inverter at the same time, one is for master
control panel switching, and the other is for monitoring only, and the order cannot be inputted in.
Table 7-13 Control command channel switching and selecting table for frequency inverter
Terminal state Control command channel of frequency inverter
ON RS485 external panel
OFF Standard operation panel
42: Start permission

When parameter F0.4.37 is set to ###1or ###2, the function terminal is valid.
43: Running permission
When parameter F0.4.37 is set to #1## or #2##, the function terminal is valid.
44~45: Counter clock terminal
This terminal is used for inputting resetting signal of counter.
46~47: Counter trigger signal
This terminal is used as counter trigger end.
48~49: Counter resetting terminal
This terminal is used for inputting resetting signal of counter.
50~51: Counter auto control signal
This terminal is used for inputting gating signal of counter.
52~54: Timer trigger signal
This terminal is used as timer trigger end.
55~57: Timer resetting
This terminal is used for inputting resetting signal of timer.
58~60: Timer gated signal
This terminal is used for inputting gating signal of timer.
61: Single pulse accumulative length value resetting

This terminal is used for resetting of single pulse accumulative length counting value.
62~64: Reserved parameters
65: Input magnetic flux brake
It is applied to input and removal of magnetic flux brake during the deceleration halt process.
66: Position pulse counting resetting
The inverter contains a 32-bit PG encoder pulse accumulative /regressive device, which is used to
display the current position of the transmission shaft (PG mounting shaft) (monitoring parameter
d1.2.18~19). This function is used for value clearing of pulse accumulative/regressive device.
67: Automatic shifting
This function is especially used for transmission machineries with mechanical shifting function (e.g.
machine tool drive）。 When it is effective, the inverter will drive motor to rotate forward or reversely
at low speed, so as to facilitate smooth shifting and avoid mechanical lock.
68~96: Reserved
97: Pulse input port (0.10 ~ 100.00 KHz)
This function is applied to multi-function input terminal DI9/Fin (F3.0.08), and signal of 0.10~
100.00 KHz can be received effectively.
98: Pulse input port (1.0 ~ 1000.0Hz)
This function is applied to multi-function input terminal DI9/Fin (F3.0.08) and low frequency signal
of1.0~1000.0Hz can be received effectively.
F3.0.09 Multifunctional terminal filtering

Setting range: 1~50ms Factory default: 5 ms
time (DI1~DI5)
F3.0.10 Multifunctional terminal filtering

time (DI6~DI9) / standard expansion card
Set the filtering time of the input terminal detection. When state of the input terminal changes, while
after the setting filter time setting it remains the same, the change of terminal state is effective,
otherwise it will remains the former state, thus the interference triggered by false operation can be
reduced.

F3.0.11 Input terminal effective level (H) Setting range: 0000~01FF Factory default: 0000
Define the positive and negative logic of the input terminal.

Bit place as 0 represents the positive logic; Positive logic: When DIx terminal and common port COM
are connected, it is valid, or otherwise it is invalid.
Bit place as 1 represents negative logic; Negative logic: When DIx terminal and common port COM are
disconnected, it is valid, or otherwise it is invalid.
Determine methods of parameter setting value, please refer to the following table:
Table 7-15 Correspondence between Binary Number Setting and Digital Show Value
Binary number setting Hexadecimal (digital

BIT3 BIT2 BIT1 BIT0 show value)
0 0 0 0 0
0 0 0 1 1
0 0 1 0 2
0 0 1 1 3
0 1 0 0 4
0 1 0 1 5
0 1 1 0 6
0 1 1 1 7
1 0 0 0 8
1 0 0 1 9
1 0 1 0 A
1 0 1 1 b
1 1 0 0 C
1 1 0 1 d
1 1 1 0 E
1 1 1 1 F

7.13 Multifunctional output terminal (Group F3.1)
F3.1.12 Multifunctional output terminal DO1 Setting range: 0~71 Factory default: 1
F3.1.13 Multifunctional output terminal DO2 Setting range: 0~71 Factory default: 2
F3.1.14 Multifunctional output terminal DO3/

Fout/ expansion function
F3.1.21 Multifunctional relay output (RO1A/B/C) Setting range: 0~71 Factory default: 4
F3.1.22 Multifunctional relay output

(RO2A/B/C)/ expansion card
The control terminal D01-D03 is the on-off output terminal with programmable function, and its functions
can be defined by set values of F3.1.12-F3.1.14; output R01and R02 of relay is on-off output terminal
with programmable function, which can be defined by set values of F3.1.21 and F3.1.22. Please refer to
the attached list for their setting values and corresponding functions (Reference table of variables of
multi-function output terminal (DO/EDO/SDO).
1: Inverter running ready
When inverter is in normal running ready state, terminal will output effective signal/relay will pick up
(connection of TA and TC).
2: Inverter is running
When the inverter is in running state, terminal will output effective signal/relay will pick up.
3: Equipment normal
When inverter is fault free, and DC busbar voltage is normal, terminal will effectively indicate signal/
relay will pick up.
4: Equipment fault
When inverter goes wrong and sends fault signal, terminal will output effective signal/relay will pick up.
5: Equipment alarm
When there is exception of inverter and sending warning signal, terminal will output effective signal/
relay will pick up.
6: Equipment fault or alarm
When there is fault for exception of inverter and sending fault or warning signal, terminal will output
effective signal/relay will pick up.
7: Reverse running
When electric motor rotates reversely, the terminal will output the valid signal/relay will pick up.
8: Valid running command
When running instruction of inverter is valid, the terminal will output the valid signal/relay will operate.
9: Running at zero speed
When running instruction is valid but output frequency of inverter is at zero and there is current output,
terminal will output effective signal/relay will pick up.
10: Speed not at zero
When the speed of rotator of electric motor is not at zero (VC mode) or output frequency is not at zero
(VF or SVC mode), terminal will output the valid signal/relay will pick up.
11: Inverter undervoltage stop

When inverter is in under-voltage stop and reporting Fu.008, the terminal will output the valid signal/
relay will pick up.
12: Valid external control
When control command of frequency converter is given not on panel, terminal will output the valid
signal/relay will pick up.
14: Running at power generating status (braking)
When inverter is in regenerative braking running state, terminal will output the valid signal/relay will pick
up.
19: Completion of current stage of multi-stage running (0.5s pulse)
After completion of current stage of multi-stage running, terminal will output the valid pulse signal with
0.5S width/relay will disconnect after pick-up for 0.5S.
20: Multi-stage running completed (0.5S pulse)
After completion of one cycle of multi-stage speed running, terminal will output the valid impulse signal
with 0.5S width/relay will disconnect after pick-up for 0.5S.
21: Multi-stage running completed (continuous level output)
After completion of one cycle of multi-stage speed running, terminal will output continuous valid
signal/relay will pick up.
22: Multi-stage running cycle completed (0.5Spulse)
After completion of one cycle of multi-stage speed running, terminal will output effective impulse
signal with 0.5S width/relay will disconnect after pick-up for 0.5S.
23: Swing frequency upper and lower limit
After selection of wobbulation, if the frequency fluctuation range of wobbulation, which calculated
based on center frequency, is above upper limit frequency F0.1.21 or below lower limit frequency
F0.1.22, then terminal will output effective signal/relay will pick up.
24: Encoder direction
It is used to indicate the directional signal output by current encoder frequency division.
26/29/32: Monitoring parameters 1/2/3 below the lower limit
When monitoring parameters 1/2/3 are below the lower limit values, terminal will output the valid
signal/relay will pick up, which keeps until monitoring parameters 1/2/3 are above the upper limit
values, then output the invalid signal/relay disconnects (as shown in figure 7-30-A).
Monitor
监控器参数值 reference value Monitor
监控器参数值 reference value
Upper
上限值 limit Upper
上限值limit
Lower
下限值 limit Lower
下限值limit
时间Time 时间
Time
Relay
继电器吸合 pull-in Relay
继电器吸合pull-in
时间Time Time
时间
Figure 7-30-A Monitor Functional Sketch 1 Figure 7-30-B Monitor Functional Sketch 2

27/30/33: Monitoring parameters 1/2/3 above the lower limit

When monitoring parameters 1/2/3 are above the upper limit values, terminal will output effective
signal/relay will pick up, which keeps until monitoring parameters 1/2/3 are below the lower limit
values, then output ineffective signal/relay disconnects (as shown in figure 7-30-B).
28/31/34: Monitoring parameters 1/2/3 between the upper limit and the lower limit
When monitoring parameters 1/2/3 are between upper and lower limit values (including equal to
upper and lower limit values), the terminal will output the indicator signal/relay will pick up, as shown
in figure 7-30-C.
Monitor reference value

监控器参数值
Upper
上限值 limit
Lower
下限值 limit
Time
时间
Relay
继电器吸合 pull-in
Time
时间
Figure 7-30-C Functional Sketch 3 of monitor
36~38: Analog input AI1 wire-break detection effective

When inverter detects wire-break of analog input, it will choose to make corresponding operation
according to operation after wire-break; meanwhile terminal will output effective signal/relay will pick up.
40~43: Counter output signal
When counting of counter reaches to setting value, terminal will output effective signal/relay will pick up.
Please refer to function specifications for F5.2.20~F5.2.27 parameters.
44~49: Timer output signal
When comparative value /periodic value of timer reaches to setting value, terminal will output effective
signal/relay will pick up. Please refer to function specifications for F5.1.06~F5.1.18 parameters
55~62: Status of multifunctional input terminal
If D10~D18 terminals are effective, terminal will output effective signal/relay will pick up.
63: DO3/Fout terminal as the frequency output terminal
As frequency output terminal, frequency range of signal output by D03/Fout: 0.07-100.0KHz.
64~71: Logic operation
When the result of the logic operation of the virtual output port (SDO1~SDO8) is “true”, the terminal
outputs effective signal/the relay picks up. Please refer to related contents in “Comparison Table of
Multifunctional Output Terminal Variables".

F3.1.15~F3.1.20 DO1~DO3 delay time for

terminal effective/ineffective signal output
F3.1.23~F3.1.26 RO1/RO2 power-on/

disconnection delay time
This group of parameters are used to define multi-function output terminal DO1~DO3 and time delay of
change for signal state output by multi-function relay RO1/RO2. When signal output by multi-function
terminal and pulled in by relay is effective, terminal will output indicator signal, and relay will pick up
(connection of TA and TC) after delay time set by parameters F3.1.15~F3.1.20, F3.1.23~F3.1.26.
F3.1.27~ F3.1.29 monitor 1-3 variable selection Setting range: 0~44 Factory default: 0~2
Different state parameters can be monitored by setting the values of F3.1.27~F3.1.29 (please refer to
“Comparison Table of Monitor Variables”).
F3.1.30~F3.1.35 Upper and lower

Setting range: 0.0~100.0(%) Factory default: 0.0/100.0
limit of monitor 1~3 variables
This group of parameters restricts the range of monitoring parameter variables, of which the set values
are relative to the percentages of full monitoring variable output.
7.14 Pulse input (this group of parameters will effective when expansion I/O
board is configured and D19 selects frequency input function) (Group F3.2)
F3.2.36 Minimum pulse input
Setting range: 0.0~100.00KHz Factory default: 0.0
frequency DI9/Fin
F3.2.37 Maximum pulse

Setting range: 0.01~100.00KHz Factory default: 10.0
input frequencyDI9/Fin
F3.2.38 Pulse detection cycle Setting range: 1 ms ~20ms Factory default: 10 ms
This group of parameters defines multi-function input terminal DI9/Fin as frequency range and
detection cycle of external pulse signal for pulse input (F3.0.08 is set as 97-98), effective breadth of
external pulse signal is 5-30V.
F3.2.39 Number of single-loop pulse Setting range: 1~4096 Factory default: 1024
When input frequency signal of DI9/Fin terminal is used for length accumulation or speed
measurement, these parameters are used to set pulse signal quantity for each rotation of encoder.
F3.2.40 Mechanical transmission ratio Setting range: 0.010~10.000 Factory default: 1.000
F3.2.41 Driving wheel diameter (for liner

Setting range: 0.1~2000.0mm Factory default: 100.0
speed calculation)
This group of parameters is used for linear speed calculation or length accumulation.
Mechanical transmission ratio = driving wheel revolution/revolution of speed measuring coded disc.

Setting range:
F3.2.42 Maximum accumulative length value Factory default: 50000
10m~50000m
Setting range:
F3.2.43 Maximum liner speed Factory default: 10.00m/s
0.01~500.00m/sec.
To limit the maximum accumulative length and maximum liner speed. The terminal signal can be input
when it reaches or exceed the maximum value.
F3.2.44 Current accumulative length value Setting range: 0~50000m Factory default: —
F3.2.45 Current liner speed Setting range: 0.0~500.00m/sec. Factory default: —

Parameters in read-only state are used to display calculated results of current length and linear speed.
7.15 Pulse output (this group of parameters will effective when expansion I/O
board is configured and DO3 selects frequency output function) (Group F3.3)
F3.3.46 Type of output pulse signal DO3/Fout Setting range: 0~2 Factory default: 0
0: 0.25 ~ 100.00KHz Frequency signal

1: 10.0 ~ 1000.0Hz Frequency signal
2: Pulse width modulation (PWM) signal
It can be used as expansion AO port, and the modulation frequency is set through the maximum pulse
output frequency parameter F3.3.48.
F3.3.50 DO3/Fout assignment lower limit Setting range: 0.0~[F3.3.51] Factory default: 0.0
F3.3.51 DO3/Fout assignment upper limit Setting range: [F3.3.50]~100.0% Factory default: 100.0
This group of parameters can determine the corresponding relationship between maximum, minimum
frequency of the pulse output DO3/Fout and its pulse output mapping variables, while the set values are
the percentages of full pulse output mapping variables. Corresponding relationship between the two
parameters is as shown in figure 7-31:
Fout输出频率
Fout output frequency
[F3.3.48]
[F3.3.47]
Per unit value of the pulse output mapping

脉冲输出映射变量标幺值
[F3.3.50] [F3.3.51]
Figure 7-31 Characteristic Curve of Pulse Output Fount

7.16 Analog input (Group F4.0)

F4.0.00~F4.0.05 Minimum and maximum values of analog input AI1~AI3 —— ——
This group of parameters is used to define the setting range of analog input signal, which need to be
set according to actual situation of access signal.
AI1 analog input port is unipolar voltage signal; AI2 analog input port is unipolar current signal; AI3
analog input signal is bipolar voltage signal.
Corresponding
对应变量 variable
Corresponding variable Corresponding
对应变量
variable
最大值 max.
Corresponding
variable max. Corresponding
对应变量
variable
最小值 min.
[F4.0.00] AI1
[F4.0.01]
- Corresponding
-对应变量
Corresponding variable min.
variable min. 最小值
[F4.0.00]+[F4.0.01]
2
- Corresponding
-对应变量
[ F 4 .0 . 0 0 ] [ F 4 .0 .0 1 ] variable max.
最大值
Figure 7-32-A Sketch of AI1 Analog Input and Figure 7-32-B Sketch of AI1 Analog Input and
Corresponding Variables (Unipolarity) Corresponding Variables (bipolarity)
Corresponding variable
Corresponding variable Corresponding
variable max.
Corresponding
variable max. Corresponding
variable min.
-[F 4 .0 .0 5 ] [F 4 .1 .1 7 ]
A I3
-[F 4 .1 .1 7 ]
Corresponding
variable min.
-Corresponding
variable min.
[F4.0.04] [F4.0.05] AI3
- Corresponding
variable max.
Figure 7-33-A Sketch of AI3 Analog Input Figure 7-33-B Sketch of AI3 Analog Input
and Corresponding Variables (Unipolarity) and Corresponding Variables (Unipolarity)
When the unipolar input signal AI1 and AI2 are applied as bipolar signal, if input
signal disconnects and input value is maximum reserve setting, it may be dange-
rous to human and property safety. Please use in combination with disconnection
fault detection function of analog input port.
F4.0.06~F4.0.08 Analog input AI1~AI3 filtering

time coefficient/standard expansion card
Carry out filtering treatment to external analog input quantity to effectively eliminate interference
signal. Filtering time constant (time needed for given signal rising to 63% of stable value) should be
set properly according to fluctuation range of external input signal, if it is too high, anti-interference
capacity will be strong while delaying the response speed to setting signal.

7.17 Analog input curve correction (Group F4.1)

F4.1.09~F4.1.16 Analog input AI1~AI31 curve correction point/value 1~2 —— ——
This group of parameters is used to conduct nonlinear correction to analog input value as required.
Curve correction of analog input AI1 is as shown in figure 7-34, while the curve correction methods of
AI2 are similar to analog input AI1.
AI1
A Iper
1 标unit
幺 value
值
Curve before
矫正 correction
前曲线
矫正值2
Correction value 2
[ F 4 .0 .1 2 ]
矫正值1 Curve after

Correction value 1
[ F 4 .0 .1 0 ] 矫correction
正后曲线
Correction
矫正点point
1 1 Correction
矫正point
点 22 A I1
[ F 4 .0 .0 9 ] [ F 4 .0 .1 1 ]
Figure 7-34 Curve correction of analog input AI1
F4.1.17 Analog input AI3 zero hysteresis /

Set hysteresis width of middle point between maximum value and minimum value of AI3, when it is
applied as bipolar signal, forward and reverse fluctuation of zero setting value will be frequent as shown
in Figure 7-34. It should be set to 0 when applied as unipolar signal.
F4.1.18~F4.1.21 Analog input AI3 curve correction

—— ——
point/value1~2/standard expansion card
This group of parameters is used to conduct nonlinear correction on analog input values if necessary.
The curve correction method for analog input AI3 is similar to that for analog input AI1. Refer to figure
7-34 for the curve correction.

7.18 Analog output (Group F4.2)

F4.2.22 Mapping variable of multifunctional
analog output AO1
F4.2.23 Mapping variable of multifunctional
analog output AO2/standard expansion card
Multifunction analog output AO1, AO2 can output voltage signal of 0~10V or current signal of
1~20mA, selected by the dial switch on the control board. Frequency inverter status represented by
the analog output signal is set by this group of parameters. Please see Appendix 3 (comparison
table of status variable).
F4.2.24 AO1 minimum Setting range: 0.00~10.00V Factory default: 0.0

F4.2.25 AO1 maximum Setting range: 0.00~10.00V Factory default: 10.00
F4.2.30 AO2 minimum/standard

Setting range: 0.00~10.00V Factory default: 0.0
expansion card
F4.2.31 AO2 maximum/standard

Setting range: 0.00~10.00V Factory default: 10.00
expansion card
This group of parameters defines the maximum and minimum of multifunction analog output AO1, AO2
allowed to output.
F4.2.26 AO1 lower limiting value Setting range: 0.0~[F4.2.27] Factory default: 0.0
F4.2.27 Upper limiting value Setting range: [F4.2.26]~100.0% Factory default: 100.0
F4.2.32 Lower limiting value/standard
expansion card
F4.2.33 Upper limiting value/standard

Setting range: [F4.2.32]~100.0% Factory default: 100.0
expansion card
Corresponding relationship between maximum and minimum of AO1, AO2 output given by this
group of parameters and mapping variable (see figure below), whose set value is the percentage
relevant to the full output of mapping variable of AO1, AO2.
AO Output voltage
AO输出电压
AOAO最大值
maximum
AO最小值
AO minimum
AO assignment
AO赋值下限 AO assignment Per
AO赋值上限 unit value of AO
AO映射
upper lower limit upper limit 变量标幺值
mapping variable
Figure 7-35 Characteristic Curve of AO Output curve

F4.2.28 AO1 AO1 filtering time coefficient Setting range: 0.01~10.00Sec. Factory default: 0.10
F4.2.34 AO2 filtering time coefficient/

This group of parameters is used to set the filtering time coefficient of AOI, AO2 analog output signal,
according to selection of requirements of the rapidity and wave character of signal. The larger the
time coefficient is, the smoother the output signal is, and the slower the response is.
Setting range:
F4.2.29 AO1 fixed output value Factory default: 0.0
0.00~20.00mA (0.00~10.00V)
F4.2.35 AO2 fixed output value/standard Setting range:

expansion card 0.00~20.00mA (0.00~10.00V)
When the mapping variable of multifunction analog output AO1, AO2 is a fixed value (F4.02.22,
F4.2.23 is set to 45), fixed value of AO1 output is [F4.2.29], and the fixed value of AO2 output is
[F4.2.35], which can output voltage and current signal.
7.19 Analog input wire-break detection (Group F4.3)

On condition that break detection function of analog input is valid, when the value of AI1, AI2 and AI3
analog input is within the range of detection threshold level, when the frequency inverter passes the
action of break detection delay, conduct corresponding action according to the selected setting after the
wire-break action.
F4.3.39 Action selection after AI1 wire-break Setting range: 0~4 Factory default: 0
Define corresponding actions after frequency inverter detects analog input wire-breakage.
When detecting analog input wire-break, if the frequency inverter operates normally, it only reports
aL.036-aL.038 warning signal. If the wire-break fault is cleared, the warning signal can be cleared
automatically.

When detecting analog input wire-break, if the frequency inverter operates normally, it reports aL.036-
aL.038 warning signal. Meanwhile, forcedly set the analog input signal to the minimum of analog input.
If the wire-break fault is cleared, the warning signal can be cleared automatically, meanwhile, the analog
input signal recovers to input value.
2: Forcedly set to the maximum

aL.038 warning signal. Meanwhile, forcedly set the analog input signal to the maximum of analog input.

If the wire-break fault is cleared, the warning signal can be cleared automatically, meanwhile, the analog
input signal is restored to input value.
3: Forcedly set to the default value

aL.038 warning signal. Meanwhile, forcedly set the analog input signal to the default input value of
analog input. If the wire-break fault is cleared, the warning signal can be cleared automatically,
meanwhile, the analog input signal is restored to input value.

When detecting analog input wire-break, it reports Fu. 036~Fu. 038 fault signal and lock output, and load
motor freely sliding down. If the wire-break fault is cleared, fault signal shall be cleared with hand-reset.
7.20 Hopping frequency (Group F5.0)

Hopping frequency function makes the output frequency of frequency inverter to avoid the mechanical
resonant frequency point of machine loaded.
Setting frequency of frequency inverter can operate with hopping frequency around some frequency
point as the method in the figure below, with 3 hopping ranges defined at most.
After hopping frequency parameters are set, even the setting frequency of frequency inverter is within
the mechanical resonant frequency band of driving system; output frequency of frequency inverter will
still adjust out of the mechanical resonant band, operating with lower limiting value of the hopping range
of this hopping frequency.
Set frequency after adjustment
[F5.0.04] [F5.0.05]
[F5.0.02] [F5.0.03]
[F5.0.00] [F5.0.01]
Time
Figure 7-36 Schematic diagram of hopping frequency output

7.21 Built-in auxiliary timer (Group F5.1)

This group of parameters are mainly instructed by taking example of timer 1.
7.21.1 Basic Functions of the Timer
[F5.1.09]
[F5.1.10]
Trigger
触发信号signal
Signal
时钟（S） (S)
Comparative value比较值到达(脉冲)
reaching (pulse) Reset
复位
Comparative value比较值到达(电平)
reaching (level)
REV after reaching比较值到达反转

the comparative value
Figure 7-37-A
Schematic diagram of comparison value of timer 1 reaching for the basic function (F5.1.06=11#1)
[F5.1.09]
[F5.1.10]
Trigger
触发信号signal Signal
时钟（S） (S)
Cycle reaching (pulse)

周期到达(脉冲) Reset
复位
Cycle reaching (level)

周期到达(电平)
REV after
周期到达反转reaching the cycle
REV after reaching the比较值或周期到达反转

comparative value or cycle
Figure 7-37-B
Schematic diagram of comparison value of timer 1 reaching for the basic function (F5.1.06=10#1)
7.21.2 Timer trigger and gate control function
[F5.1.09]
Clock
时钟
Trigger signal
触发信号
Gating
门控信号signal
Figure 7-37-C
Starting trigger and gate control signal function of timer 1 (UT1) (F5.1.06=1111；F5.1.15=0001)

7.21.3 Timer with clock function
UT1
[F5.1.09]
Trigger
触发信号 signal
时钟
Clock
UT2
Trigger
触发信号 signal
Signal
时钟
Figure 7-37-D
Pulse concatenation function of timer 1(UT1) (F5.1.06=10#1；F5.1.07=###3)
7.21.4 Timer with trigger function
UT1
Timing
定时周期cycle
Trigger signal
触发信号 Clock
时钟
Trigger
触发信号 signal
UT2
Clock
时钟
UT1UT1
cycle reaching signal UT2
周期到达信号作为 as the trigger signal of UT2
触发信号
Trigger
触发信号 signal
UT3
时钟
Clock
UT2
UT2 cycle reaching signalUT3
周期到达信号作为触发信号
as the trigger signal of UT3

7.22 Built-in auxiliary counter (Group F5.2)

Similar to the function of timer, the counter is designed for external clock (unknown frequency
variable), and timer is designed for the internal clock (known and determined frequency). With the
terminal function of analog input and output, it can transfer the counter into the function of timer.
Differences: Counter will continue to count upwards without reset, and start from 0 on until overflew.
Set
设定值 value22
Set
设定值 value11
Clock
时钟脉冲 pulse
Set value设定值
1 reaching (0.5 Sec. pulse)
1 到达(0.5s 脉冲) Reset
复位
设定值 1 1到达(电平)
Set value reaching (level)
REV after reaching

设定值 1 到达反转 set value 1
Figure 7-38-A Counter Function 1
Set
设定值value22
Set
设定值value 11
Clock
时钟脉冲 pulse
Set value设定值
2 reaching (0.5 Sec.脉冲)
2 到达(0.5s pulse) 复位
Reset
Set value
设定值 2 reaching (level)
2 到达(电平)
设定值
REV 2 到达反转
after reaching set value 2
设定值
Set value 1 或设定值
1 or set 2 到达反转
value 2 reaching REV
Figure 7-38-B Counter function 2

7.23 Auxiliary functions (Group F5.3)

F5.3.28 Priority selection of frequency
(revolution) command source (H)
This parameter applies to the situation that frequency inverter operates with V/F mode; forcedly operate
with VC, SVC modes. Automatic voltage regulation function is used for ensuring the output voltage of
frequency inverter not fluctuates as the input voltage fluctuates. In condition that grid voltage fluctuates
greatly, while stable stator voltage and current of motor is required, this function shall be operated.
Table 7-16 Frequency Setting Order of E280 Frequency Inverter:

Priority Setting Remarks
1 Inching frequency setting Top priority
In case of torque control method, frequency setting
2 Torque control method
is invalid
Priority defined by this Priority defined by this parameter shall be deleted
3 parameter (four at most) from the list of lower priority automatically
4 process PID output
Swing frequency operating
5
frequency High
6 compensation PID output
Revolving speed setting
7
channel (F8.0.00)
Automatic multiple frequency
8
operating order Low
Multi-stage operation frequency

9
selected by external terminal
Frequency setting channel
10 Lowest priority
(F0.1.16)
F5.3.29 Lower limiting frequency action mode Setting range: 0, 1 Factory default: 0
0: Output 0 frequency when it is below the lower limiting frequency
If the inverter’s frequency setting value is lower than the lower limit frequency, the output frequency of
the inverter is zero.
1: Output the lower limiting frequency when it is below the lower limiting frequency
If the inverter’s frequency setting value is lower than the lower limit frequency, the output frequency of
the inverter is the lower limit frequency.

F5.3.30 Automatic voltage regulation (only

Setting range: 0, 1, 2 Factory default: 0
effective in VVV control mode)
This parameter applies to the situation that frequency inverter operates with V/F mode; forcedly operate
with VC, SVC modes. Automatic voltage regulation function is used for ensuring the output voltage of
frequency inverter not fluctuates as the input voltage fluctuates. In condition that grid voltage fluctuates
greatly, while stable stator voltage and current of motor is required, this function shall be operated.
F5.3.31 Automatic energy-saving operation

Setting range: 0, 1 Factory default: 0
(only effective for asynchronous motors)
Magnetic flux operates optimally, and valid with asynchronous machine. Automatic energy saving
operation refers to frequency inverter can detect the load condition of motor automatically, and adjust
output voltage timely to make the motor operate at high efficient status, in order to reach optimal effect
of energy saving.
Automatic energy saving operation has the best effect when the load change of motor is of low frequentcy
and wide range. The major energy saving way is to obtain additional energy saving effect from adjusting
the status of motor excitation, to make the motor operate at optimal high efficient status, and greatly
lower the energy consumption of motor.
F5.3.32 Magnetic flux brake Setting range: 0, 1, 2 Factory default: 0
Frequency inverter can increase the magnetic flux when the motor slows down to stop, to make the
motor stop more rapidly (see figure below).
The electric energy produced during the braking process is manly consumed in form of heat inside of
the motor. Therefore, frequent braking with magnetic flow will lead to the internal temperature of the
motor increase. Please be sure the motor temperature shall not over the maximum admissible value.
When input operation order during magnetic flow braking, magnetic flow will be canceled, and frequency
inverter will speed up again to the selected frequency.
Brake torque (%)

制动转矩（%）
60 Voltage at the DC side
有磁通制动
Brake with magnetic flux
40
20 Brake unit action

Brake
无磁通制动 without magnetic flux
0 Time
25 50 Frequency
频率(Hz) Hz
Figure 7-39 Magnetic Brake curve Figure 7-40 Energy Consumption Brake

F5.3.33 Magnetic flux braking strength

Setting range: 0~100% Factory default: ☆
(brake exciting current)
This parameter defines the increased amplitude of motor magnetic flow when magnetic flow braking,
selected value is the relevant percentage of rated magnetic flow.
F5.3.34 Voltage overmodulation Setting range: 0, 1 Factory default: 1

Voltage over modulation refers to that in condition of lasting low grid voltage or lasting heavy load
operation, frequency inverter improve the output voltage with improving the utilization rate of its bus
voltage. When over modulation function is valid, output current harmonic will increase slightly.
0: Void
1: Effective
F5.3.35 Use ratio of dynamic braking Setting range: 50~100% Factory default: 100
F5.3.36 Level of dynamic braking

Setting range: 650~760V Factory default: 690
starting action
These two parameters is valid to frequency inverters with built-in braking unit (18.5 KW below),
which is used to define action parameters of built-in braking unit of frequency inverters. When the
voltage at internal direct current side of frequency inverter is higher than starting action level of
dynamic braking [F5.3.36], build in braking unit action. If there is external braking resistor, it shall
make the direct current voltage fall back, via releasing pumped-up voltage energy with braking
resistor. When the voltage at DC side drops down to a specific value, the built-in braking unit of the
frequency inverter will be closed. Refer to Figure 7-40.
Utilization rate of dynamic braking is used to define the average voltage value forced on braking
resistor of braking unit action. Voltage on braking resistor is pulse width modulation wave. Duty ratio
equals to action ratio of dynamic braking. The large the action ratio is, the faster energy releases,
and the more obvious the effect is, as well as the larger power consumed on braking resistor is.
Operator may consider setting the parameters comprehensively according to the resistance of
braking resistor, power and required braking effect.
F5.3.37 Vibration suppression coefficient

Setting range: 0.0；0.1~10.00 Factory default: 0.0
(effective only in VF control mode)
Only valid with V/F control method. Selecting this parameter can restrain the output current oscillation.
Set 0.0 to close this function. The larger the value is, the slower restraining action is and the wider the
biggest adjustment range is

F5.3.38 Load dynamic balance function Setting range: 0, 1, 2 Factory default: 0
F5.3.39 Reference source for dynamic balance load Setting range: 0 ~ 4 Factory default: 0
F5.3.40 Reference value for dynamic balance load Setting range: 0.0~200.0% Factory default: 100.0
F5.3.41 Dynamic balance adjustment gain 0.0 ~ 100.00 (%) Factory default: 50.00
F5.3.42 Dynamic balance adjustment limit 0.0 ~ 100.00 (%) Factory default: 1.00
Load dynamic balance function is used for balancing load with multiple motors linkage, or occasions
requiring torque motor characteristics of "Frequency inverter-asynchronous electrical units".When this
function is valid, frequency inverter shall take the input value of dynamic balance load reference source
(relative value of rated current) as reference, automatically amend the input of frequency/revolving
speed integrator, adjusting output frequency to balance the load. The adjustment to output frequency for
dynamic balance function is relatively slow, and influenced by selections of acceleration and deceleration
time.
If rapid response of linkage balance operation is required, please apply with linkage operation
self-balancing function (referring to instruction of parameters in FA group), or applying with compensation
PID to build flexibly as necessary, which can conduct adjustment directly to the output of frequency
integrator.
Adjusting gain value=[F5.3.41]*rated current of equipment/100, when the difference of output current
and reference value reaches the adjusting gain value, output frequency will drop to the adjusting
amplitude limit value.
Adjusting amplitude limit value= [F5.3.42]*current selected frequency/100; this value is the amplitude
peak of dynamic balance adjustment.
Load 负载
Reference
参照负载load
（F5.3.39） Output frequency
(F5.3.39)
Time
时间 Adjusting amplitude
limiting value
Frequency
频率 Adjusting gain
Reference value
value
[F5.3.42]
[F5.3.42]
Output limit
Time
时间
Adjusting area
Figure 7-41 Sketch of Load Dynamic Balance Function Figure 7-42 Sketch of Dynamic Balance Variables

7.24 Multi-stage frequency setting (Group F6.0)

F6.0.00~ F6.0.14 Opening
Setting range: [ F0.1.22]~[ F0.1.21] Factory default: 5.00~50.00
frequency 1st~15th
The parameter is for the setup of multi-stage operation's frequency and can be used to multistage
velocity operation and simple programmable multi-stage operation. Refer to the detailed specifica-
tions of multi-velocity control function 1, 2, 3, 4 of multifunctional input terminals F3.0.00-F3.0.07
and simple programmable multistage operation in F6.1 group parameters. Frequency inverter can
transform frequency and direction automatically according to the running time to satisfy the require-
ment of technology, as Figure 7-43-A shown.
f14
f3
d4 a14 a15
f2 a3
f4 f13 f15
a2
f1 d5
a13 d15
a1
PLC running
PLC运行
a5 d13
f5
T1 T2 T3 T4 T5 T6~T12 T13 T14 T15
PLC stage completion

PLC阶段完成指示
indicator
PLC cycling completion

PLC循环完成指示
indicator
Figure 7-43-A Simple PLC Operation
In the figure, a1-a15 and d1-d15 are current stage's time of acceleration and deceleration, while
f1-f15 and T1-T15 are current stage's given frequency and operating time. All these will be defined
in this parameter respectively.
The completion of simple programmable multi-stage operation for stage, cycle and so on can access
to multifunctional output terminals or relay's output index signal. Refer to Function 20, 21 (multi-stage
operation completed) and 22 (multi-stage operating cycle completed) among the F3.1.15-F3.1.20.

7.25 Simple programmable multi-stage operation (Group F6.1)

F6.1.15 Selection of programmable
multi-stage speed operation mode (H)
The Unit: Function selection

0: Function off
1: Multi-stage frequency/revolution operation effective
If frequency (revolution) instruction source priority allows, the frequency converter operates in multi-stage
frequency/revolution.
2: Multi-stage frequency/revolution operation condition effective
When multifunctional input terminal (Function No.23) is valid, frequency inverter operates in multi-stage
frequency/revolution; when it is invalid, frequency inverter will automatically access to frequency setup
mode allowed to the lower priority.
3: Multi-stage PID setting operation effective
When the process PID starts its function, the setup of PID should be set automatically according to
given time cycle, at most 7 stages being set (F7.1.27 ~ F7.1.33).
4: Multi-stage PID setting operation condition effective
When multifunctional input terminal (Function No. 23) is valid, the multi-stage setting of process PID is
also valid, at most 7 stages being set (F7.1.27 ~ F7.1.33).
Tens: Operation mode

0: Single cycle
Frequency inverter should firstly operate with first multi-stage speed set frequency and output each
velocity's frequency according to given operating time. If the given operating time of a certain velocity is
of zero, jump out of the velocity; with a cycle's operation, the frequency inverter should stop outputting
and input an effective operating instruction once again to run the next cycle. See Figure 7-43-B.
f14
f3
d4 a14 a15
f2 a3
f4 f13 f15
a2
f1 d5
a13 d15
PLC running a1
PLC运行
a5 f5 d13
T1 T2 T3 T4 T5 T6~T12 T13 T14 T15
PLCRUN指令
command
Figure 7-47-B Simple PLC operation single cycle mode

1: Single cycle stop mode

The basic operation mode is the same as mode 0 and its difference is that after frequency inverter
operates a stage speed, it firstly lowers the output frequency to zero according to specified
deceleration time, then outputs next stage's frequency.
Frequency
频率
[F6.0.03]
[F6.0.02]
[F6.0.35]
[F6.0.01]
[F6.0.34]
[F6.0.00]
Time
时间
[F6.0.31]
[F6.0.05]
[F6.0.32] [F6.0.33]
[F6.0.36]
[F6.0.04]
Running command
运行指令
Stage
阶段结束 end
DO
DOoutput
输出
Cycle
周期结束 end
DO
DOoutput
输出
Figure 7-43-C Single cycle stop mode of simple PLC operation
2: Continuous cycling mode

As shown in the figure, the frequency inverter starts next cycle after automatically after it finishes a cycle
until it receives stop instruction.
First circulation Second circulation
RUN command
Figure 7-43-D Continuous Cycling Mode of Simple PLC

3: Continuous cycle stop mode

Basic operation mode is the same as mode 2 and its difference is that after frequency inverter operates
a stage speed, it firstly lowers the output frequency to zero according to specified deceleration time,
then outputs next stage's frequency.
4: Keeping the final value
As shown in the figure, the frequency inverter will keep the last stage's operation frequency and
direction automatically after it finishes a cycle.
f14
f3
d4 a14 a15
f2 a3
f15
f4 f13
a2
f1 d5
a13
PLC PLC运行
running a1
a5 f5 d13
T1 T2 T3 T4 T5 T6~T12 T13 T14 T15
RUNRUN指令
command
Figure 7-43-E Simple PLC Operation Keeping the Final Value mode
5: Keeping the final value stop mode

Basic operation mode is the same as mode 4 and its difference is that after frequency inverter operates
a stage speed, it firstly lowers the output frequency to zero according to specified deceleration time,
then outputs next stage's frequency.
Hundreds: Selection of breakpoint/stop recovery mode

0: Restore running at the first stage
In simple programmable multi-stage operation, frequency inverter will clear out current operation state
automatically after it stops because of error stop or stop instruction; restore running at the first stage
after it starts again.
1: Start running at the interruption time (effective for multi-stage frequency/revolution operation)
In simple programmable multi-stage operation, frequency inverter will record the stage operation time
and operation frequency automatically at the interrupting time after it stops because of error stop or stop
instruction; start running at the interruption time after it starts again.
2: Start running at the stage of interruption
In simple programmable multi-stage operation, frequency inverter will record the stage operation time
and operation frequency automatically at the interrupting time after it stops because of error stop or stop
instruction; start running at the stage of interruption after it starts again. The single difference between
mode 1 and 2 is the different frequencies at the stage of interruption. See as Figure 7-44.

Interruption signal
中断信号
f1
Output frequency (Hz) d2

输出频率Hz
a1
d2 f3
f2 a3
a2
Start run from the

从中断时刻开始运行
interruption time Time (t)
时间t
Stage 1 Running time Remained
of stage 2 time of stage 2
Output frequency (Hz) f1
d2
f3
a1 f2 a3
a2
Start run from the stage
setting at the interruption
Time
时间t (t)
ti
Stage 1 Running time Remained
of stage 2 time of stage 2
Figure 7-44 Breakpoint Recovery Sketch
Kilobit: Power-off status storage

0: Not save
When the frequency converter fails power, it does not save the simple programmable multi-stage
operation status and starts operating from the first stage after being powered on again.
1: Save
When the frequency converter fails power, it saves the simple programmable multi-stage operation
status, including the power-off status, operation frequency, operated time, and operates according to the
parameter's breakpoint/stop recovery mode of hundred definition after being powered on again.
F6.1.16~ F6.1.30 Setting of stage 1~15 Setting range: 0000~1321 Factory default: 0000
The unit: Operating frequency source/setting source at each stage

0: Multi-stage frequency setting 1~15/Process PID multi-stage setting 1~7 (1~7)
Setting values of stage operation frequency should be set by multi-stage frequency setting 1~15
(Group F6.0)/Process PID multi-stage setting 1~7 (Group F7.1).
1: Frequency command (F0.2.25)/Process PID setting (F7.0.01)
Setting values of stage operation frequency should be set by frequency command (F0.2.25)/ Process
PID setting (F7.0.01).

7.26 Swing frequency operation (Group F6.2)

Swing frequency operation is regulated by high and low boundary of frequency. If the function's
parameter group is improper, swing frequency operates properly.
Running frequency
运行频率 Swing frequency amplitude
[F6.2.50]×摆频幅值
Swing frequency Frequency

摆频中心频率 at the
摆频幅值
amplitude center of the swing
frequency
[F6.2.53]
[F6.2.47] [F6.2.51] [F6.2.52]
[F0.2.25] Confirmed external

确定的外部频率设定值
frequency set value
时间
Time
[F6.2.48]
Figure 7-45 Schematic diagram of swing frequency operation
F6.2.46 Function selecting (H) Setting range: 0000~1112 Factory default: 0000
The unit: Function setting
0: Function off The functional parameter of Group F6.2 is invalid.
1: Function effective.
In case that the priority of frequency (revolution) instruction source allows by, the frequency inverter
adopts swing function.
2: Terminal selectivity effective
When the multifunctional input terminal of definition 24 (swing operation input) is valid, the frequency
inverter adopts swing function In case that the priority of frequency (revolution) instruction source allows.
If it is invalid, frequency converter operates in accordance with the setting value of preset frequency
F6.2.47 of swing frequency. In this mode, waiting time of preset frequency is invalid.
F6.2.47 Preset frequency of swing frequency Setting range: 0.00~[F0.1.21] Factory default: 10.00
F6.2.48 Waiting time of preset frequency Setting range: 0.0~6000.0Sec. Factory default: 0.0
Preset frequency is referred to the operation frequency before frequency inverter adopts swing
frequency operation or breaks away from operation frequency of swing frequency operation. Determine
the operation mode of preset frequency according to the instruction of swing frequency function.
When the selected swing frequency function is valid ([F6.2.46]＝###1), frequency inverter starts swing
frequency preset frequency after running, then runs the swing frequency operation status after the
waiting time [F6.2.48] of preset frequency.
In case of the selected swing frequency function terminal is available ([F6.2.46]＝###2), when swing
frequency operation input terminal is valid, frequency inverter runs the swing frequency operation status;
When it is invalid, frequency converter outputs preset frequency ([F6.2.47]), and the waiting time of
preset frequency is unavailable.

F6.2.49 Swing frequency amplitude Setting range: 0.0~50.0 (%) Factory default: 10.0
Swing frequency amplitude is the ratio of swing frequency amplitude.

When it occurs to fixed swing frequency amplitude ([F6.2.46]＝#0##), mathematics of practical swing
frequency amplitude is:
Practical Swing frequency amplitude= [F6.2.49] × maximum frequency [F0.1.20]
When it occurs to changeable swing frequency amplitude ([F6.2.46]＝#1##), mathematics of practical
swing frequency amplitude is:
Practical Swing frequency amplitude= [F6.2.49] × (preset frequency of swing frequency center
[F6.2.53] +frequency set value F0.2.25)
F6.2.50 Sudden jump frequency Setting range: 0.0~50.0(%) Factory default: 10.0
Sudden jump frequency is the amplitude of frequency's fast descending after it reaches upper
boundary in swing frequency cycle, that is, the amplitude of frequency's fast ascending after it reaches
lower boundary. Please refer to Reference Diagram 7-50 for details.
Practical sudden jump frequency = [F6.2.50] × practical swing frequency amplitude.
F6.2.51 Triangular wave rising time Setting range: 0.1~1000.0Sec. Factory default: 10.0
F6.2.52 Triangular wave decreasing time Setting range: 0.1~1000.0Sec. Factory default: 10.0
The parameter in this group is referred to acceleration and deceleration slope in the process of swing
frequency.
Triangular wave rising time is referred to the time spent from the lower boundary frequency to the
upper boundary frequency in swing frequency operation, that is, the acceleration time in the cycle of
swing frequency operation.
Triangular wave decreasing time is referred to the time spent from the upper boundary frequency to
the lower boundary frequency in swing frequency operation, that is, the deceleration time in the cycle
of swing frequency operation.
The sum of triangular wave rising time and decreasing time is the swing frequency operation cycle.
F6.2.53 Setting of swing frequency

center frequency
The swing frequency center frequency refers to the center value of frequency converter output
frequency in the process of swing frequency operation.
Center frequency of actual output = [F6.2.53] + set frequency confirmed by F0.2.25.

Refer to the following figure for the structure of Process PID and functions of each functional parameter:
Process PID setting channel

过程PID设定通道［F7.2.34］～［F7.2.38］
100%
［F7.0.17］
AI1 PID Sleep
AI2 Frequency function 0 or 0~[F0.1.21]
setting
……
Kp setting
0～[F0.1.21] 0或0～[F0.1.21]
1 0 上限频率
Upper limiting
[F7.0.4] [F7.0.5] Setting + frequency
[F7.0.02] combination + 1 + Torque setting
TiS MUX
100% - -1 +
［F7.0.18］ Independent
AI1 Deviation PID
PID [F7.0.01] 1 Output polarity
AI2 M 偏差极性
polarity Kd.S 输出极性限制 AO output
1+TdS AO输出
……
setting U li itTens) [F7.0.00]

(F7.0.21
X
（F7.0.21个位）
(F7.0.21 Unit) （F7.0.21十位）
2 0 控制器输出
Controller output
[F7.0.6] [F7.0.7] ［F7.0.19］［F7.0.20］
Process PID feedback
[F7.0.03] 过程PID反馈通道
channel
100%
AI1
PLC-PIDST1 PID
Feedback AI2
……
Multi-stage 反馈1
……
……
1
PID setting Feedback 0
*K 反馈
PLC-PIDST7 combination [F7.0.12] [F7.0.13]
组合
[F7.0.10]
100%
［F7.1.27］～［F7.1.33］
[F7.0.16] AI1
PID
Feedback
AI2
反馈2
……
[F7.0.09] 1
0
[F7.0.14] [F7.0.15]
[F7.0.11]
Figure 7-46 Schematic Block of Process PID Control
V350 Low-Power Closed-Loop Vector Inverter User Manual

7.27 Process PID (4ms control cycle) (Group F7.0)

F7.0.04 Analog input quantity Setting range: 0.0V~[F7.0.05]/
corresponding to 0% setting (Channel 1) AI2：0.0mA~[F7.0.05]
F7.0.05 Analog input quantity Setting range: [F7.0.04] ~10.00 /
corresponding to 100% setting (Channel 1) AI2：[F7.0.04] ~20.00mA
F7.0.06 Analog input quantity Setting range: 0.0V~[F7.0.07]/
corresponding to 0% setting (Channel 2) AI2：0.0mA~[F7.0.07]
F7.0.07 Analog input quantity Setting range: [F7.0.06] ~10.00 /
corresponding to 100% setting (Channel 2) AI2：[F7.0.06] ~20.00mA
When analog channel input is selected for setting source of process PID, corresponding relationship
between set value of process PID and analog port can be altered with this group of parameters. The
corresponding relationship is shown in Figure 7-47.
F7.0.12 Analog feedback quantity corres- Setting range: 0.0~[F7.0.13]/

ponding to 0% feedback (feedback channel 1) AI2: 0.0mA~[F7.0.13]
F7.0.13 Analog feedback quantity correspo- Setting range: [F7.0.12] ~10.00V /
nding to 100% feedback (feedback channel 1) AI2: [F7.0.12] ~20.00mA
F7.0.14 Analog feedback quantity correspo- Setting range: 0.0~[F7.0.15]/
nding to 0% feedback (feedback channel 2) AI2: 0.0mA~[F7.0.15]
F7.0.15 Analog feedback quantity correspo- Setting range: [F7.0.14] ~10.00V /
nding to 100% feedback (feedback channel 2) AI2[F7.0.14] ~20.00mA
When the analog channel input is selected for feedback source of process PID, corresponding
relationship between feedback value of process PID and analog port can be altered with this group
of parameters. The corresponding relationship is shown in Figure 7-48.
Set value of process PID Feedback value of process PID
Analog input Analog input

quantity quantity
Figure 7-47 Sketch of Definition Of Set Value of Figure 7-48 Sketch of Corresponding Relationship of
Process PID Feedback Value of Process PID

F7.0.16 Feedback multiplication factor (e.g.

flow calculation with differential pressure)
This function is mainly applied in occasions of flow calculation with differential pressure. When the
feedback value is not in accordance with the given value of process PID, while there is a certain linear
relation, this group of parameters can be selected to make it accordant of the meaning expressed by
feedback value and given value of process PID. For example, if the given value of process PID means
flow of the pipe, feedback value of process PID means flow rate of the pipe, supposing the set value of
this parameter means cross sectional area of the pipe, then the given value and feedback value of
process PID shall be in accordance.
F7.0.17 Proportional gain Setting range: 0.0~100.00 Factory default: 2.00

F7.0.18 Integral time Setting range:0.0,0.1~1000.0Sec. Factory default: 20.0
F7.0.19 Differential coefficient Setting range: 0.0，0.01~10.00 Factory default: 0.0
F7.0.20 Differential inertia filtering time Setting range: 0.01~100.00 Sec. Factory default: 10.00
Proportional gain defines the magnification of deviation. The bigger the set value is, the faster the
response of system is, but oscillation can be caused when it's too big; the smaller the set value is, the
slower the response is.
Adjusting only with proportional gain will not eliminate the deviation completely. In order to eliminate the
remained deviation, integral time shall be selected. The smaller the integral time is set, the faster the
response is, but oscillation of system can be caused when it's too big or too small.
without integral control

无积分控制 with integral control
有积分控制
target
target value deviation is
PID 目标值目标值
value 积分控制时
PID反馈 0 when with
feedback 偏差
deviation 偏差为0
integral
反馈
feedback feedback
反馈 control
time
时间 time
时间
Figure 7-49 Function of Integral Control
Differentiator can make response to the change rate of deviation. The larger the change is, the larger
the output gain is, that is, its gain is in proportion to change rate of deviation. But it won't make response
to constant deviation. When differential coefficient is 0.0, it means the differential function closing the
controller. Differential function can improve the responsibility of system.

The larger the differential coefficient is set, the stronger the differential function is. In general system,
there is no need to introduce differential link.
Larger differential inertia filtering time can make the differential adjustment more smooth, generally, it's
set in proportion to the inertia of system.
F7.0.21 PID controller characteristics configuretion(H) Setting range: 0000~0111 Factory default: 0000
The unit: Dviation polarity
0: Positive deviation When feedback signal gets weaker, PID output is increased.
1: Negative deviation When feedback signal gets weaker, PID output is decreased.
Tens digit: output polarity
0: Single polarity 1: Dual polarity
For single polarity of PID control mode, output of PID adjuster is always positive value, lower limit is
0. For frequency settings, operation direction of frequency inverter is determined with external
control order, while PID output can't change the operation direction. Generally, it applies for devices
without motor reversal for water and pressure delivery. Refer to Figure 7-50-A.
For dual polarity of PID control mode, output of PID adjuster is negative value. For frequency
settings, operation direction of frequency inverter is determined with external control order and
"exclusive OR" calculation of PID output direction, and PID output can change the operation
direction. If the direction lock parameter (F0.1.17) is valid, efficient PID output shall take the absolute
value. Refer to Figure 7-50-A and Figure 7-50-B.
Permitted limiting
value of deviation PID feedback
PID feedback PID 反馈
PID 反馈
Deviation limiting (F7.0.22)
range (F7.0.22)
偏差允许限值[F7.0.22]
偏差限幅[F7.0.22] PID setting
PID 设定
Time
时间
Output
Time
时间输出频率
frequency For dual polarity of PID control,
For single polarity of output 双极性
frequency can change
PID 控制时，输
输出频率 PID, when output the出频率会改变相序
phase sequence
frequency is 0, the
单极性 PID 时，当输出频时间
direction
率降到doesn't
0，不改变方向 change
Output Time
frequency
Time
时间
Figure 7-50-A Single Polarity of PID Control Mode Figure 7-50-B Dual Polarity of PID Control Mode

F7.0.22 Permitted static deviation

Setting range: 0.0~20.0% Factory default: 5.0
(relative 100% setting)
Controller output value is the permitted maximum deviation amount with given value of controller.
When feedback value is within the range of maximum deviation range, the controller stops adjusting.
Proper setting of his function contributes to covering the accuracy and stability of output of system.
Feedback 反馈量
PID feedback
amount
Given amount 静态偏差

Static deviation
给定量
时间
Time
Output frequency
输出频率
时间
Time
Figure 7-51 Sketch of Static Deviation
F7.0.23 PID output preset (relative to the

Setting range: 0.0~100.00(%) Factory default: 0.0
upper limit frequency for output frequency)
F7.0.24 Preset hold time before PID starting Setting range: 0.0~3600.0Sec. Factory default: 0.0
This function can make it earlier to access to the sable stage for PID adjustment. Preset value of PID
output is the relevant percentage of upper limiting frequency [F0.1.21].
When frequency inverter start to operate, first of all, it shall be sped up to the preset frequency of PID,
and operate as closed-loop characteristics after running continually for a while at this point of frequency
[F7.0.24].
输出频率
output
feedback value of process PID
frequency preset frequency
预置频率过程PID反馈值
100%
feedback value of
sensor
传感器反馈数值
time
0
时间T [F7.0.26] [F7.0.25]
预置频率保持时间
retention time of preset frequency
Figure 7-52 Sketch of Closed-Loop Frequency Figure 7-53 Relationship Curve of Feedback Percentage
Operation and Preset Corresponding Sensor Value

F7.0.25 Actual sensor value (range)

corresponding to 100% feedback
F7.0.26 Actual sensor value corresponding

Setting range: -100.00~100.00 Factory default: 0.0
to 0% feedback
This group of parameter determines the corresponding relationship between feedback percentage and
feedback physical quantity, which determines display values of monitoring parameters d0.1.36 and
d0.1.37. Corresponding relationship curve is shown in Figure 7-53.
7.28 Process PID multi-stage setting (Group F7.1)

F7.1.27~F7.1.33 Process PID multi-stage
Setting range: -100.0~100.0(%) Factory default: 0.0
preset 1-7
This group of parameter defines the set value of process PID multi-stage operation. Set value is the
relevant percentage of process PID set value determined in F7.0.01.
Multi-stage operation of process PID can be flexibly realized with multifunction input terminal, please
refer to function instruction of given terminal 1, 2, 3(28~30) of multi-stage process PID of terminal
function F3.0.00~F3.0.08. Please refer to notes of parameters F6.1.15~F6.1.45.
7.29 Process PID sleeping function (Group F7.2)

This function is valid when PID output conducts frequency order; Sketch is shown as below:
Output frequency
T<[F7.2.36] [F7.2.36]
[F7.2.35]
Stop Start Time(T)

PID feedback
PID given value

[F7.2.38]
Awaken
deviation[F7.2.37]
Time(T)
Figure 7-54 Sketch of PID sleeping function
Set value of awakens deviation F7.2.37 is the relevant percentage of PID given
value.

7.30 Revolution setting and feedback (Group F8.0)
KD
[F8.1.29]
Given revolution + Speed + Given torque
给定转速速度误差
error 1 + 转矩给定
Ts
- +
Feedback revolution [F8.1.30]
反馈转速 Kd S
1
1+TdS
转矩限制
Torque limit
[F8.1.21]~[F8.1.28]
Figure 7-55 Closed-Loop Block Diagram of Revolution
This group of parameter is valid with VC and SVC modes.
F8.0.00 Revolution setting channel (only for

VC and SVC mode)
This parameter is used to define revolution setting channel. Selecting mode of revolution setting channel
is similar with that of frequency setting source channel. Refer to instruction of F0.2.25 parameter.
0：Set by frequency setting parameter (F0.2.25)
Revolution set value is obtained from transition of frequency set value selected by F0.2.25: revolution
setting=frequency set value*60/ pairs of motor polarity
1：Digital setting (F8.0.03) (stop holdup and storage after power-off)
Value of F8.0.03 is set as revolution set value, automatically preserved when outage.
2: Panel shuttle potentiometer setting
Revolution set value is given by revolving panel shuttle potentiometer.
3：Analog input AI1

4：Analog input AI2
5: Analog input AI3 (Bipolarity)
Take the pulse signal input by pulse input port Fin as revolution set value.
7：MODBUS Fieldbus set value 1
8：MODBUS Fieldbus set value 2
9：Virtual analog input SAI1

10: Virtual analog inputSAI2
Note: Select revolution setting channels 3~7, upper and lower limiting parameters shall be correctly
selected F8.0.01 and F8.0.02.

F8.0.01 Minimum set signal corresponding Setting range: 0~60*[F0.1.21]/

Factory default: 0
revolution pairs of motor poles (rpm)
F8.0.02 Maximum set signal corresponding Setting range: 0~60*[F0.1.21]/
Factory default: 1500
revolution (upper frequency limiting) pairs of motor poles (rpm)
This parameter is used to set the relationship curve of set value and corresponding motor revolution
when revolution channel is analog input port of this parameter
Motor revolution
电机转速
[F8.0.02]
[F8.0.01]
0
最小
Minimum 最大
Maximum 转速
Revolution
set value set value channel
设定值设定值通道设定
setting
Figure 7-56 Corresponding Relation of Revolution Set Value and Motor Revolution
F8.0.06 PG rotation direction (valid for PG card) Setting range: 0,1 Factory default: 0
In the system of inductive vector controlling, frequency inverter output phase sequence (depending on
the connection order between the motor and frequency inverter U, V, W) and the connection order
between pulses of encoder Phase A and Phase B should keep uniform. Or it can't function normally and
cause the Fu. 020 fault or 0 speed shock when starting. Then it can be solved with modifying the
parameter.
Systems of tension control or hoisting equipment, etc, which may lead to motor shaft
side-pulling, may result in Fu.020 fault and at this moment please shield the protective
function (FF.1.22 = # 0 # #).
F8.0.09 Revolution check /control cycle Setting range: 0~0805 Factory default: 0101
When revolution feedback channel selects an encoder, the parameter sets speed check cycle.
The parameter should set smaller values; overlarge revolution check cycle may lead to unstable
closed-loop running and decelerate response. When use larger check cycle for ensuring the exactness
of measuring speed, please lower the proportionality factors F8.1.21, F8.1.25 (default parameters) of
revolution closed-loop regulator and enlarge integral time constants F8.1.22, F8.1.26 (default parameters)
moderately.

F8.0.11 Missing detection and action of

speed detection signal
F8.0.12 Wire breakage zero speed signal
Setting range: 0~20.0(%) Factory default: 0.0
level (relative to maximum set speed)
When set revolution is bigger than the wire breakage zero speed signal level (its set value is relative to
the percentage of the largest set speed [F8.0.02]), while feedback speed is smaller than wire breakage
zero speed signal level, and revolution of frequency inverter checks wire breakage protective function
after keeping the set time of F8.0.11.
F8.0.13 Speed measuring loop wire

breakage detection flexibility (relative to Setting range: 0.1~100.0 Factory default: 5.0
maximum set speed)
If speed measuring loop interference is great, it can enlarge [F8.0.13] to prevent wrong judgments from
interference; otherwise decrease the set value to strengthen the response speed of the system to wire
breakage check.
F8.0.14 Detection revolution filtering time

Setting range: 0，1~50mS Factory default: 0mS
coefficient
Filtering time coefficient of set revolution feedback in this parameter is available to all of the speed
measuring modes (channels). When use encoder for speed measuring, the function is similar to check
cycle parameter (F8.0.09), therefore there is a need to set smaller values for the system of fast-speed
response.
F8.0.15 The minimum revolution

Setting range: 0~30000rpm Factory default: 0
corresponding to the feedback signal (not PG)
F8.0.16 Corresponding revolution of the

Setting range: 0~30000rpm Factory default: 1500
largest feedback signal (non-PG)
The parameter is used to set relations between revolution feedback signal (feedback channel 1~4) and
the corresponding to the motor feedback.
Motor revolution
Minimum Maximum Revolution

set value set value channel setting
Figure 7-57 Corresponding Relation of Revolution Feedback Value and Motor Revolution

7.31 Revolution closed-loop parameter (Group F8.1)

F8.1.18 Controller parameter selection Setting range: 0,1,2 Factory default: 2
0: Single PID parameter (the second group of parameters is effective by default)
1: Dual PID parameter (hysteresis switching)
2: Dual PID parameter (continuous switching)
ASR-PID ASR-PID
P＝ [F8.1.25] P＝ [F8.1.25]
I＝ [F8.1.26] I＝ [F8.1.26]
D＝ [F8.1.27] D＝ [F8.1.27]
P＝ [F8.1.21] P＝ [F8.1.21]
I＝ [F8.1.22] I＝ [F8.1.22]
D＝ [F8.1.23] Motor revolution D＝ [F8.1.23] Motor revolution
0 [F8.1.19] [F8.1.20] 0 [F8.1.19] [F8.1.20]
Figure 7-58-A Double PID parameter (hysteresis Figure 7-58-B Double PID parameter (continuous
switching) switching)
F8.1.19 PID revolution with parameter

switching (ASR1 group parameters Setting range: 0~[F8.1.20] Factory default: 100
effective at low revolution)
F8.1.20 PID parameter switching Setting range: [F8.1.19]~60*[F0.1.21]
Factory default: 300
upper limiting revolution Motor pole pairs (rpm)
The parameters are effective in the condition of double PID parameter hysteresis switching; the first
group parameter is effective when it is lower than the switching lower revolution [F8.1.18]; the second
group parameter is effective when it is higher than the switching upper revolution [F8.1.19].
F8.1.21 Proportional gain 1 (ASR-P1) Setting range: 0.50~1.20 Factory default: 1.00
Setting range:
F8.1.22 Integral time 1 (ASR-I1) Factory default: 1.50
0.0，0.01~50.00Sec.
F8.1.23 Differential coefficient 1 (ASR-D1) Setting range: 0.0，0.01~10.00 Factory default: 0.0
F8.1.24 Differential output filtering

Setting range: 0.10~5.00 Sec. Factory default: 1.00
constant 1 (ASR-FT1)
F8.1.25 Proportional gain 2 (ASR-P2) Setting range: 0.50~1.20 Factory default: 0.80
Setting range:
F8.1.26 Integral time 2 (ASR-I2) Factory default: 5.00
0.0，0.01~50.00Sec.
F8.1.27 Differential coefficient 2 (ASR-D2) Setting range: 0.0，0.01~10.00 Factory default: 0.0
F8.1.28 Differential output filtering

Setting range: 0.10~10.00 Sec. Factory default: 1.00

The parameters are applied to adjust proportional gain of speed adjuster, integral time and differential
coefficient. Each parameter should be set as following:
1) Proportional gain P: As value is bigger, the response id faster, however the stability of system is
worse and overlarge gain can lead to revolution shock.
2) Integral time coefficient I: As value is greater, the response id faster, and the revolution over-adjusting
is greater, while the stability is worse. In general, the parameters are direct proportional to system
inertia. When inertia is great, the parameter also set with great value.
3) Differential coefficient D: it is the reverse to differential time constant; there is no need in general
system and it should be set to be zero. Differential adjusting in reality is a kind of trend forecasting
adjustment; the parameter set is bigger, the differential function is stronger. Proper differential set
can fast the response speed, improve the stability, and it is used to the system with requirements of
less inertia and fast response.
4) Differential output filtering time constant DT: Differential output to the adjuster for a stage of inertia
filtering time constant is generally set direct proportion to system inertia.
F8.1.29 Adjustor output upper limit

Setting range: 0.0~250.0(%) Factory default: 200.0
amplitude (transient positive torque limit)
F8.1.30 Adjuster output lower limit
Setting range: -250.0~0.0(%) Factory default: -200.0
amplitude (transient negative torque limit )
The parameter is applied to set adjuster output amplitude and limit system's transient forward and
backward torque. Its set value is the percentage corresponding to rated torque.
Actual output torque is also limited by adjuster output lower limit amplitude [F1.4.47]
and should pick up the lower among the two. When running acceleration and
deceleration, it is mainly limited by electricity limit level.

7.32 Protective parameters (Group F8.2)

F8.2.32 Excessive action of revolution deviation (DEV) Setting range: 0~3 Factory default: 0
F8.2.33 Over speed (OS) detection action Setting range: 0~3 Factory default: 1
The parameter is used to set excessive action of revolution deviation (DEV) and over speed (OS)
detection action.
0: No action
Inverter keeps on running without reporting any fault or warning message.

1: Alarm free stop
Inverter immediately blockades output and reports overlarge deviation of rotating speed of Fu.018
(DEV)/Fu.019 over-speed fault, while electric motor freely coasts to stop
2: Alarm deceleration stop
Inverter slows down to stop according to effective time of deceleration, and reports overlarge deviation
of rotating speed (Fu.018) or over-speed (OS) fault (Fu.019).

3: Alarm continuing running
Inverter keeps on running, whereas reports overlarge deviation of rotating speed (aL.018) or overspeed
(OS) warning (aL.019) at the same time.
F8.2.34 Detected value of excessive

Setting range: 0.0~50.0(%) Factory default: 20.0(%)
F8.2.35 Detection time of excessive
These parameters are used to set detecting value and time for overlarge deviation of rotating speed
(DEV).
Provided that deviation of rotating speed is continuously greater than given DEV detecting value within
given DEV detecting time [F8.2.35], then inverter shall be in line with the setting action of F8.2.32. Set
value of F8.2.34 is corresponding to the percentage of upper limit frequency [F0.1.21].
F8.2.36 Detected value of over speed (OS) Setting range: 0.0~150.0(%) Factory default: 120.0(%)
F8.2.37 Detection time of over speed (OS) Setting range: 0.0~2.00Sec. Factory default: 0.10
These parameters are used to set detecting value and time of over-speed (OS).
Provided that feedback rotating speed is continuously faster than given OS detecting value within given
OS detecting time [F8.2.37], then inverter shall be in line with the setting action of F8.2.33. Set value of
F8.2.36 is corresponding to the percentage of upper limit frequency [F0.1.21].

7.33 Torque control (Group F8.3)

F8.3.40 Selection of torque command channel
(instruction fetch direction)
Take the set value of F8.3.41 as given value of torque, and conduct power failure storage.
1: Panel shuttle potentiometer setting
Set value of torque is given by rotational shuttle potentiometer
2: Analog input AI1
AI1 input voltage value of 0~10V is corresponding to 0~300% of rated torque
3: Analog input AI2
AI2 input current value of 4~20mA is corresponding to 0~300% of rated torque
4: Analog input AI3
AI3 input voltage value of -10~10V are corresponding to 0~300% of rated torque
5: Analog input AI3 (bipolarity)
AI3 input voltage value of -10~10V is corresponding to -300%~300% of rated torque; positive and
negative input of AI3 are corresponding to positive and negative instruction value of torque.
Maximum value of input frequency of Fin terminal is corresponding to 300% of rated torque.
For process PID output that given as torque instruction, F7.0.00 parameter needs to be set as #1## for
matching.
8: Reserved
Default 0 revolution setting
Current torque instruction of inverter is set by principal computer through built-in standard RS485
communication interface of inverter. It is the relative value of the maximum set torque.
Current torque instruction of inverter is set by principal computer through built-in standard RS485
communication interface of inverter. It is the absolute value of the maximum set torque.
F8.3.41 Torque digital setting Setting range: -250~250(%) Factory default: 0.0
Its set value, the setting with symbols (direction), is corresponding to the percentage of rated torque;
actual given direction of torque is “Exclusive OR” of control command direction and set value direction.

7.34 MODBUS fieldbus (Standard expansion card configuration) (Group FA.0)

FA.0.02 Local station address Setting range: 0~247 Factory default: 1
This parameter is used to set the address of the local inverter in the case of serial port commu-
nication. It is only effective when the inverter is a slave one. During communication, the local device
only receives commands for the data frames consistent with the address of this device, and then
sends back response frames.
0 is the broadcasting address. When it is set to the broadcasting address, the

device will only receive and execute broadcasting commands of the master device
and will not respond to the master device.
FA.0.03 Local inverter response delay Setting range: 0~1000mS Factory default: 5 mS
The response delay of the inverter refers to the waiting time since the inverter serial port has
received and explained the command sent from the slave device till the response frames are sent.
FA.0.04 Communication failure judging time Setting range: 0.01~10.00Sec. Factory default: 1.00
If the local inverter has not received correct data signal beyond the time interval defined by this
parameter, then the communication is judged to be failed for the local inverter. The inverter will
report Fu.071 fault, and will act as set by FA.0.05.
7.35 Mapping parameter access (Group FA.1)

FA.1.08~FA.1.13 Mapping application
Setting range: F0.00~FF.55 Factory default: F0.29/ F0.32
parameter 1~6 (H)
FA.1.14~FA.1.23 Mapping status

Setting range: d0.00~d1.49 Factory default: d0.00~d0.09
parameter 1~10 (H)
When E580 series inverter makes access to functional parameters or monitoring parameters via the
buss, corresponding address can be predicted directly with the functional code (refer to Chapter 10.
Description of Communication Protocols). However, when it is needed to access multiple functional
parameters or monitoring parameters with discontinuous address, multiple-frame data are needed in
this method.
The mapping parameter access is actually a needle access mode. When accessing (reading or writing)
several functional parameters or status parameters with discontinuous address, these parameters can
be mapped into an area with continuous address (bus-control parameter area) for accessing.
See the following table for the bus-control parameters of E580 series inverters.

Register Name Access address Remarks

Control word 0x1300 Can be read as per the loops (1~16)
Set value 1 0x1301 Setting of relative values
Set value 2 0x1302 Setting of absolute values
Mapping application parameter 1 0x1303 The access parameter is set by FA.1.08.
Mapping application parameter 3 0x1305 The access parameter is set by FA.1.10
Status word 0x1309 Can be read as per the discrete quantity (1~16)
Mapping status parameter 1 0x130A The access parameter is set by FA.1.14.
Mapping status parameter 2 0x130B The access parameter is set by FA.1.15.
Mapping status parameter 3 0x130C The access parameter is set by FA.1.16.
Mapping status parameter 4 0x130D The access parameter is set by FA.1.17.
Mapping status parameter 5 0x130E The access parameter is set by FA.1.18.
Mapping status parameter 6 0x130F The access parameter is set by FA.1.19.
Mapping status parameter 7 0x1310 The access parameter is set by FA.1.20.
The mapping parameters are determined by FA.1 group of parameters.
For example, in one frame of standard MODBUS protocol data, it’s impossible to read the status
parameters d0.0.02, d0.0.05, d1.0.01 and d1.1.31 and status word once and for all with a common method. To
map status parameters into the bus-controlled parameter area with continuous address, set with the following
method:
[FA.1.14]=d0.02
[FA.1.15]=d0.05
[FA.1.16]=d1.01
[FA.1.17]=d1.31
Then you it just needs to read the data in the continuous address 0x130A ~ 0x130D.

7.36 Communication linkage synchronous control (Group FA.2)

FA.2.26 Linkage setting proportion coefficient Setting range: 0.010~10.000 Factory default: 1.000
This parameter can correct the proportion of the set value received from the communication port.
During linkage control, this parameter defines the proportion between the output frequency of the
master machine and the slave machine.
FA.2.27 Fine adjustment source for linkage

proportion coefficient
0: No fine adjustment
If the fine adjustment source for linkage proportion coefficient is void, then:
Slave frequency command = master frequency command * [FA.2.26] of the salve machine.
1: Analog input Al1
If AI1 is selected for the fine adjustment source for linkage proportion coefficient, then:
Slave frequency command = master frequency command * [FA.2.26] of the salve machine *AI1/AI1
maximum.
2: Analog input Al2
maximum.
3: Analog input Al3
maximum.
FA.2.28 Slave machine offset frequency/revolution Setting range: 0, 1, 2 Factory default: 0
This parameter of the master inverter does not function, and it is used to select the auxiliary
frequency of the slave machine:
Actual output frequency of the salve machine=master machine frequency command * slave machine
linkage proportion (including fine adjustment) + offset frequency
0: No offset
No offset frequency/revolution; the frequency set value of the slave machine is determined by the
frequency command of the master device and the setting of FA.2.26 and FA.2.27.
1: Determined by frequency setting source 1
The frequency set value of the slave machine frequency setting source 1 is regarded as the offset
frequency/revolution of the slave machine.
2: Determined by frequency setting source 2
The frequency set value of the slave machine frequency setting source 2 is regarded as the offset
frequency/revolution of the slave machine.

FA.2.29 Linkage balance function Setting range: 0~3 Factory default: 0
0: Void
1: Current balance
With reference to the load current of the master device, each slave device will automatically conduct
fine adjustment to the output of local device so as to keep consistency with the master device’s current.
2. Torque balance
With reference to the torque of the master device, each slave device will automatically conduct fine
adjustment to the output of local device so as to keep consistency with the master device’s torque.
3: Power balance
With reference to the power of the master device, each slave device will automatically conduct fine
adjustment to the output of local device so as to keep consistency with the master device’s torque.
FA.2.30 Linkage balancing gain Setting range: 0.001~10.000 Factory default: 1.000
When the linkage balancing function is effective, this parameter is used to set the adjusting gain
output by this device, and it is only effective for the slave device. The higher the gain is, the higher
the amplitude of the self-balancing adjustment is.
7.37 Zero-speed torque and position control (Fb.2 group)

Fb.2.18 Automatic shift frequency Setting range: 0.0~5.00Hz Factory default: 1.00
Fb.2.19 Automatic shift switching cycle Setting range: 0.10 ~ 2.00Sec. Factory default: 0.30
Combined with the multifunctional input terminal (Function No. 67), it is especially used for transmission
machineries with mechanical shifting function (e.g. machine tool spindle drive). This parameter is used
to set the operating frequency and FWD and REV shift cycle when the function is valid.
Fb.2.20 Zero frequency torque holdup

Setting range: 0~ 2 Factory default: 0
(DC bind-type brake preferred)
This parameter is to set the bind-type brake function at 0 speed. When it is set to 1, the actions on DC
are completely identical. The electronic bind-type brake at that time can ensure the motor completely
not rotating under the drag of load.
In the VC control mode with PG feedback, if it is set to 2, the equipment will output 0 speed torque in the
mode of position locking. Even if it is dragged by loads, the motor axis will not rotate.
Fb.2.21 position locking gain1 Setting range: 0.01 ~ 10.00 Factory default: 1.00
When the zero-frequency torque is kept at 2, this parameter is used to set the gains between the motor
output torque and the axis deviation. The larger the number is, the higher the 0 speed torque is. If the
value is too high, 0 speed ventilation may be resulted in.

7.38 Virtual input and output (group FF.0)

FF.0.00 FF configuration parameter locking (H) Setting range: 0000~1001 Factory default: 0000
FF group parameters include special and internal function parameters, and their setting and initialization
are confined. This group of parameters is used to set the user’s authority for operating FF parameters.
FF.0.01~FF.0.08 Definition of virtual output

node (SDO1~ SDO8)
The virtual output nodes SDO1~SDO8 are functionally the same as the multifunctional output terminals
DO1~DO3, but do not output any signal. They are directly connected in the controller of the inverter to
the virtual input nodes SDI1~SDI8 one to one.
Using virtual nodes can not only help simplify wiring but can also avoid interference. The function of
SDO1~SDO8 can be defined by setting the value of FF.0.01~FF.0.08. Please refer to Table 2
( Comparison Table for Variables of Multifunctional Output Terminals (DO/EDO/SDO) for the variables
corresponding to the set value.
FF.0.09~FF.0.16 Definition of virtual input node (SDI1~ SDI8) Setting range: 0~96 Factory default: 0
The virtual input nodes SDI1~SDI8 are functionally the same as the multifunctional input terminals
DI1~DI9. But there are no actual physical input nodes. They are connected to the virtual output SDO1~
SDO8 one to one, and are directly taken from the virtual output signal.
The virtual input nodes SDI1~SDI8 are functionally programmable, and their function can be defined by
setting the values of FF.0.09~FF.0.16. Please refer to Table 1 (Comparison Table for Functions of
Multifunctional Terminals (DI/EDI/SDI) for functions corresponding to the set value.

FF.0.17 Virtual output - input connection

polarity (H)
FF.0.18 Virtual output - input connection
polarity (H)
The parameters are used to set the connection logic status of the virtual output nodes SDO1~SDO8
and virtual input nodes SDI1~SDI8. When it is set to be reverse polarity connection, the virtual
output signal will be negated before being inputted to the virtual input port, as shown in Figure 7-59.
FF0.01~FF0.08 FF0.17~FF0.18 FF0.09~FF0.16
SDOX SDIX
Figure 7-59 Block Diagram of Virtual Output – Input
7.39 Protecting function configuration parameters (FF.1 group)
This group of parameters is used to define if the protecting function needs to be activated or not.
Generally no modification is required.
7.40 Correction parameters (FF.2 group)

FF.2.25 AI1 Zero offset adjustment Setting range: -0.500~0.500V Factory default: 0.0
FF.2.26 AI1 gain correction Setting range: 0.950~1.050 Factory default: 1.000
This group of parameters is sued to make fine adjustment to AI1 zero point and AI1. The relationship
before and after adjustment:
AI1 input value= AI1 gain correction* AI1 value before adjustment +AI1 zero offset.
FF.2.27 4mA deviation adjustment for AI2 Setting range: -0.500~0.500mA Factory default: 0.0
FF.2.29 AI3 Zero offset adjustment Setting range: -0.500~0.500V Factory default: 0.0
FF.2.31 AO1 zero offset correction Setting range: -0.500~0.500V Factory default: 0.0
FF.2.32 AO1 gain correction Setting range: 0.950~1.050 Factory default: 1.000
FF.2.33 AO2 zero offset correctio Setting range: -0.500~0.500V Factory default: 0.0
FF.2.34 AO2 gain correction Setting range: 0.950~1.050 Factory default: 1.000
The correction principle for each analog input/output port is the same as AI1. The relationship curves
with zero offset adjustment and gain correction are respectively as below. Generally, users do not need
to set these parameters.

AI1 Corrected value (V)

AI1矫正值（V） AI1 Corrected value (V)
AI1矫正值（V）
10 10
9.5 9.5
[FF.2.25]=0.500 [FF.2.26]=1.050
0.5 [FF.2.25]=-0.500 [FF.2.26]=0.950
-0.5 9.5 10 AI1实际值（V）

AI1 Actual value (V) 0 10 AI1实际值（V）
AI1 Actual value (V)
Figure 7-60-A AI1 Zero Offset Correction Curve Figure 7-60-B AI1 Gain Correction Curve
AI2矫正值（mA）
AI2 Corrected value (mA) AI2矫正值（mA）
AI2 Corrected value (mA)
20 20
19.5 19
[FF.2.27]=0.500
[FF.2.28]=1.050
4.5 [FF.2.28]=0.950
4 [FF.2.27]=-0.500 4
3.5
0 4 19.5 20 AI2 Actual value (mA) 0 4 20 AI2 Actual value (mA)
Figure 7-61-A AI2 Zero Offset Correction Curve Figure 7-61-B AI2 Gain Correction Curve
AI3 Corrected value (V) AI3 Corrected value (V)
10
10 9.5
9.5
[FF.2.29]=0.500
[FF.2.26]=1.050
0.5 AI3 Actual value (V) AI3 Actual value (V)
-10 -9.5 -10
9.5 10 0 10
-0.5
[FF.2.26]=0.950
[FF.2.29]=-0.500
-9.5 -9.5
-10 -10
Figure 7-62-A -AI3 Zero Offset Correction Curve Figure 7-62-B AI3 Gain Correction Curve

FF.2.35 Undervoltage protection action level Setting range: 320~450V Factory default: 320V
This parameter sets the allowable lower limiting voltage at the DC side during normal operation of
the inverter. For some occasions with lower power grid, it is applicable to appropriately reduce the
undervoltage protection level, so as to ensure normal operation of the inverter.
When the power grid is under excessive low voltage, the output torque of the motor
will decrease. In the occasion of constant power load and constant torque load,
excessive low voltage of the power grid will lead to increase of the inverter’s input
current, hence reducing the reliability of inverter operation.
The set value for this parameter [FF.2.35] must be no more than the undervoltage adjustment action
level [F1.4.45].
FF.2.36 Correction coefficient of DC side

voltage detection value
When the actual bus of the inverter is deviated from the value of the DC side voltage monitoring
parameter d0.0.07, it is applicable to set this parameter combined with the correction of potentiometer
in the bus voltage detection circuit.
7.41 Special functional parameters (FF.3 Group)
The modification of this group of parameters should be conducted under the guidance of professionals,
and no modification is needed generally.
7.42 Other configuration parameters (Group FF.4)

FF.4.41 Cooling fan control Setting range: 0000~0111 Factory default: 0101
The unit: Soft start function
This function helps effectively reducing the instantaneous power required for starting the fan, hence
guarantee stable and reliable operation of the switch power supply.
Tens digit: Air volume auto adjustment
The revolution of the cooling fan can be automatically adjusted according to the ambient temperature
and operation status of the inverter, so as to maximize service life of the cooling fan.
Hundreds’ digit: Start time
The fan will run according to the settings in the unit and ten’s digit of this parameter immediately after

the inverter is powered on.
1: Start during running

The fan will run according to the settings in the unit and ten’s digit of this parameter after the inverter is
powered on and has received the running command.
FF.4.42 Operating panel control options Setting range: 0000~2001 Factory default: 0000
Kilobit: Panel control selection (except STOP key)
0: Standard panel interface control (can be connected to monitoring panel via RS485)
The control command can only be given through the standard operating panel, and external monitoring
panel can be connected via RS485.
1: RS485 port external panel control (the standard panel only for monitoring)
The control command can only be given via RS485 port, and the standard panel is only used for
monitoring.
2: Multifunctional terminal switching
The master control panel is selected by the multifunctional input terminal (function no. 40) and the
terminal function is set with the parameters F3.0.00~ F3.0.08.
FF.4.43 Special function configuration (H) Setting range: 0000~1111 Factory default: 0101
The unit: Motor parameter identification auto-start
0: Forbidden
1: Permitted
After modifying the motor nameplate parameters, the inverter will automatically set static self identifi-
cation of motor parameters once.
Tens digit: Voltage vector composition mode

0: Three-phase composition
1: Two-phase composition
Another modulation method for space voltage vector. This method can help appropriately reduce heat-
ing of the inverter, but audio noise may somewhat increase.
Hundred's digit: Small pulse shielding

thousand:reserved

Warning, Alarm Diagnosis And Countermeasures 189
Chapter 8
Warning, Alarm Diagnosis And Countermeasures

When the frequency inverter sends warning signals, the auxiliary display column displays warning
code. Some warnings have no influence on the operation of the inverter. Those warnings which may
influence the operation of the frequency inverter should be eliminated as much as possible;
otherwise, more serious faults may be caused. When the frequency inverter fails to alarm, its
protective function will act and display fault code and the inverter will stop outputting with the motor
freely sliding and shutting down.
8.1 Alarm display and troubleshooting
Fault
Display Possible causes Solutions
description
1. The acceleration time is too

short.
1. Adjust acceleration time
2. V/F curve or torque boosting is
2. Adjust V/F curve or torque boosting
set improperly.
parameters
Overcurrent 3. After transient stop, the rotating
3. Set the start/stop mode [F0.4.38] to
Fu.001 during motor is restarted.
the revolution tracking restart mode.
acceleration 4. The frequency inverter has
4. Select frequency inverter with
smaller capacity.
matched capacity level.
5. The encoder is faulty or
5. Check encoder and its connection.
disconnected during the operation
and acceleration with PG.
1. The deceleration time is too

short.
1. Adjust deceleration time.
2. The potential energy load or
2. Connect braking resistor or unit
Overcurrent load inertia is too large.
externally.
Fu.002 during 3. The frequency inverter has
deceleration smaller capacity
matched capacity level.
4. The encoder is faulty or
disconnected during the operation 4. Check encoder and its connection.
and deceleration with PG.

190 Warning, Alarm Diagnosis And Countermeasures
Fault
description
1. The load changes suddenly.

2. The grid has over-low voltage.
3. The frequency inverter has
1. Reduce load sudden change.
smaller capacity.
2. Check voltage of power supply.
4. The load is overweight.
5. After transient stop, the rotating
matched capacity level
motor is restarted (at the time of
Overcurrent 4. Check load or replace with a
Fu.003 start).
during operation frequency inverter with larger capacity
6. The three-phase output line of
the frequency inverter has
interphase short circuit or phase
6. Eliminate short circuit fault.
line short circuit to ground.
7. Check the encoder’s wiring.
7. The encoder is suddenly
disconnected during closed-loop
high-speed operation.
1. The input voltage is abnormal. 1. Check input power supply.

2. The revolution closed loop 2. Adjust revolution closed loop
Overvoltage
parameters are set improperly parameters, please refer to the
Fu.004 during
during vector control operation. description of F8.1 parameter set
acceleration
3. The rotating motor is started 3. Set the start/stop mode [F0.4.38] to
(without revolution tracking). the revolution tracking restart mode.
1. The deceleration period is too

1. Adjust deceleration time.
Overvoltage short.
2. Connect braking resistor or unit
Fu.005 during 2. The load potential energy or
externally.
deceleration inertia is too large.
3. Check input power supply.
3. The input voltage is abnormal.
1. The input voltage is abnormal. 1. Install input reactor

Overvoltage 2. The parameters of regulator are 2. Adjust parameters of regulator;
Fu.006
during operation set improperly during vector please refer to the description of
control operation. parameter set in F8.1
Overvoltage
The voltage of the power supply is
Fu.007 when shutting Check voltage of power supply
abnormal
down
Undervoltage
1. The voltage of the power
during operation 1. Check voltage of power supply
Fu.008 supply is abnormal
(can be 2. Supply power separately
2. Large load is started in the grid.
shielded)

Fault
description
Drive protection
1. Check the main loop.
Fu.009 action (can be Main loop fault or interruption
2. Shield this protection.
shielded)
False operation caused by the

Electromagnetic
Fu.011 surrounding electromagnetic Seek for technical service
interference
interference.
1. The load is excessively high.

2. The acceleration period is too
1. Reduce load or replace with a
short.
frequency inverter with larger capacity.
3.The booster voltage of torque is
2. Prolong acceleration time.
too high or the V/F curve is set
3. Reduce torque lifting voltage and
improperly
adjust V/F curve.
Fu.012 Inverter overload 4. The grid voltage is too low.
4. Check the voltage of grid.
5. The rotating motor is directly
started when the function of
revolution tracking restart is no
6. Check whether the encoder is
activated.
reverse.
6. In closed loop vector mode, the
encoder is reversed.
1. V/F curve is set improperly 1. Adjust V/F curve.

2. The grid voltage is too low. 2. Check the input grid voltage.
3. The motor has run for a long 3. Select special frequency-variable
time with low speed and large \for long-term low speed operation.
load. 4. Increase the overload protection
Overload
4. The overload protection coefficient of the motor ([F2.0.25]).
Fu.013 protection action
coefficient of the motor is too 5. Adjust the working conditions of the
of motor
small. load or select frequency inverter with
5. Locked-rotor operation of motor matched capacity level.
or overlarge load. 6. Adjust the connection of encoder or
6. In closed loop vector mode, the change the function setting for
encoder is reversed. direction of the encoder.
1. The air duct is blocked. 1. Clean the air duct or improve

2. The ambient temperature is ventilation conditions.
Overheating of
over high. 2. Improve ventilation conditions
frequency
Fu.014 3. The fan is abnormal. and reduce carrier frequency.
inverter
4. The temperature detecting 3. Replace the fan.
circuit or power module is 4. Seek for the manufacturer’s
abnormal. support.

Fault
description
External equipment is The external equipment of the Check signal source and relevant
Fu.017 faulty or the panel has frequency inverter is faulty, the equipment and find the root leading
forced stoppage input terminal has signal input to the stoppage of the panel.
1. Reduce load
1. The load is too large.
2. Prolong acceleration and
2. The acceleration time is too
deceleration time.
Excessive protection short.
3. Confirm the mechanical system
Fu.018 of revolution deviation 3. The load is locked.
of the load
(DEV) 4. The detection value ([F8.2.34])
4. Reset the detection value
and time ([F8.2.35]) for DEV is set
([F8.2.34]) and time ([F8.2.35]) for
improperly.
DEV.
1. Overshoot or undershoot. 1. Adjust the gain

2. The frequency is too high. 2. Adjust the set value of frequency
Fu.019 Over speed fault (OS) 3. The overspeed detection value 3. Reset the set value of the
([F8.2.36]) and the overspeed detection value ([F8.2.36]) and time
time ([F8.2.37]) is set improperly. ([F8.2.37]) of OS.
1. Change the connection order of

A, B pulse, or,
The A-phase and B-phase pulses
Reverse connection of 2. Modify the setting of parameter
Fu.020 on PG card are connected in
A, B pulse F8.0.06, or,
wrong sequence.
3. Adjust phase sequence of output
U, V, W.
The main loop

The main loop contactor does not
Fu.021 contactor does not act Replace the main loop contactor.
contact well.
properly.
1. There is intense noise

around in the process of writing in
Internal data memory 1. Retry after reset
Fu.022 function code data
is faulty 2. Seek for manufacturer’s service
2. The internal memory is
damaged

Fault
description
The output current of U 1. The lead from frequency

phase is inverter to motor is
Fu.026
deficient/smaller. disconnected.
1. Eliminate peripheral faults.
The output current of V 2. The driving or control panel
Fu.027 2. Seek for manufacturer’s support.
phase is of the frequency inverter is
3. Eliminate motor faults.
deficient/smaller. faulty
Fu.028
The output current of W 3. The three-phase winding of
phase is deficient/smaller the motor is faulty
The three-phase input 1. Add AC or DC reactor

The imbalance rate of
Fu.032 voltage is unbalanced 2. Increase the capacity of
three-phase volta0ge is larger.
(can be shielded) frequency inverter
1. The wiring of input analog

signal is disconnected or 1. Check the wiring of analog input
Fu.036 AI1 input disconnection. analog input signal source is signal and the analog input signal
Fu.037 AI2 input disconnection. inexistent. source
Fu.038 AI3 input disconnection. 2. Parameters related to 2.Modify the configuration
disconnection detection are parameters
configured improperly.
1. The wiring of pulse input

signal is disconnected or
1. Check the wiring of pulse input
analog input signal source is
signal and analog input signal
Fu.039 Fin input is disconnected inexistent.
source
2. Parameters related to
2. Modify the configuration
disconnection detection are
parameters
configured improperly.
1. The speed measuring

module is incorrectly
connected.
2. The wiring of speed
1. Check the connection of speed
The revolution detection measuring module is
Fu.040 measuring module.
loop is disconnected disconnected.
2. Seek for manufacturer’s support.
3. The output of speed
measuring module is abnormal.
4. Relevant function codes are
set improperly.

Fault
description
The motor fails to be

The motor fails to be connected
connected when the
Fu. 041 when the motor parameters are Connect the motor.
motor parameters
identified.
are identified.
1. The lead from frequency

U phase output is inverter to motor is disconnected.
1. Eliminate peripheral faults
disconnected or the 2. The driving or control panel of
Fu.042 2. Seek for manufacturer’s support
parameters are the frequency inverter is faulty.
3. Eliminate motor faults.
seriously unbalanced 3. The three-phase winding of the
motor is faulty.

V phase output is inverter to motor is disconnected.
parameters are the frequency inverter is faulty
3. Eliminate the fault of motor.
motor is faulty

W phase output is inverter to motor is disconnected.
parameters are the frequency inverter is faulty.
3. Eliminate the fault of motor.
motor is faulty.
1.The current sensor or circuit is

damaged.
U phase current is
2. The auxiliary power supply is
Fu.051 detected faulty Seek for manufacturer’s support.
faulty.
(sensor or circuit)
3. The control and driving panel
are improperly connected.
1.The current sensor or circuit is

damaged.
V phase current is
2. The auxiliary power supply is
Fu.052 detected faulty Seek for manufacturer’s support.
faulty.
(sensor or circuit)
3. The control and driving panel
are Improperly connected.
The temperature
The temperature detecting circuit
Fu.054 sensor 1 is faulty Seek for manufacturer’s support
is abnormal.
(can be shielded)

Fault
description
The communication 1. The expansion board is not well

linkage of functional contacted with the main control 1. Reinstall the expansion board.
Fu.067 expansion unit 1 is board. 2. Replace with a new expansion
abnormally 2. The expansion board is board.
disconnected. damaged.
The communication 1. The expansion board is not well

linkage of functional contacted with the main control 1. Reinstall the expansion board.
Fu.068 expansion unit 2 is board. 2. Replace with a new expansion
abnormally 2. The expansion board is board.
disconnected. damaged.
The connection of
Fu.072 accessories is
abnormal
Conflicting
Fu.201 Please contact the direct supplier.
parameter setting
Fu.301~ Control panel is

Seek for manufacturer’s support.
Fu.311 faulty

8.2 Warning display and troubleshooting
Can be
Display Warnings shielded Solutions other than shielding
or not
aL.003 Overhigh power supply voltage Check input power supply
Lower input voltage (undervoltage early

aL.008 Check input power supply
warning)
Improve working environment or seek
aL.011 Bad electromagnetic environment
for manufacturer’s support
The load is excessively highand Reduce load, or replace a frequency
aL.012
protection maybe occurred. inverter with larger power
Improve ventilation conditions and
aL.014 INV overheating early warning
reduce carrier
1. Reduce load
2.Prolong acceleration and
deceleration time
aL.018 Overlarge DEV 3. Confirm mechanical system of load
4. Confirm the detection value
([F8.2.34]) and time ([F8.2.35]) for
DEV
1. Adjust frequency setting loop
2. Check the setting value of
aL.019 Over speed (OS)
detection value [F8.2.36]) and time
([F8.2.37]) for OS
The output current of U phase is
deficient/smaller
aL.026 Check the connecting wire between
The output current of V phase is Can be
aL.027 frequency inverter and motor or the
deficient/smaller shielded
aL.028 winding of motor
The output current of W phase is
deficient/smaller
1. Check the enabling connection (42)
in multifunctional input terminal and
the status of the terminal (ON/OFF)
aL.031 The starting enabling signal is deficient
2. Check whether the starting enabling
signal in bus command word is
effective or not
Measure the input voltage of all the
Early warning of unbalanced Can be
aL.032 phases, install ACR and reduce
three-phase input voltage shielded
imbalance rate among phases

Can be
or not
1. Check the connection of analog
aL.036 AI1 input is disconnected
Can be input signal
shielded 2. Check whether there’re signals in
the signal source
aL.039
Fin input is disconnected (retained)
1. Check the connection of speed
The revolution detecting loop is
aL.040 measuring module
disconnected
2. Seek for manufacturer’s support
No-load operation fails to identify the
aL.041
parameters of motor
The parameters of U phase of motor is
abnormal
aL.042
The parameters of V phase of motor is Check whether the winding of motor is
aL.043
abnormal faulty
aL.044
The parameters of W phase of motor is
abnormal
Select special motor for frequency
aL.045 Over temperature of motor conversion for long-term low speed
operation
The driving circuit is abnormal and
aL.049
unbalanced
Can be
aL.054 The temperature sensor is faulty Replace the temperature sensor.
shielded
The parameters can not be recovered in
aL.058
batch during operation
The numerical value when energized
aL.059
can not be recovered during operation
The connection between expanded
aL.061 communication module and master
control board is interrupted abnormally
1. The expansion unit selected is
inappropriate and can not be used with
The function expansion unit 1 has a
aL.062 such type of frequency inverter
hardware conflict
2. The function expansion unit has a
internal fault

Can be
or not
1. The expansion unit selected is
inappropriate and can not be used with
The function expansion unit 2 has a
aL.063 such type of frequency inverter
hardware conflict
2. The function expansion unit has a
internal fault
The function expansion unit has a This expansion unit can not be used
aL.064
resource conflict with other expansion units
Fail to establish communications with
aL.065
function expansion unit 1
Fail to establish communications with
aL.066
function expansion unit 2
The communication links of function
aL.067 expansion unit 1 is interrupted
abnormally
The communication links of function
aL.068 expansion unit 2 is interrupted
abnormally
The parameter download is failed
(note: download is from operation Check whether the communication
aL.071 panel to control panel of frequency interface between operation panel and
inverter; upload is from control panel control panel is normal or not
to operation panel)
The memory of panel fails to be
aL.072
operated
The memory of panel inhibits write and
aL.073
can not download parameters
1. Check whether the communication
interface between panel and control
The upload of parameters is failed
panel is normal or not.
aL.074 (automatically recover to the numerical
2. In the parameter F0.0.08, parameter
value before uploading)
upload is forbidden in terms of local
upload.
The version of panel parameters is
Re-upload panel parameters same as
aL.075 different from that of equipment
the version of equipment parameters
parameters; it can not be uploaded

Can be
or not
The panel has no effective parameters The panel parameters are not modified
aL.076
and can not be uploaded effectively and need not to be uploaded
The panel parameters exceed the
Confirm the allowed parameter scope,
aL.077 setting scope INV allowed and fail to be
reset and upload
uploaded
The operation panel is abnormally After power off, reinsert and pull out of
aL.099
connected the panel or replace the panel
The control program is failed resulted
aL.100 Improve electromagnetic environment
from electromagnetic interference
The setting motor parameters are
aL.103 conflicted (rated frequency, revolution Reset the motor parameters
conflict)
The setting motor parameters are
conflicted (no-load current, rated current,
aL.104 Reset the motor parameters
rated revolution, rated frequency and
rotor time constant)
The inductance parameters of motor
Reset the inductance parameters of
aL.105 stator overflow (the motor parameter is
motors stator
incorrectly set)
The setting parameters are conflicted
aL.201 Immediately contact the direct supplier
and it’s about to shut down

200 Care And Maintenance
Chapter 9 Care And Maintenance
Subjecting to influence of many factors such as temperature, humidity, dust, vibration as well
as internal components aging, the inverter has potential risk of faults. In order to ensure long
and steady operation of the system, regular care and maintenance must be conducted.
After long-distance transportation of the frequency inverter, users should check whether the
components are in good condition, or the screws are fastened before use them. During the
normal use period, users shall regularly clean the internal dust of frequency inverter and
check whether the screws are loose.
Due to the high voltage of frequency inverter in service, the wrong operation can result in
serious injury or death, therefore, the power supply of the frequency inverter shall be cut off,
and the maintenance operation after ten minutes after the nixie tube of the frequency inverter
panel extinguishing can be carried out.
9.1 Routine care and maintenance

Through routine maintenance, all kinds of abnormal condition and abnormal cause can be
found promptly, and the faults and hidden dangers can be eliminated as soon as possible.
Thus, the normal operation of equipment can be warrantyd and also the service life of the
frequency inverter can be prolonged. Refer to the following table for routine maintenance.
Object Inspection cycle

Scope of inspection Assessment criterion
checked Irregularly Regularly
1. Open the frequency inverter when the

1. Humidity,
temperature is above 45℃, keep humidity
Operation temperature
√ below 95%, without frost deposit
environment 2. Dust, moisture
2. Free from peculiar odor, inflammable and
3. Gas
explosive gas
1. Installation 1. The installation environment shall be well

Cooling environment ventilated and the duct has no block
√
system 2. Frequency 2. Fan is in well operation and without
inverter fan abnormal noise
1.Vibration, 1. Vibration is smooth and outlet

Frequency temperature rise temperature is normal
√
inverter 2. Noise 2. No abnormal noise and no peculiar smell
3. Wire, terminal 3. No loose for fastening screw
1.Vibration,
1. Smooth operation and normal temperature
Generator √ temperature rise
2. No abnormalities and inconsistent noise
2. Noise
Input or 1. Input voltage 1. The input voltage is in the specified scope
√
output 2. Output current 2. Output current is below the rated value

Care And Maintenance 201
9.2 Inspection and displacement of the vulnerable components

During operation, some components of frequency inverter may wear or the performance is
slowed down. In order to ensure the stable reliable operation of frequency inverter, the users
shall carry out preventative maintenance for frequency inverter, and replace the components
when necessary.
9.2.1 Filter capacitor

1. Possible cause of damage: Environmental temperature and the pulsating current are high,
and electrolyte is aging.
2. Assessment criterion: When frequency inverter operate with load, uses check whether there
occur fault such as over current, over voltage; whether liquid leaks out, whether the relief
valve bulge; whether the determination of electrostatic capacitive and insulation resistance
are abnormal.
3. The pulsating current of main loop would affect the performance of the aluminum electrolysis
filter capacitor, and the degree of influence depends on the environment temperature and the
using conditions. Replace electrolytic capacitors of frequency inverter every three to four
years under normal conditions.
4. Filter capacitor shall be replaced immediately if any of the following occurs: electrolyte of the
electrolyte capacitor leaks, relief valve emits out, and subject of the capacitor expands.
9.2.2 Cooling fan

1. Possible cause of damage: Bearing wearing, leaf aging, etc.
2. Assessment criterion: When the power of frequency inverter is cut out, check the fan blades
and other parts to see whether there is any abnormality such as crack. With the power on, just
check whether the fan operation situation is normal, and whether it has abnormal vibration
and noise.
3. Service life of the entire cooling fan in frequency converter is about 15000 hours (i.e.
frequency inverter use continuously for about two years), if the fan has unusual voice or
vibration, it should be replaced immediately.

202 Care And Maintenance
9.3 Storage
After purchase of the frequency inverter, if the frequency inverter will be spared for a while or
stored for a long time, users shall pay attention to the following items:
• Storage environment should comply with the following table:
Environmental
Requirements Remarks
Characteristics
Long-term storage temperature is no
more than 45 ℃, so as to avoid the
degradation of capacitance
Ambient
－10℃～45℃ characteristics. It shall avoid
temperature
condensation and frozen
environment caused by sudden
change of temperature.
Relative
5～95％
humidity
Free from direct sunlight, no dust, It can adopt measurement like plastic
Storage no corrosive, no combustible gas, film sealing and desiccant.
environment no oil, no steam, no gas, no drip,
no vibration, and with little salt
• If the frequency inverter is not in use for a long time, the current shall be applied to restore
filter capacitor characteristics every half year, and at the same time other features of the
frequency converter shall also be checked. When the current is applied, it shall increase the
voltage gradually through autotransformer, and the conduction time should be above half
an hour.

Care And Maintenance 203
9.4 Warranty
If the frequency inverter body has the following cases, the company will provide warranty
service:
• If faults or damages occur in normal use condition within the warranty period (within 18
months from the date of purchase), our company will provide free maintenance. Our
company will charge a reasonable cost of maintenance when the warranty period has
expired (more than 18 months).
• Even in the warranty period, if any fault is caused by the following cases, our company
will charge certain amount of maintenance cost:
① Fault due to that the users do not operate the device according to the operation
manual or beyond the standard;
② Fault due to random repair and modification without permission;
③ Fault caused by poor preservation;
④ Fault caused by improper use of the inverter for unintended purposes;
⑤ Damage to the machine due to fire, corrosive salt, gas corrosion, earthquake,
storms, floods, thunder, abnormal voltage or other force majeure.
• The company will provide lifelong paid maintenance services even the warranty period
expires.

204 Decription Of Communication Protocal
Chapter 10
Description Of Communication Protocol
10.1 Protocol overview
10.2 Interface and transmission method

Terminal
Terminal Usage Function
Identifier
Data Transceiving When connected to PC/PLC via RS 485
RS+
Terminal(+) communication interface, connect to (+) signal
Data Transceiving When connected to PC/PLC via RS 485
RS-
Terminal(-) communication interface, connect to (-) signal
10.3 Data structure

Modbus protocol is a universal protocol used in the industrial control unit. Because this
protocol can be conveniently applied, it has been considered as the general industry
standard and is widely applied to the integrated system of master controllers and slave units.
By applying this protocol, units of various brands can be connected together and functioning
as an industrial network.
Modbus defines 3 types of transmission modes: ASCII, RTU and TCP. E280 Frequency
inverter only supports RTU mode.
E280 utilizes RS485 (RS232, optional, which has to be converted by a level) as the physical
interface for Modbus, and one host can control one or more (maximum 247 units) frequency
inverters.
By applying the asynchronous serial half-duplex transmission method, only master unit or
slave unit can transmit data at one particular moment, and the other unit can only receive
data.
1) 4 Optional Data Transmission Formats
①1 start bit, 8 data bits, 1 stop bit, without parity bit (factory setting)
②1 start bit, 8 data bits, 1 stop bit, even parity

③1 start bit, 8 data bits, 1 stop bit, odd parity
④1 start bit, 8 data bits, 2 stop bit, without parity bit
2) Baud rate
Seven optional baud rates: 1200bps, 2400 bps, 4800 bps, 9600 bps, 19200 bps, 38400bps,
79600 bps
3) Communication rules
Starting interval between data frames is longer than 3.5 byte transmission cycle (standard),

Decription Of Communication Protocal 205
but the minimum interval should not be shorter than 0.5 ms.
10.4 Parameter configuration for frequency inverters

FA.0.00 is a read-only parameter, and is used to display the status of the communication card
connection and bus;
FA.0.01 = 00XX, unit bit is used to choose baud rate, and tens bit is used to choose data format;
FA.0.02 = X, choose the address of this station;
FA.0.03~ FA.0.06, configure supporting communication parameters; refer to functional parame-
ter table for detailed functions.
X indicates that this bit can be any value in the allowed range.
10.5 Brief introduction of functions

The Modbus functional codes supported by E280 are listed below:
Code Description of Functions

Function
(Hexadecimal)
Read coil status by bit. Each bit for the

Read coil status 0x01 control word is mapped to coil 1~15
respectively.
Read discrete input status. Each bit for the

Read discrete input
0x02 status word is mapped to coil 1~15
status
respectively.
Read multiple hold registers. It can read all

Read multiple hold the application parameters, status
0x03
registers parameters, control words, status words and
set values of E280.
Read multiple input Read multiple input registers. The address

0x04
registers for analog input register starts from 0x1200.
Perform writing action for a single output bit.

Enforce single coil 0x05 Each bit for the control word is mapped to
coil 1~16 respectively.
Perform writing action for a single hold

Write to a single hold register. All the parameters, control words,
0x06
register status words and set values of E280 are
mapped to the hold register.
Query for the anomaly status information. In

Query for the
0x07 E280, the fault information of the frequency
anomaly status
inverter can be queried.

Code Description of Functions

Function
(Hexadecimal)
Execute field diagnosis for the bus fault.

Support the sub-codes, like querying (0x00),
Fault diagnosis 0x08
rebooting (0x01), monitoring (0x04) and
zero-clearing(0x0A) etc.
Perform writing action for multiple output bits

Enforce multiple coils 0x0F respectively. Each bit for the control word is
mapped to coil 1~16 respectively.
Perform writing action for multiple hold

Write to multiple hold registers. All the parameters, control words,
0x10
registers status words and set values of E280 are also
mapped to the hold register.
Read/write to
This function equals to combining 0x03 and
multiple hold 0x17
0x10 into a new command.
registers
10.6 Access address summary
Functional Codes Supported

E280 Access Address
(Hexadecimal)
Control bit 0x01- Read coil status

Multifunctional terminal output (0x1000-0x1100) 0x05- Enforce single coil
Relay output 0x0F- Enforce multiple coils
Multifunctional terminal input for Discrete input

0x02- Read input status
status bit (0x1100-0x1200)
Input register
Analog input 0x04- Read input register
(0x1200-0x1300)
Application parameters,
Hold registers
Status parameters, 0x03- Read multiple registers
(application
Control words, 0x06- Write to a single register
parameter area,
Status words, 0x10- Write to multiple registers
status parameter
Set values, 0x17- Read/write to multiple
area,
Mapping status parameters, registers
0x1300-0x1400)
Mapping application parameters
For detailed address distribution, please refer to below section of Modbus detailed
address-finding distribution.

10.7 Detailed modbus address-finding distribution

1) Coil Address Summary (0x1000-0x1100)
Relevant Modbus functional codes：0x01 (read coil status), 0x05 (write to a single coil), 0x0F (write to
multiple coils)
Register name Function Description Access Address

Control bit – Bit 0 Reserve 0x1000
Operation Allowed
Control bit – Bit 1 0x1001
0：Operation banned 1：Operation allowed
Starting allowed
0：Starting banned 1：Starting allowed
Operation instruction
0：Stop 1：Operation
Emergency Stop
0：Invalid 1：Valid
Free slide stop
Control bit – Bit10 Reserve 0x100A
Control bit – Bit 11 Reserve 0x100B
Acceleration/deceleration banned
Control bit – Bit12 0x100C
0：Allowed 1：Banned
Zero-clearing for integrator input
Control bit – Bit 13 0x100D
Remote Control
Control bit – Bit 14 0x100E
Control bit – Bit 15 Fault Reset 0->1 Reset 0x100F
DO1 Multifunctional output terminal 1 0x1020
DO2 Multifunctional output terminal 2 0x1021
Multifunctional output terminal 3
EDO1 0x1030
(expansion card)
RO1 Multifunctional relay output 1 0x1040
Multifunctional relay output 2
ERO1 0x1050
(expansion card)
SDO1~SDO8 Virtual output 1~8 0x1060 ~ 0x1067
Reserve 0x1068~0x107F

2) Discrete Input Address Summary (0x1100 ~ 0x1200)

Relevant Modbus functional codes：0x02 (read input status)
Register name Function Description Access Address

Status word – bit 0 Ready 0x1100
Status word – bit 1 Operation allowed 0x1101
Status word – bit 2 Starting allowed 0x1102
Status word – bit 3 Reserve 0x1103
Status word – bit 4 Operation status 0x1104
Status word – bit 5 Direction 0x1105
Status word – bit 6 Zero speed 0x1106
Status word – bit 7 Acceleration 0x1107
Status word – bit 8 Deceleration 0x1108
Status word – bit 9 Arrival 0x1109
Status word – bit 10 Reserve 0x110A
Status word – bit 11 Reserve 0x110B
Status word – bit 12 Instruction source 0x110C
Status word – bit 13 Command source 0x110D
Status word – bit 14 Warning 0x110E
Status word – bit 15 Fault 0x110F
DI1 Multifunctional input terminal 1 0x1120
EDI1 Multifunctional input terminal 7 (expansion card) 0x1130
Reserve 0x1133~0x1199

3) Input Register Address Summary (1200H ~ 1300H)
Relevant Modbus functional codes：0x04 (read input register)
Register name Function Description Value Range Access Address

AI1 Analog input value 1 0 ~ 4080 0x1200
AI2 Analog input value 2 0 ~ 4080 0x1201
Analog input value 3 0 ~ 4080
AI3 0x1202
(expansion card)
Pulse input value 0 ~ 4080
Fin 0x1203
(expansion card)
Reserve 0x1204~0x1299
4) Hold Register Address Summary
Relevant Modbus functional codes: 0x03 (read multiple registers), x06 (write to single register), 0x10
(write to multiple registers), 0x17 (read/write to multiple registers).
① Application parameter address

The application parameter access address can be obtained from the parameter’s identifier when
ascertaining the access address, the method is to ignore the sub-class code in the identifier
(following referred to as “*”); let's see an example, for parameter identifier: HH.*.DD (eg.F2.0.33), it
will obtain HHDD directly (hexadecimal format), and the access address for F2.0.33 is: 0xF233H.
Below attached is the table for respective conversion of access addresses:
Parameter identifier RAM Access Address① ROM Access Address

F0.#.00 ~ F0.#.55 0xF000~0xF055 0xE000~0xE055
•••••• • • ••• •••
F9.#.00 ~ F9.#.55 0xF900~0xF955 0xE900~0xE955
FA.#.00 ~ FA.#.55 0xFA00~0xFA55 0xEA00~0xEA55
•••••• • • ••• •••
FF.#.00 ~ FF.#.55 0xFF00~0xFF55 0xEF00~0xEF55
dE.#.00 ~ dE.#.55(read-only) 0xDE00~0xDE55 0xBE00~0xBE55
CF.#.00 ~ CF.#.55(restricted) 0xCF00~0xCF55 0xBF00~0xBF55
② Status parameter address (read-only): The address conversion method for status parameter is
similar to that for application parameter. However, there is no ROM access address.
Parameter Identifier RAM Access Address

d0.#.00 ~ d0.#.55 0xD000~0xD055
d1.#.00 ~ d1.#.55 0xD100~0xD155

③ Bus Controlling Parameter Address (1300H ~ 1400H)
Register Name Value Range Access Address

Control word
0 ~ 0xFFFF 0x1300
(mapping coils 0-15)②
Modbus set value 1
-10000 ~ 10000 0x1301
(Relative Value) ③
Modbus set value 2
-30000 ~ 30000 0x1302
(Absolute Value)
Mapping application
③
[F0.00 ~FF.55] 0x1303
parameter 1
Mapping application
[F0.00 ~FF.55] 0x1304
parameter 2
Mapping application
[F0.00 ~FF.55] 0x1305
parameter 3
Mapping application
[F0.00 ~FF.55] 0x1306
parameter 4
Mapping application
[F0.00 ~FF.55] 0x1307
parameter 5
Mapping application
[F0.00 ~FF.55] 0x1308
parameter 6
Status word (Mapping discrete
0 ~ 0xFFFF 0x1309
range 0-15)
Mapping status parameter 1 [d0.00 ~d1.49] 0x130A
Mapping status parameter 2 [d0.00 ~d1.49] 0x130B
Mapping status parameter 3 [d0.00 ~d1.49] 0x130C
Mapping status parameter 4 [d0.00 ~d1.49] 0x130D
Mapping status parameter 5 [d0.00 ~d1.49] 0x130E
Mapping status parameter 6 [d0.00 ~d1.49] 0x130F
Mapping status parameter 7 [d0.00 ~d1.49] 0x1310
Reserve Undefined 0x1314 ~0x 1400

Notes:
c If there is no need to keep the parameters permanently, it suffices to write the parameters
to the RAM area. However, if the parameters have to be maintained permanently, it is
required to write the parameter values into the ROM area. The service life of ROM area
will be shortened if parameters are frequently written to the ROM area. If value F2.1.13
needs to be written and maintained permanently, the register address where it should be
written to is 0xE213.
d When reading/writing control words, it can be achieved via reading/writing to the coil
mapped to each bit of control words, and it can also be achieved via reading/writing to
the hold register corresponding to the control words. Both methods can achieve identical
results. If it is needed to set the value for operation allowed，we can set the value of the
bit 1 for control word (address 0x1001) as 1 via functional code 05, we can also set the
value of control word (address 0x1300) as 0x0002 via functional code 06. When reading
the status words, the method is similar to that for reading/writing control words. It can be
achieved via reading the discrete input mapped to each bit of status words, and it can
also be achieved via reading the hold register corresponding to the status words. If we
need to read the operation direction, we can read the status bit 5 (address 0x1105) via
functional code 02, we can also read the status word (address 0x1309) via functional
code 03.
e When we need to access several application parameters or monitoring parameters of

discrete addresses, we can first map these parameters to bus control parameter area,
and then we access to that area instead. As a matter of fact, access for mapped para-
meters is a type of pointer access, and the mapping parameters can be set in the FA.1
parameter group.
5) Anomaly Status Information

Relevant Modbus functional code 0x07 (Query)
• The frequency inverter's fault warning status and code corresponding to each bit of the
returned data
• Returned data – bit 7：0 — No fault on frequency inverter，1 — Fault on frequency inverter
• Returned data – bit 6：0 — No warning on frequency inverter，1 — Warning on frequency
inverter
• Returned data – bit 5~0：each code of fault information corresponds to the identifier code
following Fu in the fault code of the frequency inverter.
• ach code of warning information corresponds to the identifier code following AL. in the
warning code of the frequency inverter.
• If data 0x8C (10001100) is returned, it indicates that the fault code of the frequency inverter
is Fu. 012; if data 0x64 (01100100) is returned, it indicates that warning code of the
frequency inverter is AL.036.

6) Fault Diagnosis：
Relevant Modbus functional code 0x08 (Diagnosis)
Sub-function code list
Sub-function Query Response
Function
code Data Data
Image query
00 Return the identical query data Random
data
Re-start communication option (restore the FF00/00
01 FF00/0000
“listen only" status for 04 sub-code) 00
Enforce slave unit into “Listen Only" status
and the salve unit will not reply; the failed
04 0000 No reply
salve unit can be removed from the
communication chain.
Clear all calculators and diagnosing Image query
0A 0000
registers data
Total number
Return the number of bus information
of bus
0B items (for salve unit, count from the last 0000
information
reset or after clearing)
items
Return the number of bus communication CRC error
0C 0000
faults (CRC error calculation) number
Number of
Return the number of bus anomaly faults
0D 0000 anomaly data
(data abnormity error)
items
Return the number of salve unit information Number of
0E items (corresponding with slave unit 0000 valid data
address or the broadcasting information) items

EMC 213
Chapter 11 EMC
11.1 CE
The product can be sold freely in the market of EEA (European Economic Area) with CE
label, and to be ensured to meet other requirements as LVD and EMC.
11.2 Definition
EMC (Electromagnetic Compatibility) means the capacity of anti-interference for
electric and electron equipments, and the product could not interfere other local equips
also. EMC rules are defined requirements of anti-interference for EU area.
1) 1st Environment: including power supply equips of civil low voltage grid.
2) 2nd Environment: including power supply equips of non-civil low voltage grid.
z C1 Inverter: when rated power of electric transmission system is under 1000V, use
in 1st environment.
z C2 Inverter: when rated voltage of electric transmission system is under 1000V, it
would be plug equips or mobile equips. When it uses in 1st environment, it
should install and adjust by professional engineer.
z C3 Inverter: when rated voltage of electric transmission system is under 1000V, it is
suitable in 2nd environment, but not 1st environment.
z C4 Inverter: when rated voltage of electric transmission system is not under 1000V
or rated current is not lower than 400A, or it is suitable in complicated system
of 2nd environment.
11.3 Obey Standard Order
11.3.1 Obey EMC Order
E280 Series meet the requirements of standard EN61800-3: 2004 C2, which is
suitable in 1st and 2nd environment.
11.3.2 Obey LVD Order

E280 Series meet the requirements of standard EN 61800-2.
Installation of 1st environment:

1) Inverter chooses suited EMC filter.
2) Select suitable motor and wires.
3) Wiring according to 《Cable Wiring Requirements》.
4) Max output cable length is 100m.

214 EMC
Warning: If inverter is using in residence or civil area, it would cause electromagnetic
interference. Except CE requirements, user should take some necessary action to avoid this
interference.
11.4 Guidance of EMC External Accessories Installation and Selection
11.4.1 EMC input filter

External EMC is installed between inverter and power supply. Input filter can not only restrain
the interference of surrounding electromagnetic noise with inverter, but also prevent the
interference of inverter with surrounding equipments. Matched EMC filter must be externally
connected with inverter to meet the C2 type standard.
The filter must be used in strict accordance with Rated value; because the filter is type I electric
appliance, the filter’s metal case must maintain a good contact with the installation cabinet’s
metal and constant conductive electrical continuity, or it will cause electric shock hazard and
influence seriously the EMC effect; the filter must be connected to the same common ground as
the inverter PE port is connected, or it will influence seriously the EMC effect. Please contact the
company’s technical support for specific filter model selection and installation notes.
11.4.2 AC Input Reactor
The installation of AC input reactor at the inverter’s input port can restrain the harmonic wave
caused by inverter from transmitting to power grid, reduce the influence of the harmonic wave on
other components, improve the quality of power grid, increase power factor and limit the
abnormal fluctuation of power grid voltage and impulse current on the grid, so as to level
waveform and reduce the influence on inverter.
11.4.3 AC Output Reactor
AC output reactor must be installed at the inverter’s output port to limit the capacitive charge
current between output cable and the ground and passivate the rise rate of the voltage of
inverter’s PWM wave. This can reduce leak current, increase power factor, improve the quality
of power gird and level waveform.
11.4.4 DC Input Reactor
DC input reactor is mainly used in inverter and rectification circuit to increase power factor, filter
the current interference of ripple wave voltage and reduce inverter’s harmonic interference.
11.4.5 Filter’s Model Selection Reference

E280 series is not a standard equipped filter. If customer does not have more professional
advice, please refer to Appendix Ⅰto Appendix Ⅴ to buy devices for your design.

EMC 215
AppendixⅠ EMC input filter Reference Table

Appendix ⅡAC input Reactor Reference Table
Appendix Ⅲ AC Output Reactor Reference Table
Appendix Ⅳ DC input Reactor Reference Table
11.5 Shielded Cable

In order to meet EMC requirements of CE, it must use shielded cable with shielded layer.
Shielded cable has 3 phase conductive shielded cable and 4 phase conductive shielded
cable. If conductive performance of shielded layer cannot meet requirement, it would add
one separate PE wire or use 4 phase conductive shielded cable with one PE wire.
PE wire and
shielded layer Shielded layer Shielded layer
In order to restrain shooting and conducting of radio frequency effectively, shielded layer
of shielded cable makes up of coaxial copper intertexture. For increasing shielding
efficiency and conductive performance, intertexture density of shielded layer should be
more than 90%.
Insulated Skin Copper Shielded Layer Copper Intertexture

Inner Insulation e
Cable Core
11.6 Cable Wiring Requirements

1） Wiring of motor should be far from other cable wirings, and cable of several inverter
motors can be wiring side by side.
2） Wiring of motor cable, input drive cable and control cable would be in different wire
casing. In order to avoid electromagnetic interference of inverter output voltage
with fast changing, it should avoid long distance wiring side by side of motor cable
and other cables.
3） When control cable must cross drive cable, it should ensure the angle of two cables
with 90 degree. Do not cross other cables with inverter.
4） The drive input, output and weak signal cable (e.g. control cable) of inverter should
not wire parallel. With condition available, it is better to wire vertically.
5） Please keep good connection of cable wire casings and fine grounding. Aluminum
wire casing could improve equipotential voltage.

216 EMC
6） Filter, inverter, and motor should be in good connection with system (mechanical
equips) with painting protection of installed parts and sufficient contact with
conductive metal.
Wiring distance as below fig.
Drive cable
Minimum 200mm
Control cable
E280
Inverter
Control cable
Minimum 500mm
Motor cable
Braking unit cable

Minimum 500mm
Control cable
Drive cable
Minimum 300mm
Motor cable
Attention
1) In somewhere CE conformed or EMC radiation must be reduced, cable entry
should keep high frequency ground in 360 degree to restrain electro magnetic
interference. In addition, cable shield layer should connect with PE wire to meet
safety regulation.
2) In floating or high ground (>30Ohms) power system, EMI filter cannot be installed.
11.7 Leakage current response requirements
1） The output of inverter is high-speed pulse voltage, therefore it will generate high
frequency leakage current. To prevent electro shock and fire evoked by leakage
current, please install leakage circuit breaker for inverter.
2） The leakage current produced by inverter is relatively large, instant leakage current
of large power inverter may be tens of milliamperes, so inductive current of leakage
circuit breaker should be larger than 100mA.
3） High frequency pulse interference might cause leakage circuit breaker malfunction
under interference, please choose leakage circuit breaker with a high frequency

EMC 217
filter.
4） If to install several inverters, each inverter should have a leakage circuit breaker.
5） Factors that affect leakage current, as follows:
◆ Inverter capacity
◆ Carrier frequency
◆ Type and length of motor cable
◆ EMI filter
6） When leakage current of inverter cause leakage circuit breaker work:
◆ Improve sensitivity of the current value of leakage circuit breaker
◆ Replace a new leakage circuit breaker with high frequency inhibition function
◆ Reduce carrier frequency
◆ Shorten length of output cable
◆ Install a leakage suppression equipment
11.8 Common EMC Interference Problem and Solution
Frequency inverter is strong anti-interference equipment, when there is problem in
wiring and ground connection, still maybe will comes out interference. When it happens,
we have below solutions:
Interference Type Solution
◆ Motor case connect the PE of frequency inverter；

Leakage protection ◆ Frequency inverter PE connect the power system PE；
switch trip ◆ Add Safety capacitance box on input power wire；
◆ Add magnetic loops on input power wire；
◆Motor case connect the PE of frequency inverter；；
◆Frequency inverter PE connect the power system PE；
Running Drive leads ◆Add Safety capacitance box and magnetic loops on input
Interference power wire；
◆ Add Capacitor or magnetic loops on the interferenced port ；
◆ Share the ground wire between the equipments；
◆Motor case connect the PE of frequency inverter；；
◆Frequency inverter PE connect the power system PE；
◆Add Safety capacitance box and magnetic loops on input
Communication power wire；
Interference ◆Add matched resistor On communication wire and load end；
◆ Add communication common GND on communication wire；
◆communication wire use shielded wire, shields connect
public Communication；
◆ Add capacitor filter on low-speed DI, maximum 0.1uF；
◆Add capacitor filter on AI, maximum 0.22uF；
I/O Interference
◆Analog signal use shielded wire, shields connect PE of
frequency inverter.
Remark：If you have any other EMC interference questions, please contact the

218 EMC
manufacturer.
AppendixⅠ EMC input filter Reference Table

EMC filter model (Shanghai Yingfeng)
Model Rated current
G-type machine P-type machine
E280-4T0011G/4T0015P 3.0 NFI-005 NFI-005
E280-4T0015G/4T0022P 3.7 NFI-005 NFI-005
E280-4T0022G/4T0030P 5.5 NFI-005 NFI-010
E280-4T0030G/4T0040P 7.5 NFI-010 NFI-010
E280-4T0040G/4T0055P 9.5 NFI-010 NFI-020
E280-4T0055G/4T0075P 13.0 NFI-020 NFI-020
E280-4T0075G/4T0090P 17.0 NFI-020 NFI-020
E280-4T0090G/4T0110P 21 NFI-020 NFI-036
E280-4T0110G/4T0150P 25 NFI-036 NFI-036
E280-4T0150G/4T0185P 32 NFI-036 NFI-036
E280-4T0185G/4T0220P 37 NFI-050 NFI-050
E280-4T0220G/4T0300P 45 NFI-050 NFI-065
E280-4T0300G/4T0370P 60 NFI-065 NFI-080
E280-4T0370G/4T0450P 75 NFI-080 NFI-100
E280-4T0450G/4T0550P 95 NFI-100 NFI-150
E280-4T0550G/4T0750P 115 NFI-150 NFI-150
E280-4T0750G/4T0900P 150 NFI-150 NFI-250
E280-4T0900G/4T1100P 176 NFI-250 NFI-250
E280-4T1100G/4T1320P 210 NFI-250 NFI-250
E280-4T1320G/4T1600P 260 NFI-300 NFI-300
E280-4T1600G/4T1850P 310 NFI-300 NFI-400
E280-4T1850G/4T2000P 360 NFI-400 NFI-400
E280-4T2000G/4T2200P 385 NFI-400 NFI-600
E280-4T2200G/4T2500P 420 NFI-600 NFI-600
E280-4T2500G/4T2800P 475 NFI-600 NFI-600
E280-4T2800G/4T3150P 535 NFI-600 NFI-600
E280-4T3150G/4T3500P 600 NFI-600 NFI-600

EMC 219
Appendix ⅡAC input Reactor Reference Table

AC input reactor (Shanghai Yingfeng)
Model Rated current
E280-4T0011G/4T0015P 3.0 ACL-0005-EISC-E3M8B ACL-0005-EISC-E3M8B
E280-4T0040G/4T0055P 9.5 ACL-0010-EISC-E1M5B ACL-0015-EISH-E1M0B
E280-4T0055G/4T0075P 13.0 ACL-0015-EISH-E1M0B ACL-0020-EISH-EM75B
E280-4T0075G/4T0090P 17.0 ACL-0020-EISH-EM75B ACL-0020-EISH-EM75B
E280-4T0090G/4T0110P 21 ACL-0030-EISCL-EM47 ACL-0030-EISCL-EM47
E280-4T0550G/4T0750P 115 ACL-0120-EISCL-EM12 ACL-0150-EISH-EM11B
E280-4T0750G/4T0900P 150 ACL-0150-EISH-EM11B ACL-0200-EISH-E80UB
E280-4T0900G/4T1100P 176 ACL-0200-EISH-E80UB ACL-0250-EISH-E65UB

220 EMC
Appendix Ⅲ AC Output Reactor Reference Table

AC output reactor (Shanghai Yingfeng)
Model Rated Current
E280-4T0011G/4T0015P 3.0 OCL-0005-EISC-E1M4 OCL-0005-EISC-E1M4
E280-4T0015G/4T0022P 3.7 OCL-0005-EISC-E1M4 OCL-0007-EISC-E1M0
E280-4T0022G/4T0030P 5.5 OCL-0007-EISC-E1M0 OCL-0010-EISC-EM70
E280-4T0030G/4T0040P 7.5 OCL-0010-EISC-EM70 OCL-0010-EISC-EM70
E280-4T0090G/4T0110P 21 OCL-0020-EISC-EM35 OCL-0030-EISCL-EM23
E280-4T0110G/4T0150P 25 OCL-0030-EISCL-EM23 OCL-0040-EISCL-EM18
E280-4T0300G/4T0370P 60 OCL-0060-EISCL-EM12 OCL-0080-EISC-E87U
E280-4T0370G/4T0450P 75 OCL-0080-EISC-E87U OCL-0120-EISC-E58U
E280-4T0450G/4T0550P 95 OCL-0120-EISC-E58U OCL-0120-EISC-E58U
E280-4T0550G/4T0750P 115 OCL-0120-EISC-E58U OCL-0150-EISH-E47U
E280-4T0750G/4T0900P 150 OCL-0150-EISH-E47U OCL-0200-EISH-E35U
E280-4T3150G/4T3500P 600 OCL-0600-EISH-E12U OCL-0800-EISH-E8U7

EMC 221
Appendix Ⅳ DC input Reactor Reference Table

DC reactor model (Shanghai Yingfeng)
Model Rated Current
E280-4T0011G/4T0015P 3.0 DCL-003-EIDC-E28M DCL-0006-EIDC-E11M
E280-4T0015G/4T0022P 3.7 DCL-0006-EIDC-E11M DCL-0006-EIDC-E11M
E280-4T0022G/4T0030P 5.5 DCL-0006-EIDC-E11M DCL-0012-EIDC-E6M3
E280-4T0030G/4T0040P 7.5 DCL-0012-EIDC-E6M3 DCL-0012-EIDC-E6M3
E280-4T0090G/4T0110P 21 DCL-0023-EIDC-E3M6 DCL-0033-EIDH-E2M0
E280-4T0110G/4T0150P 25 DCL-0033-EIDH-E2M0 DCL-0033-EIDH-E2M0
E280-4T0150G/4T0185P 32 DCL-0033-EIDH-E2M0 DCL-0040-EIDH-E1M3
E280-4T0185G/4T0220P 37 DCL-0040-EIDH-E1M3 DCL-0065-EIDH-EM80
E280-4T0220G/4T0300P 45 DCL-0065-EIDH-EM80 DCL-0065-EIDH-EM80
E280-4T0550G/4T0750P 115 DCL-0115-EIDH-EM45 DCL-0160-UIDH-EM36
E280-4T0750G/4T0900P 150 DCL-0160-UIDH-EM36 DCL-0180-UIDH-EM33
E280-4T3150G/4T3500P 600 DCL-0650-UIDH-E72U DCL-0700-UIDH-E72U

222 Optional Components
Chapter 12 Optional Components

12.1. Control Panel
When you use our company’s inverter, please select the base of square inverter control panel
and connecting cable if the control keyboard is needed to put outside the inverter’s control
screen or control cabinet, which can greatly help your installation and adjustment. Square
inverter allows the connecting cable to be less than 15m between the control port of the control
panel and the inverter machine.
12.1.1 The Appearance and Dimension Figure of Control Panel Base
4-φ4.0
Figure C-1 The Installation Dimension of Control Panel Base
12.1.2 The Installation of Control Panel Base

According to the base dimension of the control panel, cut out corresponding installation holes
on control cabinet (please refer to 3.3 Panel’s Installation Dimensions, Chapter 3 for dimension
figure) and fix the control panel base by screws, then insert the remote connecting line into the
interface at the lower opening on the back of panel base.

Optional Components 223
12.2 I/O expansion card introduction
Model:IOV-D104, PN: 050M008003000

Applicable to E280-4T0055G/4T0075P and above models with Class II appearance; the
expansion configuration of standard I/O expansion card is as follows:

• 1-channel 485 communication interface;
• Providing ±10V auxiliary power supply;
• 3-channel digital input DI;
• 1-channel high-speed programmable pulse input;
• 1-channel analog voltage (-10V~10V) input;
• 1-group programmable relay contact output.
Table 12-1: Introduction to terminals of I/O expansion card
Terminal Type Terminal Name Function
Communication RS485 communication physical interface; The

RS+, RS-
Interface details refer to FA parameter.
Auxiliary Power Provide ±10V/max.10mA power supply for

+10V,-10V
Supply external devices.
Analog voltage input: -10V~10, input

Analog Input AI3 impedance≥100MΩ, the details refer to F4
parameter.
Effective closure with CM terminal, input

DI7,DI8 frequency ≤1KHz; The details refer to F3
parameter.
Digital Input
High-speed programmable pulse input and
DI9 effective closure with CM terminal, frequency
≤100KHz; The details refer to F3 parameter.
High-speed programmable OC output, output

Digital Output DO3 frequency ≤100KHz, the details refer to F3
parameter.
TA1
TA1-TB1 normally closed contact;
Programmable
TB1 TA1-TC1 normally open contact;
Relay Output
Contact capacity: AC 250V/1A
TC1
Common GND ±10V, AI3 common terminals

Terminal
CM DO3, DI7, DI8, DI9 common terminals
Model: IOV-A100 PN: 050M008061201

Applicable to E280-4T0040G/4T0055P and below models with Class I appearance; the
expansion configuration of standard I/O expansion card is as follows:

• 5-channel digital input;

• 1-channel NPN type digital output;

• 2-channel analog input (voltage and current input);
• 1-channel analog output (voltage or current output);
• 1-channel 10V/20mA auxiliary power supply;
• 1-group programmable relay contact output (220VAC/1A).
Table 12-2: introduction to terminals of Class A I/O expansion card
Terminal
Terminal Name Function
Type

Digital Input DI1~DI5
frequency ≤1KHz
Optical coupling isolation, NPN type OC

Digital output; output frequency ≤1KHz
DO
Output Withstand voltage: max. 0~24V; sink current
capacity: 0~50mA
Input voltage: 0～10V;input impedance:

AI1
Analog ≥100K Ω
Input
Input current: 0～20mA;input resistance:
AI2
250 Ω
Analog Output: 0~10V (10mA load capacity) or

AO
Output 0~20mA
Power supply for external potentiometer.

Auxiliary +10V
Output current: 10mA
Power
Supply Provide 24V power supply. Output current:
+24V
100mA
TA
Programma Contact capacity:
ble Relay TB Normally open contact: 240V AC 2A,
Output Normally closed contact: 240V AC 1A,
TC
GND AI1, AI2, AO, +10V common terminal

Common
Terminal Digital input/digital output/24V common
CM
terminal

Model: IOV-A102
expansion configuration is as follows:

• 4-channel digital input;
• 1-channel NPN type high-speed digital output;
• 1-channel analog output (voltage or current output);
• 1-channel 485 communication interface;
Table 12-4: Introduction to OV-A102 terminal of I/O expansion card
Terminal
Terminal Type Function
Name

Digital Input DI1~DI4
frequency ≤1KHz
Optical coupling isolation, NPN type OC output;

High-speed Output frequency: ≤50KHz
DO
Digital Output Withstand voltage: max. 0~24V
Sink current capacity: 0~50mA
AI1 Input voltage: 0～10V

Analog Input
Input current: 0～20mA
AI2
Input resistance: 250 Ω
Analog Output AO Output: 0~10V(10mA load capacity) or 0~20mA
Auxiliary Power Output current: 10mA; Power supply for external

+10V
Supply potentiometer.
Auxiliary Power Output current: 100mA; Provide 24V power

+24V
Supply supply.
TA
Programmable Normally open contact: 240V AC 2A,
Relay Output TB Normally closed contact: 240V AC 1A,
TC
Communication RS+
RS485 communication physical interface
Interface
RS-
Common GND AI1, AI2, AO, +10V common terminal

Terminal
CM Digital input/digital output/24V common terminal

Model: IOV-A103
expansion configuration is as follows:

• 1-group +12V power supply (load capacity ≤100mA);
• 3-channel PG signal single-ended input;
• 4-channel quantity input;
• 1-channel high-speed digital input;
Table 12-5: Introduction to IOV-A103 terminal of I/O expansion card
Terminal
Terminal Type Function
Name
Effective closure with CM terminal, input frequency

DI1~DI4
≤1KHz
Digital Input
In addition to DI~DI4 function, it also serves as
DI5 high-speed pulse input terminal. Max. input
frequency: ≤100Khz
Input voltage: 0～10V

AI1
Input impedance: ≥100K Ω
Analog Input
Input current: 0～20mA
AI2
Input resistance: 250 Ω
Auxiliary Power Provide +12V/max. 200mA current for external

+12V
Supply devices
Access to NPN type encoder A-phase output, max.

A
frequency ≤100 KHz
Single-ended Access to NPN type encoder B-phase output, max.

Input B
frequency ≤100 KHz
Access to NPN type encoder Z-phase output, max.

Z
frequency ≤100KHz
TA
Programmable Normally open contact: 240V AC 2A,
Relay Output TB Normally closed contact: 240V AC 1A,
TC
Common GND AI1, AI2 common terminal

Terminal
CM digital input/+12V common terminal

12.3 PG expansion card introduction
E280 series inverters adopt closed-loop vector control mode; when user is engaged in such
mode, it's necessary to select PG card fittings. PG card can receive encoder signals of
single-ended open-collector output, push-pull output and differential output.
Precautions for use of PG expansion card:
1) Signal lines and power lines of PG expansion card shall be laid separately; no parallel
routing.
2) In order to avoid interference to encoder signals, please employ shielded cable as
signal line of PG card.
3) The shielded layer of encoder shielded cable shall be grounding (e.g. E terminal of
inverter), in addition, it's necessary to adopt single-ended grounding mode to avoid
interference to signals.
12.3.1 Standard Type PG Expansion Card

Model: PGV-C000, PN: 050M009012002
Applicable to E280-4T0055G/4T0075P and above models, the expansion configuration of
standard type expansion card is as follows:
• Provide a group of +12V power supply (load capacity≤500mA);
• Provide standard interface for three-phase differential input of incremental encoder;
• Differential voltage ≤+12V;
• Max Resolution: 8190 C/T;
• Response frequency ≤500KHz.
Table 12-6: Introduction to terminals of standard type PG expansion card
Terminal Type Terminal Name Function
Auxiliary Power Provide +12V/load capacity ≤200mA for

+12V
Supply external devices
Common Terminal GD Power supply reference ground
A+ Encoder A-phase differential input

A- (+12V±20%), max. frequency ≤100 KHz
B+ Encoder B-phase differential input

Differential Input
B- (+12V±20%), max. frequency ≤100 KHz
Z+ Encoder C-phase differential input

Z- (+12V±20%), max. frequency ≤100KHz

12.4 Tension control expansion card
12.4.1 Basic product information

Standard I Type (Model APV-F301) is applicable to E280-4T0040 and above models
Standard II Type (Model APV-B300) is applicable to E280-4T0030/2S0022 and above models
12.4.2 Product introduction

Tension control expansion card is a expansion card that is compatible with V series inverters,
and is applicable to wire drawing machine industry and products related to
winding/unwinding control.
The expansion card can calculate the high stable tension control parameters to meet the
application requirement in the field on the basis of rolling diameter. As for winding and
unwinding operations of wire drawing machine, the tension control on PID adjustment in
speed mode can be achieved by means of external speed setting and real-time signals of
tension oscillating bar for winding and unwinding, to quickly enable tension oscillating bar at
optional position at a time to reach equilibrium position, and to keep stable winding and
unwinding performance in high speed operation.
12.4.3 Product function
Rolling diameter Rolling diameter thickness integral, rolling diameter line speed
calculation calculation and rolling diameter frequency ratio calculation, etc.
Constant tension
Output 0-100 % adjustable torque at zero speed
at zero speed
Breakage
Conduct rapid detection on breakage via feedback input
detection
Tension Static friction compensation, sliding friction compensation,

compensation system inertia compensation and material inertia compensation
Motor switch Realize roll change function via motor switch
Two kinds of PID parameters can be transited smoothly based on

Process PID rolling diameter to guarantee steady-state wave motions at full
reel and empty reel conditions.
Metering function The function can be realized by line speed integral.
12.4.4 Technical data

Starting torque Greater than 180%
Smooth starting Over modulation is less than 10%
Steady-state
Less than 5%
wave motion

12.5 Expansion card of all-in-one veneer peeling lathe
12.5.1 Basic product information

Standard I Type (Model APV-D302, coding number: 050M010060501) is applicable to
E280-4T0055G/4T0075P and above models.
12.5.2 Product introduction

The expansion card is designed for electric control systems of veneer peeling lathe and
all-in-one machine, and is compatible with V series inverters, to realize rotary-cut of
round timber and veneer cutting and other round timber processing functions.
12.5.3 Product function
Terminal
Type Function
Name
auxiliary power
+24V Provide +24V/100mA current for external devices
supply
common
GD Power supply reference ground
terminal
Encoder A+ Encoder A-phase differential input (+12V±20%),

A-phase input max. input frequency 100KHz
A-
Encoder B+ Encoder A-phase differential input (+12V±20%),

B-phase input max. input frequency 100KHz
B-
digital input DI7~DI11 Digital input (*), input frequency ≤1KHz
digital output DO3 High-speed programmable OC output
common
CM DO3, DI7, DI8, DI9 common terminals
terminal
12.5.4 Technical data
Under the circumstance of sound mechanical features, the

Veneer thickness
thickness uniformity deviation of cut full plate veneer is less than
uniformity
± 0.05mm;
Veneer tail-board The thickness uniformity deviation of last rotary-cut part (30mm)
uniformity is less than ± 0.10 mm;
Slitting board
The width deviation of middle board is ±2mm
width
Tail-board length Deviation: ±20mm

12.6 Braking Component

Users are able to select resistance value and power according to actual needs, (but selected
resistance value cann’t be lower than recommended value in below table, while selected resistance
power can be bigger). Selection of brake resistance depends on motor generation power in system,
and in concern with system inertia, deceleration time, energy of potential energy load etc. The bigger
system inertia, shorter deceleration time and more frequent braking time, then to choose bigger
power of brake resistance and lower resistance value.
12.6.1 Braking Unit Model Instruction

DBKU – 30 - A
Production Serial
Number Voltage Class
Braking Unit A 380V

B 690V
Rated Current
Figure 12-1 Model Instruction Diagram
12.6.2 The Selection of Brake Resistor

Customers can select different resistant values and power based on the actual situation, (but
the resistant value must not be less than the recommended values in the figure, while the
power can be more than those in the figure.) The selection of brake resistor should be decided
according to the power range of the electrical machine in the practical application system,
which is relevant to the system inertia, deceleration time, the power of potential energy load, etc.
Customers should make the decision according to the actual situation. The larger the system
inertia is, the shorter the necessary deceleration time will be, and the more frequent the brake,
which causes the brake resistor needs to choose larger power and the resistant value becomes
smaller.
1 Resistance value selection
While braking, almost all motor regeneration energy consumes at braking resistance. The formula:
U*U/R=Pb
U---- braking voltage under stable system braking state (it varies from different systems, it takes
700V for common AC 380V system)
Pb----power of braking

2 Power of brake resistance selection
The power of brake resistance and power of braking keep consistent in theory, but should take 70%
derating into account. The formula:
0.7*Pr=Pb*D
Pr---- power of brake resistance
D---- braking frequency (time proportion of regeneration process accounts for the whole process),
generally it is 10%. Please refer to table below:
Type Lift Winding & Centrifuge Accidental

unwinding braking load
Proportion 20%~30% 20%~30% 50%~60% 5%
Brake resistance selection table

Power of
Adaptive Brake Brake
brake
Model motor resistance torque Brake unit
resistance
（KW） value（Ω）（100%）
（KW）
E280-4T0011G/4T0015P 1.1 0.3 ≥400 100 Standard
E280-4T0015G/4T0022P 1.5 0.5 ≥300 100 Standard
E280-4T0022G/4T0030P 2.2 0.65 ≥200 100 Standard
E280-4T0030G/4T0040P 3.0 0.75 ≥150 100 Standard
E280-4T0040G/4T0055P 4.0 1.0 ≥125 100 Standard
E280-4T0055G/4T0075P 5.5 1.5 ≥85 100 Standard
E280-4T0075G/4T0090P 7.5 2.0 ≥65 100 Standard
E280-4T0090G/4T0110P 9.0 2.5 ≥60 100 Standard
E280-4T0110G/4T0150P 11 2.5 ≥50 100 Standard
E280-4T0150G/4T0185P 15 3.6 ≥35 100 Standard
E280-4T0185G/4T0220P 18.5 4.5 ≥30 100 Standard
E280-4T0220G/4T0300P 22 5.5 ≥25 100 Standard
E280-4T0300G/4T0370P 30 6.5 ≥20 100 Optional
E280-4T0370G/4T0450P 37 8.5 ≥15 100 Optional
E280-4T0450G/4T0550P 45 12 ≥12 100 Optional
E280-4T0550G/4T0750P 55 15 ≥10 100 Optional
E280-4T0750G/4T0900P 75 18 ≥8 100 Optional
E280-4T0900G/4T1100P 90 18 ≥8 100 Optional
E280-4T1100G/4T1320P 110 25 ≥6 100 Optional
E280-4T1320G/4T1600P 132 30 ≥5 100 Optional
E280-4T1600G/4T1850P 160 36 ≥4 100 Optional
E280-4T1850G/4T2000P 185 42 ≥3.5 100 Optional
E280-4T2000G/4T2200P 200 50 ≥3 100 Optional
E280-4T2200G/4T2500P 220 50 ≥3 100 Optional
E280-4T2500G/4T2800P 250 60 ≥2.5 100 Optional
E280-4T2800G/4T3150P 280 60 ≥2.5 100 Optional
E280-4T3150G/4T3500P 315 75 ≥2 100 Optional

12.6.3 The Appearance of Braking Unit
Figure 12-2 Appearance Diagram
12.6.4 The Installation Dimensions of Braking Unit
W
W1 D
H
H1
Figure 12-3 Installation Dimension Table
The installation dimensions of braking uniting is as the following table:

Braking Unit Model Screw
W1 W H1 H D
(Three-phase380V) Specification
DBKU-30-A
60 115 194 207 120 M4
DBKU-50-A
DBKU-110-A
—— —— —— —— —— ——
DBKU-160-A

12.6.5 Single Braking Unit and Inverter’s Connection Reference Diagram
Simphoenix Braking Unit

Inverter
24V
POW
DO1 (DO2、CM) ENA
HO EBR RUN
E E
P+ P- PB P+ P+ P-
Brake Resisto
Figure 12-4 Connection Diagram

When the on (off) function of braking unit is applied, valid in deceleration process must be
turned on in the function set in the deceleration valid control port of the inverter connecting with
ENA (the corresponding control port to square inter is DO1 or DO2) before the inverter is
started. When the function is not needed, please connect ENA with 24V common port CM.
12.6.6 Connection Notes

1) When inverter is connected with braking unit, the braking unit will be burnt out and
damage the inverter if P+, P- are connected oppositely, so please check carefully
before the inverter is powered on;.
2) When major loop is being installed and connected, please cut off either the connection
with inverter or the power of inverter, wait for 5-10 minutes, and then start operation
after the power indicator of inverter or braking unit goes out;
3) Control loop connection should be as far as possible from the connection line of major
power circuit, to avoid false operation caused by interference noise. If control circuit
connection must pass across the connection line of major power circuit, it must pass
across vertically. If the connection distance is too long, twisted-pair or shielded line
must be used.
Please refer to braking unit specification for more instructions, which can be downloaded
on our company’s website. The download link: http://www.simphoenix.com.cn.

Variador Seryman

Uploaded by

Document Informationclick to expand document information

Copyright:

Available Formats

Variador Seryman

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Description:

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Variador Seryman

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Preface

Electric Technologies Co., Ltd.

maintenance, fault diagnosis and troubleshooting of E280 series inverters.

SHENZHEN SIMPHOENIX ELECTRIC TECHNOLOGIES CO., Ltd.

E280 Vectorial General Purpose Inverter User Manual

Revision December: April 2017

1.1 Product confirmation.................................................................................................1

1.1.1 Precautions of unpacking inspection............................................................1

1.2 Safety precautions ....................................................................................................2

1.2.1 Installation precautions ................................................................................2

1.2.2 Safety precautions for wiring........................................................................2

1.2.3 Safety precautions for running operation .....................................................3

1.2.4 Safety caution for maintenance check .........................................................3

1.3 Knowledge on operation ...........................................................................................4

1.3.1 Application knowledge of driving general motor...........................................4

1.3.2 Application knowledge of driving special motor ...........................................4

1.3.3 Ambient environment ...................................................................................4

1.3.4 Connection knowledge of peripheral equipment ..........................................4

1.3.5 Transportation and storage ..........................................................................5

1.4 Abandon caution.......................................................................................................5

1.5 Other cautions ..........................................................................................................5

2 Product Introduction ...........................................................................................................6

2.1 Model description......................................................................................................6

2.2 Product appearance .................................................................................................6

2.3 Model table ...............................................................................................................8

2.4 Product technical index and specifications ...............................................................9

3 Installation Of Frequency Inverter....................................................................................13

3.1 Installation of frequency inverter .............................................................................13

3.2 Size and assembly of operation panel ....................................................................15

3.3 Installation size of the panel....................................................................................16

3.4 Removal of terminal cover ......................................................................................17

3.5 Installation size of inverters.....................................................................................18

4 Wiring Of Frequency Inverter ...........................................................................................21

4.2 Connection of optional fittings and frequency inverter ............................................22

4.3.1 Wiring of standard terminals of control panel .............................................27

4.3.2 Function description of control terminal .....................................................27

4.3.3 Description of dial switch on the control panel ...........................................28

4.4 Wiring Of Major Loop Terminal................................................................................29

4.4.1 Terminal Functions.....................................................................................29

4.4.2 Main loop terminal diagram........................................................................30

4.5 Wiring for basic operation of inverters.....................................................................33

5 Operation And Simple Running Of Frequency Inverter..................................................34

5.1 Basic function of the panel......................................................................................34

5.1.1 Panel description .......................................................................................34

5.2 Basic functions and operating methods of panel ....................................................37

5.2.1 Basic functions of panel .............................................................................37

5.2.2 Operating methods of panel.......................................................................39

5.3 Simple running of frequency inverter ......................................................................41

5.3.1 Initial settings .............................................................................................41

5.3.2 Simple operation........................................................................................42

6 Functional Parameter Table ..............................................................................................44

6.1 System management parameter.............................................................................45

6.2 Running command selection...................................................................................49

6.3 Frequency setting ...................................................................................................50

6.4 Control command source........................................................................................51

6.5 Start and stop..........................................................................................................52

6.6 Acceleration and deceleration characteristics parameters......................................53